Home

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual

image

Contents

1. og 6401 Program sum check error a g e STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters 2 z 6402 Memory capacity setting error e Check that the following functions are not used with an 6403 Latched area setting error unsupported PLC version when a memory cassette is attached 6404 Comment area setting error Permanent PLC lock supported in the FX3U FX3UC PLCs of Ver 2 61 or later 6405 File register area setting error Read protect the execution program for block passwords 3 6406 BFM initial value sum check error supported in the FX3U FX3UC PLCs of Ver 3 00 or later ein 6407 BFM initial value error FX3U FLROM 1M S 29 supported in the FX3U FX3UC PLCs of Ver 3 00 or later o ss 6409 Other setting error Sica an Built in CC Link LT setting parameter dedicated a Stops area error operation Built in CC Link LT setting parameter special settin STOP tne PLC ane Correctly set the parameters 6412 p gP p I Set parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON 4 area sum check error ihe power ee Built in CC Link LT setting parameter dedicated 3S area sum check error 9 e STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters 6420 Special parameter sum check error e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then S turn ON the power e Check the contents of the special parameter error code D8489 confirm troubleshooting for special adapters special blocks and 6421 Special paramet
2. 5 Low order Available numeric value range 16 bit 0 to 32 767 b15 ol4jo rjol4jo 1jol o 1 ol4 bO 32 bit 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 TN OWMDWTA OWDTA ODOT N z q ODOTA TT WON OD Sign OK OOONN 0 Positive LOT Ne 1 Negative 1 The sign is valid only when a timer is handled as a substitute for a data register 2 32 bit High order K H_________ 32 bit E Low order b34 LOL lol1 alolilolilolilolilililaiji m TN ODTNO OTNODTNODTNODATNODTNODTAN Sign Nr ONOMA CONOR ATKRMNODDATA ONOM oO FINOJN ONTON THT OWKRMNDATMOWOWN 0 Positive O Oo N oo N OTR OTN WONoOADOTN STROArOWKR OCOODTN ONAN 1 Negatve No nHKeOoOrnArKOON NS m oOo o Noma oOo OTN Ke RO OMnOnDs OWN 2 Use examples in applied instructions For the full use of counters as numeric devices refer to the instruction explanation manual offered separately FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction CN20 current value is transferred to D10 D10 A decimal integer 100 is compared with CN30 current value and the comparison result is output to MO to M2 BCD The contents of CN10 current value are converted into BCD and output to YOOO to Y007 to control the 7 segment display unit K2Y000 CN5 current value is multiplied by 2 and the obtained value is transferred to D5 D4 CN200 current value is transferred to D1 DO CN200 current value is compared with a decimal integer zone
3. cccccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaas 109 2 9 8 Registration of data stored in extension registers and extension file registerS ccccseeeeees 111 210 INGEX REGISTER V and L sbe2serc2eschoes teeta a A 115 210A N mpersofimdex LEGISIGIS tate ee et aan al by 115 210 2 F nctions and STUCIUrES soara a a a a e ea 116 2 10 3 Madein OF dEViICES vice can acs eee ee ad E a i ti 116 2V1 Pointer P and eaa a eaa 117 2 111 Numbers Of Pointers esee e i EA a R aaa EaR 117 2 11 2 Functions and operation examples of branch POINterS ccccccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeees 118 2 11 3 Functions and operation examples of interrupt pointersS sannunennuennneeennnnrnnsnenrenrnsnrrnenrnnne 119 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions 124 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers 124 SASL ypes of nument VAIUCS 2 0 543 cccteveacncetuarcecrstesa e euarhain a awitlanauadaiedekt aceasta a 124 3 1 2 CONVErSION OF MUIMENIC VAMC Sras aeo a soba learned tele ne pce ice ete eR poe ee 125 3 1 3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations cece cceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaeeeeees 125 3 2 Specification of Constants K H and E Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers 128 3 21 Constant K decimal NUMDEr ein Seca eee a 128 3 2 2 Constant H hexadecimal number ccccccccsseeeccen
4. Stores the number of times M8007 is set to ON Cleared when the power is turned OFF Accumulated instruction execution time from the step 0 Unit 0 1 ms i Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 D 8010 Current scan time v The displayed value includes the waiting time for the constant scan operation trig gered by M8039 Minimum value of scan time D 8011 Unit 0 1 ms Minimum scan time Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 Maximum value of scan time Unit 0 1 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 D 8012 Maximum scan time 0 to 59 seconds For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8013 Second data 0 to 59 minutes D 8014 i Minde data For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8015 0 to 23 hours Hourdat For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8016 1st to 31st day Day data For real time clock y Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8017 January to December Month data For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8018 Last 2 digits of year 0 to 99 Ysardal For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 D 8019 O Sunday to 6 Saturday For real time clock Day of the week data Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 178 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u
5. Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 1 min cycle ON duration 30 s OFF M 8014 SD mindo duration 30 s v Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Stops and presets time counting M 8015 For real time clock z Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Stops the time display M 8016 For real time clock z Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Corrects by 30 seconds M 8017 For real time clock z 4 Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Detects installation Always remains ON M 8018 For real time clock vii Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Notifies a real time clock RTC error M 8019 For real time clock z1 Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Flag RS S lt S e Turns ON when the addition or subtraction result is 0 M 8021 Turns ON when the subtraction result is less than the Borrow maximum negative value M 8022 Turns ON when carry occurs in the addition result or when Carry overflow occurs in the shift operation result M 8023 Floating point operation flag M 8024 Unavailable S M 8025 Indicates the HSC mode poe z M 8026 Indicates the RAMP mode ge fon z M 8027 Indicates the PR mode Changes over the 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer M 8028 Enables interrupts while the FROM TO instruction is executed M 8029 Instruction execution Turns ON when the operation of DSW etc is completed complete N 1 Available in Ver 3 07 or later 2 Available in Ver 2 1 or later 168 FXCPU Structured Programm
6. 1 625x2 29 2147 4 625x27 The sign bit b31 indicates whether data is positive or negative but is not handled as a complement Number of significant figures The number of significant figures of binary floating point is approximately 7 when expressed in the decimal notation Binary floating point handles the following range Minimum absolute value 1175494 x 10744 Maximum absolute value 3402823 x 10 Handling of zero M8020 borrow M8021 and carry M8022 flags These flags operate as follows in floating point operations Zeroflag 1 when the result is truly O Borrow flag 1 when the result does not reach the minimum unit but is not 0 Carry flag 1 when the absolute value of the result exceeds the available value Monitoring of binary floating point real number Programming software such as GX Works2 which supports the display of floating point can directly monitor binary floating point real number 126 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers Decimal floating point real number scientific notation Because binary floating point real number is difficult to understand for users it can be converted into decimal floating point real number But the PLC executes internal operations using binary floating point real number in any case Decima
7. 5 Click the OK button to finish the setting and close the Special Module Initial Setting dialog box 291 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting positioning The positioning setting function is available in all FX3cG FX3cGc FX3u PLCs and FX3uc PLC Ver 2 20 or later Click the Positioning tab The Positioning tab is displayed when Positioning is checked on the Memory Capacity tab Set the positioning constants used in the TBL instruction For the TBL instruction refer to the positioning control manual FX Parameter Setting Range Bias Speed Hz 0 1 10 or Less of Max Speed aT o o Max Speed Hz Creep Speed Hz 1000 1000 1000 1000 Zero Return Speed Hz 50000 50000 50000 50000 Acceleration Time ms 100 100 100 100 Deceleration Time ms 100 100 100 100 Interruption Input of DYIT Instruction Individual Setting Print Window Print Window Preview Default Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range Bias Speed Hz Set the bias speed for each output number of pulse 1 10 or less of the Initial value 0 maximum speed Set the maximum speed for each output number of pulse A H eee Initial value 100000 i Set the creep speed in the DSZR instruction for each output number of pulse Initial value 5 Creep Speed Hz a P SP j 10 to 32767 2 Zao Reum Speed iHa Set the
8. FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this device M8392 re Switches the function of C248 and C253 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 7 Function switching device M8395 Switches the function of C254 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 7 FX3S FX3U FX3UC PLCs do not support this device Switches the edge counting type between 1 and 4 of C251 C252 and C254 M8198 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 8 FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this device Switches the edge counting type between 1 and 4 of C253 C255 and C253 M8199 OP For details refer to Subsection 2 7 8 FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this device 78 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 4 Operation status of hardware counters and software counters F X0S F X0 F XON FX1S F X1N FX1NC F XU F X2C F X2N F X2NC F X3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this function 4 Indicates the operation status of C235 C241 C244 mReo C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 Indicates the operation status of C236 gJ D O D O D M8381 M8382 Ul S2913 Indicates the operation status of C237 C242 and C245 4 Indicates the operation status of C238 C248 C248 M8383 Operation status OP C250 C253 and C255 Software counter Hardware counter M8384 1 Indicates the operation status of C239 and C243 3 M8385 Indicates the operation status of C240
9. cecccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeessaeeeeeeeas 62 2 7 2 Input assignment for high speed COUNTETS cccceeccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaaeeeesseeeeeesaeenas 69 2 7 3 Handling of high speed counters cccccecccccsssseeccseesceccueesececeusscecesesececseseeeesseseeessaceeesseeeeesesias 14 2 7 4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value cccccecccceeeeeceeeceeaeeeesaeeeesaneees 77 Zhe Related OC VIC OS serieren E staan beanie Sana EE AE vase EEEE EE E EAEE 78 2 7 6 Change of logic of external reset input SIQNAl ccccccseeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeeeeeeas 79 2 7 7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of fUNCTION cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 80 2 7 8 How to use 2 phase 2 counting input counters C251 to C255 for 4 edge counting 06 82 2 7 9 Condition under which hardware counters are handled as software COuNterS cccseeeeeeeee 83 2 7 10 Response frequency of high speed counters ceccceceecccseececeeeeecceeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeesseeeeeseeeesees 84 Zl el Ae C ONS Oly WIS cies a cae os eh ate Porc ncatal case E 92 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Table of Contents 2 8 Data Register and File Register D ccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeseeeseeneesenaeeneenenes 94 2 8 1 Numbers of data registers and file reQi
10. 233 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 18 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 When the analog expansion board is connected operations and functions are assigned to devices shown in the table below in accordance with the connection position Operations and functions in the table below are shaded for write prohibited devices For details refer to the Analog Control Edition 1 Special auxiliary relay M8260 to M8279 e FX3S FX3G PLC Operation and function FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD 1st analog expansion board M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M 8262 Not used M 8263 Not used M 8264 Output hold mode cancel M 8265 Not used Number M 8266 Not used M 8267 Not used M 8268 Not used M 8269 Not used 2nd analog expansion board M 8270 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8271 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M8272 Not used w 8273 Not used M 8274 Output hold mode cancel M 8275 Not used M 8276 Not used M 8277 Not used M 8278 Not used M 8279 Not used Not used 1 In the case of FX3G PLC versions 1 10 or later are applicable 2 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected 234 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4
11. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Table of Contents Table of Contents Positioning OF This Walia ssegicte eet acece speaker eceee ea a innia ra iaeaea raaa aa aada aaraa 6 Related Ma anualS ornica A 9 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals cccccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 12 1 Device Outline 13 ti Devices Constructing PEG copiii ita hedeacsandcboaeeeatsietneantctuseh boatvakatestatne 13 1 1 1 Relation among devices cochsnticeeeo2taautuveutcuyvarnednteiieree nciiseieslaseei wxkeuasieuertauavandenvandaterstguiadeediebaenyvanreuls 14 EEZ BEN ICS PUIG ONIS Ee a a a a ese 15 1 2 Program Memory and DeVICES ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesseeeeneeeeneeeeeneeseseeeeeneseesaesneneseeneeneanes 17 12 1 Memory str ct le aniier e a a daw a eE a a a a A a ued sky Naena T 17 1 2 2 Memory operations and backup against power interruption power ON OFF and RUN STOP 22 1 2 3 Types of backup methods against power interruption cccecccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeecesaueeesaaeesaaeees 32 1 2 4 Change of devices between general type and l
12. M 8183 2 Data transmission sequence error master station M504 v3 i Data transmission sequence error E 2 v 3 J A y Data transmission sequence error E 2 v 3 Vv y 7 Data transmission sequence error 2 A 3 ye yf s Data transmission sequence error 2 J 3 rg y z 2 Data transmission sequence error s 2 Z 3 Sf 2 Data transmission sequence error y 2 3 y v p i Data transmission sequence error 2 y 3 ye yf M 8191 2 Data transmission sequence being executed M503 v3 M18192 Ee ee eee M 8193 ae ee a A M16194 ae ee ee a M 8195 E M ET ae ee ee a M8196 a Ee e M18197 Ea e a a M8198 2 e Es Ee es a M 8199 ENEN eee ee ee l 2 Numbers inside are used in FX1S PLCs 3 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 164 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 6 for details M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 M 8217 M 8218 M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 c20 com 202 203 com 205 206 car 208 208 CAO ea ao exis exe ao aus a xe aos ca a CZ CAR om co om
13. soug QI SIOJOWEIE jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name PLC status D 8007 Instantaneous power interruption D 8008 Instantaneous power interruption detection time D 8009 24V DC failure Unit number where 24V DC has failed Clock D 8010 Current scan time D 801 1 Minimum scan time D 8012 Maximum scan time D 8013 Second data D 8014 Minute data D 8015 Hour data D 8016 Day data D 8017 Month data D 8018 Year data D 8019 Day of the week data Applicable model special device Initial value e FX2N PLCs AC power supply type 10 ms y y M8008 e FX2N FX2NC PLCs DC power supply type 5ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 f e elie 4 o vV The displayed value includes the waiting Content of register Stores the number of times M8007 is set to ON Cleared when the power is turned OFF Minimum input device number of function unit or extension power supply unit where 24V DC has failed Accumulated instruction execution time from the step 0 Unit 0 1 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 Minimum value of scan time Unit 0 1 ms time for the constant scan operation trig gered by M8039 Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 Maximum value
14. switches to the STOP mode M8000 OFF Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 M 8009 ON when 24 V DC power fails in any I O extension units or D8009 24V DC failure special function unit block 138 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX3U FX3UC FX3G FX3GC FX3S Turns ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle ON duration 5 ms OFF Number and name Operation and function Clock M 8010 a cok duration 5 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle ON duration 50 ms M 8012 ne 100ms clock OFF duration 50 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 M 8013 Turns ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle ON duration 500 ms iseccbek OFF duration 500 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 1 min cycle ON duration 30 s OFF M 8014 ee i aia cine duration 30 s Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Stops and presets time counting M 8015 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Stops the time display M 8016 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Corrects by 30 seconds M 8017 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Detects installation Always remains ON M 8018 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Notifies a real time clock RTC error M 8019 For real time clock Refer to Subsection
15. 1 phase 2 counting input Phase A Phase A LPL Phase B A counter automatically executes up Phase B counting or down counting according to Up counting changes in the input status of the phase A or B as shown on the left The counting direction can be checked in gpa lias al 4 1 1 1 1 18251 to M8255 Phase A Phase A ON Down counting 1 OFF Up counting 1 edge counting 2 phase 2 counting input Phase B oem F1 1 1 1 11 11 Up counting Down counting D S J O O D O p lt 62 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 4 Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs General purpose inputs X000 to X007 X003 are used for high speed counter inputs An encoder adopting the output type shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal Encoders adopting the voltage output type and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high speed counter inputs gJ D O D O D For the wiring refer to the manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit 1 9q Ul S9149 Output type which can be directly connected to input terminal of Open collector transistor output type compatible with 24 VDC main unit Output type which can be directly connected to input terminal of x Differential line driver output type Output voltage 5 VDC or less FX3U 4HSX ADP 2
16. 8 Provided 4 E 49 5 C251 Not provided F J D Not provided lt E 32 bit ro 5 Software AN Q anniek 1 edge counting bidirectional Speuided A counter RN 5 D Provided m O N T 5 In FX2N FX2Nc PLCs Classification Counter No 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input 6 4 edge counting terminal terminal vy o ODO Hardware C235 3 3 Zs counters C236 2O 2 D Q wn Not provided 2 z 32 bit Not provided U8 i Q bidirectional 7 I Software counter Q counters e G Provided T w Provided D Hardware i a 4 C246 Not provided counters 2 Not provided 32 bit 3 bidirectional pa Sones counter Provided Q counters g Provided EN Hardware 2 4 C251 Not provided counters 2 Not provided 32 bit 3 1 edge counting bidirectional i one ate counter Provided Q counters g Provided Q N 1 They are handled as software counters depending on the operating condition When they are handled as software counters they get restrictions of both the maximum response frequency and the total frequency 67 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 7 High Speed Counter C 6 In FXos FX0 FXON PLCs 2 phase 2 counting input 1 phase 2 counting input 1 phase 1 counting input 7 In FXuU FX2c PLCs 1 phase 1 counting input 2 phase 2 counting input 1 phase 2 counting input Classification Counter No
17. DEBCD Conversion from decimal floating point real number into binary floating point real number DEBIN S19 UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 127 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 2 Specification of Constants K H and E Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers 3 2 Specification of Constants K H and E Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers When handling constants in a sequence program use constants K decimal H hexadecimal and E floating point In peripheral equipment for programming add K to a decimal number H to a hexadecimal number and E to a floating point real number for operations associated with numeric values in instructions Examples K100 decimal number H64 hexadecimal number and E1 23 or E1 23 10 real number The roles and functions of constants are described below 3 2 1 Constant K decimal number K indicates a decimal integer and is mainly used to specify the set value of timers and counters and numeric values used as operands in instructions Example K1234 The decimal constant specification range is as follows When word data 16 bits is used K 32768 to K32767 When double word data 32 bits is used K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 3 2 2 Constant H hexadecimal number H indicates a hexadecimal number and is mainly used to specify numer
18. DRVI DRVA e Calculation of the total frequency The total frequency is calculated using the following expression Total frequency gt Sum of frequency used by 1 phase counters Sum of frequency used by 2 phase counters Calculation example Example1 When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz lt Counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input C236 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input C237 1 phase 1 counting 10 kHz is input C253 2 phase 2 counting 5 kHz is input Total115 kHz 120 kHz Overall frequency Example2 When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 are used Number of pulse width pulse period measurement inputs X003 Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 kHz 120 kHz lt Counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input C236 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input Total100 kHz lt 120 kHz Overall frequency 86 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 3 In FX3s PLC Counter type Overall frequency determined by condition of instructions used Response Software counter frequency When DHSCS DHSCR
19. In counters CS indicates a contact CC indicates a coil and CN indicates the current value Refer to the Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals 2 6 1 Numbers of counters The tables below show counter C numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal For high speed counters refer to Section 2 7 1 In FX3S FX3G FX3GcC FX3u FX3uc PLCs 16 bit up counter 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 0 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 General type Latched battery backed Generalities Latched battery backed up type up type FX3U FX3UC CO to C99 C100 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234 PLC 100 points 100 points 2 20 points 15 points 7 16 bit up counter 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 0 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 E Fixed latched EEPROM E T Fixed latched EEPROM yp keep type yP keep type FX3G FX3GC CO to C15 C16 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234 PLC 16 points 184 points 20 points 15 points 16 bit up counter 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 0 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 64732 Gen araltuae Fixed latched EEPROM Cener oE yP keep type yP CO to C15 C16 to C31 C200 to C234 Be 16 points 16 points 35 points 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 2
20. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 2015 Foreword This manual describes devices and parameters for structured programs used in the MELSEC F FX Series Please read this manual and manuals of relevant products before use sufficiently understand the specifications and use the unit correctly and safely See to it that this manual is supplied to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents described in this manual 2009 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows a Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards requi
21. Refer to Subsection 4 2 3 poe latch Remains ON during 1 scan when instantaneous power M 8007 interruption is detected Even if M8007 turns ON the PLC continues operation as far Instantaneous power foe en i D8007 interruption as the duration of low supply voltage is within the time period specified by D8008 Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 Turns ON when instantaneous power interruption is detected M 8008 When the duration of low supply voltage exceeds the time D8008 Power interruption period specified by D8008 M8008 turns OFF and the PLC switches to the STOP mode M8000 OFF Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 M 8009 Ane DC failure Turns ON when 24V DC power fails in either function unit as DELBES D8009 1 Function units are available only in FX1N FX2N PLCs 156 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Clock M 8010 M 801 1 10 ms clock M 8012 100ms clock M 8013 1 sec clock M 8014 1 min clock M 8015 M 8016 M 8017 M 8018 M 8019 mele M 8020 Zero M 8021 Borrow M 8022 Carry M 8023 M 80241 M 8025 2 M 8026 2 M 8027 2 M 8028 M 8029 Instruction execution complete me 2 Ta Applicable model FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc COresPonding special device Turns ON an
22. UA M8386 Indicates the operation status of C244 OP 2 Do gt M8387 Indicates the operation status of C245 OP Z3 Re 3 g 49 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 7 6 Change of logic of external reset input signal 4 7 O 49 Counters C241 to C245 C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 are usually reset when the external reset input 5 signal turns ON 5 By using the program shown below the logic can be reversed so that these counters are reset when the 8 external reset input signal turns OFF F X0S F X0 F XON FX1S F X1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N F X2NC F X3S F X3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this function Counter No Program to reverse logic of external reset input signal Description sioug Q The logic of the external reset input signal is reversed ae 3 ae OUn a2 so that the counters are reset when the external reset 6 C252 to C255 EN ENO input signal turns OFF oa The logic is reversed for all target counters vos CCoil 3 33 mS L goa Caution When the logic of the external reset input signal is reversed C253 switches to a software counter y Oo T a E 2 S D 79 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function The assignment of input terminal and the function of software counters change as shown below when the following special auxiliary relays are
23. Warranty eee cee eee cr eee err er eee ar ec ene een ogee ers Se eee es eee ee eee er renee eer eee eee eer rere 305 FREVISIONFUSUOLY sogindi net ole ees Got et ete ott eet ieee i ened 306 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Positioning of This Manual Positioning of This Manual This manual explains devices and parameters for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Refer to other manuals for sequence instructions and application functions Refer to each corresponding manual for analog communication positioning control and special units and blocks 1 When using FX3S FX3G F X3Gc F X3u FX3uc PLCs MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Additional Manual Q L F This manual explains programming methods specifications functions etc required to create Structured This manual FX Structured FX Structured FX Structured Special unit block structured programs FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Additional Manual This manual explains devices and parameters for structured programs provided by GX Works2 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Additional Manual This manual explains sequence instructions for structured programs provided by GX Works2 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions Additional Manual This manual explains application functions for stru
24. lt The PLC continues PID operation gt The PLC continues operation with each parameter set to the 6745 The derivative value exceeds the limit due to the fea aOR miniman vale derivative gain KD beyond the limit 6746 The derivative result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 6747 l The PID operation result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 lt The PLC finishes auto tuning and starts PID operation gt e When auto tuning was finished the difference between the measured value at the start of auto tuning and the target value was 150 or less e When auto tuning was finished the difference between the measured value at the start of auto tuning and the target value was 1 3 or more Check the measured value and target value and then execute tuning again lt Step response method gt 6750 Continues The auto tuning result is improper operation lt The PLC forcibly finishes auto tuning and does not start PID operation gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the lt Step response method gt 6751 i ae start of auto tuning did not agree with the actual operation direction Auto tuning operation direction mismatch caused by the output for auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and measured value and then execute auto tuning again lt The PLC finishes auto tuning and does not start PID o
25. 080 e Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected 090 Special parameter error M8489 D8489 Turn OFF the power and check the power supply and connection of 9 Maa es 01 Special parameter setting time out error special adaptere speciall blocks Special parameters are set improperly e Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters special blocks and 02 Special parameter setting error set special parameters correctly Continues e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then operation turn ON the power Special parameters are set but special adapters special blocks are 032 Special parameter transfer target unconnected error not connected Check whether special adapters special blocks are connected We Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are not set for connected special adapters special blocks 1 The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit block error is put in O 2 O0 indicates the following values for each special adapter special block where an error has occurred If an error has occurred in 2 or more special adapters special blocks 00 indicates the lowest unit number among the special adapters special blocks in which an error has occurred Value of OO decimal Spe
26. 100 to 20000 and the comparison result is output to M10 to M12 Lo 2 2 I f I M10 60 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 3 Caution on simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and a counter The ZRST instruction resets also the last stage and reset state of T and C coils Accordingly if the drive contact of X000 is ON in the following program the counter executes counting after the ZRST instruction is executed gJ D O D O D Structured ladder FBD Timing chart one operation one operation one operation one operation cycle cycle cycle cycle Ul S2913 OO Mo value of CO 3 QDU ENTE ISE PE EPE ESE EEEE Oa tA A EE E E E EE Oo 00O BSS sSacpisecseseuetessskisseansdcansedecensseseeens OUT_C instruction 0 M DOT execution 4 mE l l l l OUT_C instruction D ZRST instruction OUT_C instruction execution execution execution g 9 D g 2 sioug Q jo Bunjes pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2u0 N 61 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters 1 Types of high speed counters The PLC main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bidirectional counters 1 phase 1 counting 1 phase 2 counting and 2 phase 2 counting These high speed co
27. 3 FXos FX0 FXoN FXU FX2c PLCs Retentive type for 100 ms pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec FXOS FXO TO to T55 T32 to T55 PLC 56 points 24 points T32 to T62 FXON PLC 1040 162 T63 63 points 31 points For 100 ms pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec For 10 ms pulses For 1 ms pulses 0 01 to 327 67 sec 0 001 to 32 767 sec T246 to T2492 FXU FX2C Routine program T200 to T245 4 points T250 to T255 2 PLC type T192 to T199 46 points Retentive type 6 points Interrupt execution Timer numbers not used for timers can be used as data registers for storing numeric values Variable potentiometer type Numeric value from 0 to 255 1 built in point 2 built in points 8 points for function board 1 100 ms timers are changed to 10 ms timers when the special auxiliary relay M8028 is driven In FXo PLCs this function is available in Ver 1 01 and later 2 They are backed up against power interruption 49 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWeIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 5 Timer T 2 5 2 Functions and operation examples 1 General type X000 n a uee uaes Set value constant TS200 A data register can Curen Set value value Yo00 e The program of 100 ms 10 ms type timer of the FXos FX
28. For details on each backup method refer to Section 2 6 e When using fixed latched backed up type data registers as general type registers provide the following reset circuit using the RST or ZRST instruction at the head step in a program M8002 Data stored in D512 to D999 are cleared to 0 D512 D999 Initial pulse For file registers refer to Subsection 2 8 4 96 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 Special type data registers e Special type data registers store specific data in advance or receive data for special purpose The contents of special data registers are set to their initial values when the power is turned ON Generally these data registers are cleared to 0 first and then initial values if there are any are written by the system ROM e For example the watchdog timer time is set initially to D8000 by the system ROM To change the contents write desired time to D8000 using the transfer instruction MOV M8002 The watchdog timer is set to 250 ms Initial pulse D8000 The watchdog timer is refreshed For the backup characteristics of special data registers refer to Section 1 2 and Chapter 4 For types and functions of special data registers refer to Chapter 4 3 Operation examples Data registers can be used in various controls handling numeric data This paragraph explains representa
29. It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by 3 2p parameter setting To 2 3 The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed using parameters 4 They can be changed to the latched battery backed up type using parameters while an optional battery is attached However the latched area cannot be set r Q When simple N N link or parallel link is used some auxiliary relays are occupied for the link D Refer to the data communication manual 3 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs z General Latched battery Fixed latched backed up type E type backed up type Battery backed up EEPROM backed up Capacitor backed up MO to M383 M384 to M511 M8000 to M8255 FX1S PLC i FX1N FX1NC MO to M383 M384 to M511 M512 to M1535 M8000 to M8255 PLC 384 points 128 points 1024 points 256 points FX2N FX2NC MO to M499 M500 to M1023 M1024 to M3071 M8000 to M8255 PLC 500 points 524 points 2 2048 points 256 points 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed using parameters FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 3 Auxiliary relay M 3 FXoS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Fixed latched General type Latched
30. LDI AND ANI OR ORI OUT SET RST PLS and PLF instructions can be indexed with index registers The right figure shows an example of the indexing operation using the index register Z 0 for X000 X030 MOVP and MO in the LD instruction JEN ENO K5 gt Z 0 Transfer K5 or K10 in advance to the index K5 s d Z 0 register Z O a If Z 0 is 5 X 0 5 X005 and M 0 5 M5 X030 Se ee ee When X005 turns ON YOOO turns ON When M5 ee d z o turns ON Y001 turns ON If Z 0 is 10 X 0 10 X012 and M 0 10 M10 When X012 1 turns ON Y000 turns ON When M10 turns ON Y001 turns ON MOZ 0 1 Refer to the caution 3 below 001 e Index registers ZO to Z7 and VO to V7 can be Z 0 S X005 ON gt Y000 ON used for indexing M5 ON gt Y001 ON Z 0 10 X01 ON Y000 ON e Inthe OUT instruction for a timer or counter the M10 ON gt Y001 ON timer number or counter number and the device specified for the set value can be indexed 2 Refer to the caution 3 below Cautions 1 32 bit counters and special auxiliary relays cannot be indexed with index registers 2 Itis not allowed to use 16 bit counters as 32 bit counters by indexing 3 When the octal device number of X or Y is indexed with an index register the contents of the index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number For example when the value of an index register added to the in
31. Maximum speed 3 An interrupt input set here cannot be used jointly with a high speed counter input interrupt pulse catch input input in SPD instruction or interrupt input in DVIT instruction 4 This area can be set only in FX3U FX3uc PLCs 5 YOO2 is not set in FX3G PLC 14 point and 24 point type and FX3Gc PLC 6 Note that this item can only be set if two high speed output special adapter adapters are connected to the FX3u PLC 292 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 3 Click the Individual Setting button to display the Positioning Instruction Setting dialog box On this dialog box set the positioning table for each pulse output destination Positioning Instruction Settings SUI NO 09q _ w a e rele Rotation Direction Signal fY010 Head Address RO Positioning T able Pulse Pls Frequency Hz 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Down Insert Line Delete Line Delete all Lines Oo OUD oma 258 Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered on D amp 3 90 8 OK Cancel gt O Set item Contents of setting Setting range YO Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination YOOO 4 Y1 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y001 D Y2 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y002 8 Y3 2 Set
32. Number and name Operation and function SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo a8 3 ow r gt D Advanced function M 8160 Ka ee a E M 81617 mee e eral aes as eee M 8163 Unavailable eae a M 81643 FROM and TO instructions Transfer points variable mode a D8164 M 8165 Unavailable M18166 pombe H l M 81673 HKY instruction Hexadecimal data handling function 2 242 lt 3 M 8168 2 SMOV instruction Hexadecimal data handling function Le 2 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 4 Available in the ASC RS ASC HEX and CCD instructions 5 Available in Ver 2 00 or later eloeds sioug Q sIo OWeed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 163 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1S FX1N FX2N FXiNC FXanc Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function Pulse catch ee ia mae 7 ae u v V v V vn DnE 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN FX2N FX2NC PLCs The El instruction is necessary FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs The El instruction is not unnecessary Simple N N link Refer to the data communication manual for details sis ee ee ee ee ee M 8182 ro a a ea e
33. O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SuOD 9 d y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 11 Pointer P and I 3 FXosS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Series Branch type Input interrupt type Timer mterrupt Counter interrupt type END jump type type 3 points earlier 63 points Reference I50L1 X005 6 points FXOS FXO po 10001 X000 T PLCs 1100 X001 PO to P63 64 points I20 1 X002 FXON PLCs I30 1 X003 4 points PO to P62 FXU FX2C 1020 1050 Bice pata P63 1101 X001 r 1030 1060 p I20L1 X002 7 6 points FXU PLCs beam kas I8 Ver 2 30 or PO to P62 a 140L1 X004 2 11 2 Functions and operation examples of branch pointers The roles and operations of branch pointers are as described below Because all of these pointers are combined with instructions refer to the explanation of each instruction for detailed use methods FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction FX Structured Programming Manual Application Functions 1 Applied instructions using branch pointers P e CJ conditional jump instruction When X001 turns ON the PLC jumps to the label position specified by the CJ instruction and executes the subsequent program Label PO When X001 turns ON the PLC executes a subroutine i
34. QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 a ooo EF ow r gt D tt Sl the eloeds siouy QI Daz S E TTT 6 Diez DetatRower e arse TT TTT ge pe pavers a EA A a a ES Communcatonineowtine TL TL a EE Comecon rce nian TT 7 Des Tine etngnetoralopeatonrenut TL TTL o perepea TT e e DIBA a a ee 3 pisss waoe r e e Oe Ewen oeeemmem e EA A EA DA O E T EA ee Spain a gy nara FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 Refer to ENET ADP Manual for details i l pee at Pie A od ae e oe Pees DN yaa Sremas twr e dT eT 35405 Sonem o ee 33a etautroueriPaacressseting towo e D sao Petautrouer Paaaressseting roe J e e E Eror code tor iP aaaress sorae weawie e ee aoe Eror Gode for P adress storage reacer 1 Available in Ver 3 10 or later 2 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 3 Available in Ver 2 10 or later SATATA SN 197 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc Fx3G Fx36c Fx3s_ Corresponding special device Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details D 8438 Error code for serial communication error 2 ch2 Le Le ee ae ie 7 1 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON Number and name Content of register RS2 instruction ch2 and computer lin
35. R30720 uN a aeaee asas NEES X X R32767 A All points are written at one time hh ER30720 K XXXXXXXX NGA ER32767 Nonvolatile memory Programming tool GX Works2 b FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Extension registers R Extension file registers ER Available in built in RAM Available in built in EEPROM or attached memory cassette 1 ERO General purpose device sequence program RO RWER instruction in units of point General applied LOADR instruction instruction in units of point _ lt gt R23999 ER23999 Nonvolatile memory All points are written at one time Programming tool GX Works2 1 Memory cassette cannot be connected to FX3Gc PLCs 108 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 1 2 Sectors of extension registers and extension file registers g According to the data structure extension registers and extension file registers are divided into sectors in 5 FX3Uu FX3uc PLCs One sector consists of 2048 devices The table below shows the head device in each 2 sector Sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers in FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Sector Head Sector Head No device Device range No device Device range No No Sector 0 RO ERO to ER2047 RO to R2047 Sector 8 ER16384 to ER18431 R16384 to R18431 2 Sector 1 ER2048 to ER4095 R2048 to R4
36. Syntax circuit operation unconnected I O specification error step number Refer to Chapter 5 for details D 8312 Low order order Latched step number where operation error l has occurred v v M8068 D 8313 High order 32 bits D 8314 3 Step number where M8065 to M8067 error has 6 l occurred v v M8065 to M8067 yest D 8315 3 High order 32 bits 323 D 8316 Step number of instruction specifying an ae w unconnected I O number directly or indirectly a D 8317 High order using index register D 8318 BMF initialization function Unit number where error has Pe el DRE M8318 occurred 7 D 8319 BMF initialization function BFM number where error has ERDE M8318 Q occurred a D 8320 to D 8328 Unavailable a 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN S n 4 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 189 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Timing clock and positioning Refer to the position control manual for details D 8329 D 8330 D 8331 D 8332 D 8333 D 8334 D 8336 D 8337 to D 8339 D 8340 D 8341 D 8342 D 8343 D 8344 D 8345 D 8346 D 8347 D 8348 D 8349 D 8350 D 8351 D 8352 D 8353 D 8354 D 8355 D 8356 D 8357 D 8358 D 8359 Applicable model FX3U FX3UC FX3G FX3GC FX3S Unavailable DUTY EA AA
37. The memory capacity includes the program memory file registers comment area and other special setting capacity This parameter incorporates comments into the program memory 1 Because comments remain in the PLC the contents can be easily understood at the time of maintenance 2 Upto 50 comments can be input when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps in the memory capacity Comments Capacity Memory i This parameter incorporates data registers into the program memory Capacity p p g prog y 1 A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled together which is convenient 2 Up to 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps in the memory capacity File Register Capacity 1 This parameter sets whether or not the special block unit initial value setting function is used When this function is used this function requires 4000 steps 8 blocks in the memory capacity 2 This parameter sets whether or not the positioning setting constants and setting table in the TBL instruction is used When this setting is used this setting requires 9000 steps 18 blocks 3 This parameter sets whether or not the built in CC Link LT function is used When this function is used this function requires 500 steps 1 block in the memory capacity Latch range This parameter enables to change the latched backed up device range and no
38. _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM oO oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 4 Power interruption detection time D8008 M8008 and M8007 FX3U PLCs AC power supply type The table below shows the allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FX3U PLCs AC power supply type Allowable instantaneous power Supply voltage interruption time 100V AC system 10ms Setting range 10 to 100 ms Set a value to D8008 Initial value 10 ms 200V AC system FX3u FX3uc PLCs DC power supply type The allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FX3uU FX3uc PLCs DC power supply type is 5 ms Do not overwrite the power interruption detection time stored in D8008 FX2N PLCs AC power supply type The table below shows the allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FX2N PLCs AC power supply type Allowable instantaneous power 2 uppiyavotlage interruption time Setting range 10 to 100 ms 200V AC system Set a value to D8008 Initial value 10 ms FX2N PLCs 24V DC power supply type The allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FX2N PLCs 24V DC power supply type is set to 5 ms
39. column Select the size and type of a value set to the buffer memory among the following choices 16 bit DEC 32 bit DEC 16 bit HEX 32 bit HEX Size Type Check the Identification Code Check this item to check the model code of the special function block unit before Before Initializing initialization Identification Code Set the model code of the function block unit 3 1 Input the buffer memory addresses BFM numbers held in the connected special function block unit 2 To each buffer memory address BFM number set a value within the allowable range in the connected special function block unit 3 Refer to the manual of the connected special function block unit 3 Click the OK button to finish the setting and close the Special Module Initial Setting dialog box 290 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 4 On the Built in CC Linc LT Setting dialog box set the built in CC Link LT The Built in CC Linc LT Setting tab is available only in FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC Built in CC Link LT Setting Transmission Speed 156kbps v Point Mode 16 point mode w SUI NO 09q _ Station Information Station No Station Type I O Points Specify Reserved Station oD D D O own iq 9 3 Insert Line Delete Line Read Buffer Memory 3 Ww 99 To set Station Information please check the option Built in CC L
40. en aa Ga ee a a M8409 Bo ee ee ee M8408 RSZchTTTimeoutcheckfag PY 7 7 7r 1 They are cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the RS2 instruction ch1 is set to OFF 2 Available in Ver 2 30 or later RS2 instruction ch2 and computer link ch2 Refer to the data communication manual for details M 8410 to M 8420 Unavailable Unavailable fe fff l oo z een e AES ee as poe ee SI S SI S SI S SISI S M 8423 3 RS2 ch2 Receive comipioie flag METEL Ee D8423 UEA RSz eRa Carer detectonfag fee P M 8425 Reinap Data set ready DR flag FA nee le i et ULE Computer ikh Global signal ON vA lt S S M 8427 Computer link choy On demand send being executed Ee ie ar ee D8427 M 8428 Computer link ch2 On demand error Computer link ch2 On demand error flag D8428 M 8429 Computer link ch2 On demand ee changeover D8429 RS2 FNC87 instruction ch2 Timeout check flag 3 They are cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the RS2 instruction ch2 is set to OFF 4 Available in Ver 2 30 or later k E lt S lt S Applicable model FX3U Fx3uc Fx3c Fx36c Fx3s Corresponding special device MODBUS serial communication ch1 Refer to MODBUS serial communication Manual for details M 8401 MODBUS Request in Process vo vo M 8402 MODBUS Communication Error Poo wo 76 D8402 M 8403 MODBUS Communication Error latched vo vo v6 D8403 e404 EAN C
41. enabled program area When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer interrupt is OFF a When an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs it is accepted b The interrupt program is executed immediately if interrupts are enabled by the EIl instruction If the DI instruction disables interrupts execution of the interrupt program is paused until the El instruction enables interrupts Disables interrupts 1010 to 1060 TEEPE EEE fede t pst sts sd ste DE Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STO 159 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2yo N 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2Nc COlresPonding special device Error detection Refer to Po 5 for details eo O contgurasonoror Le e Le anon ne PuGhardwareenor TP Paoa e A A A A M 8064 Parameter error error a S E O E A kal a E D8064 mew ee O O s e O l D8067 A i 7 7 7 T 7 M 8069 E 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 The PLC executes the I O bus check when M8069 is set to ON For details refer to Chapter 5 Number and name Operation an
42. i 2 ief f 7 M 8387 Operation status of C245 OP h E M 8388 Contact for high speed counter function change P M 8389 External reset input logic changeover Lv f fe fe z E M 8390 Function changeover device for C244 CA ea ae aS 3 M 8391 Function changeover device for C245 es lt M 8392 Function changeover device for C248 and C253 AHHAA z 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Interrupt program MBS Conactiorcceyumesetng TT P DO M 8394 HCMOV FNC189 instruction Drive contact for interrupt EKORRE l program M18295 Function changeover device for C284 SO e i M 8396 Unavailable M 8397 Ring counter E M 8398 1 ms ring counter activation 32 bits 4 D8398 D8399 WE Unavailable ee E e a a E 4 The 1 ms ring counters D8399 and D8398 are activated when the END instruction is executed after M8398 turned ON 151 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Operation and function i p FX3U Fx3uc FX3G Fx3ec Fx3s Corresponding special device RS2 instruction ch1 Refer to the data communication manual for details Mies a 8 a a E pea GS v v v v v v Pat fo v v 44 8404 3 M 8405 RS2 ch1 Data set ready DSR flag see N00 AR OLIENA i
43. parallel link MODBUS communication etc at Confirm that the program is set correctly in accordance with the S 3808 Simple N N link parameter error application 3809 N N Network setting error Remote maintenance 3812 Continues Parallel link character error Confirm that the modem power is ON and that AT commands are operation set properly 3813 Parallel link sum check error a ae ea pi 3814 PEO EEE onfirm the wiring of communication cables 6 3820 pgz 3821 MODBUS communication error 258 When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted 523 correctly a 3830 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 7 3840 Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter O PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 D When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly a 6101 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Isolate the PLC and supply power to it using a different power supply If the ERROR ERR LED turns OFF noise may be affecting the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and 6102 Operation circuit error installation location Fit a noise filter onto t
44. precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1
45. reset input by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8392 In this case C253 OP is handled as a software counter 64 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C Notation of high speed counters For some high speed counters in FX3U FX3UC PLCs the assignment of input terminals switches when special auxiliary relays are combined For input terminal numbers refer to Subsection 2 7 2 Such high speed counters are described as follows in this section Note that OP is not available in programming gJ D O D O D OU Standard device number Switched device number Standard device number Switched device number ae O C244 C244 OP C248 C248 OP P C245 C245 OP C253 C253 OP 5 2 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs OO z QUU Classification CoE No 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input Soy 4 edge counting terminal terminal ica a D D 3a S 49 2 Not provided Not provided 3 4 E 32 bit 5 Software a n Q counei bidirectional D C241 counter 2 C242 Provided Not provided g C243 D ry ms D C244 5 C246 5 Q 4 Not provided Not provided C248 OP m E C247 S 35 Sonwarg Case bidirectional counters A counter pe ts Provided Provided C250 6 Q C251 y OS C253 OP 1 edge counting Not provided Not provided 33 a C254 OP 2 oa BAS S Software C252 a i 8 counters 1 e
46. vei i if DP o R D T DONT Ren a M 8375 1 Y003 Near point watchdog signal logic reverse pee oe ie ee a M 8376 1 Y003 Zero point signal logic reverse a peas f 3 M 8377 Y003 Interrupt signal logic reverse aa i P O M 8378 Y003 Positioning instruction being driven ve 3 lt D Do M 83791 Y003 Pulse output stop command v2 3 90 8 Yor Pulse output so Cdl RS2 instruction ch0 FX3G FX3GC PLCs Refer to the data communication manual for details ea a V Za M18370 Unavailable o M18371 RSZENC Sret Sendwattea fo o M 8372 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Send request L ie a a P e a M 8379 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Timeout check flag MM z 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the RS2 instruction ch0 turns OFF 2 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3u PLC eloeds sioug Q High speed counter function Refer to Subsection 2 7 5 for details 3 Operation status of C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 M6390 C251 C252 and C254 i M 8381 Operation status of C236 ee le he e 6 M 8382 3 Operation status of C237 C242 and C245 2 a e 3 Operation status of C238 C248 C248 OP C250 C253 P p N oF PGs d C255 S Eg an za M 8384 Operation status of C239 and C243 oh 4 k oe fe ies M 8385 2 Operation status of C240 ARTMIR ee M 8386 Operation status of C244 OP
47. when K 1 is written to D8008 FX2Nc PLCs The allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FX2NC PLCs is 5 ms The PLC system writes K 1 to D8008 Do not overwrite D8008 in a sequence program FXu FX2c PLCs AC power supply type The table below shows the allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FXU FX2c PLCs AC power supply type Allowable instantaneous power SPE awcotade interruption time Setting range 10 to 100 ms 200V AC system Set a value to D8008 Initial value 10 ms FXu PLCs 24V DC power supply type The allowable instantaneous power interruption time in FXU PLCs 24 VDC power supply type is set to 5 ms when K 4 is written to D8008 Time chart AC power supply type DC power supply type FX3U FX2N FXu FX2c PLCs FX3uU FX3uc PLCs AC power supply DC power supply Approx 5 ms Approx 2 ms M8000 RUN monitor a M8000 RUN monitor a M8007 Instantaneous gt k 1 scan time M8007 Instantaneous gt k 1 scan time power interruption power interruption detection detection M8008 Power M8008 Power interruption D8008 Power interruption interruption D8008 Power interruption detection Yomg detection time detection 5ms detection time 218 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 5 Operati
48. 00 00 00 01 to DF FF FF FE Hexadecimal IP Address 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 ing Subnet Mask Decimal pening Set the subnet mask pattern l Pattern C0 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FC Hexadecimal 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Default Router he Decimal Set the IP address of the default router when it is used IP Address 00 00 00 01 to DF FF FF FE Hexadecimal IP Address Set the Ethernet port IP address Communication Data Code Check the data code used for communication using the MC protocol Disable direct connection to MELSOFT Do not respond to search Check this item to disable direct connection to the MELSOFT Check this item not to respond to search for CPUs on the network for CPU on network Open Setting This button displays the Ethernet Port Open Setting dialog box Time Setting This button displays the Ethernet Port Time Setting dialog box This button displays the Ethernet Port Log Record Setting dialog Log Record Setting i 1 In FX3s PLC channel is fixed to CH1 2 IP Address Setting can be set not only by selecting PLC Parameter in the project view but also using the IP address change function In this case the priority is given to the setting by the IP address change function 294 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 2 On the Ethernet Port tab click the Open Setting button
49. 09 26 09 MAINI i 2011 07 16 09 37 02 Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set iFitisneeded Mo Setting Already Set 3 Program Size foo Sg 16 000 Steps Symbolic Information Size 0 Byte 96 000 Byte Refresh Related Functions lt lt Execute Close Remote Set Clock Clear PLC Memory Operation 3 Click the Detail button in the Online Data Operation dialog box to open the Device Data Detail Setting dialog box Check the Ext file register ER Device Data Detail Setting Device Selection vV Input Column C Points Start Start End T counter Ct I Dataregister Dt foo i Dataregister Dt foto 7999 Fileregister p po ff JJ _ext register R fo fazzss 827 Iv llextfileresister Jer to saves Jo 5277 I Special register 5pecialo J10 512 aooo Special relay 5peciaim J10 fiz eooo OK Cancel 4 Click the Execute button to write transfer to the PLC 114 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 10 Index Register V and Z 2 10 Index Register V and Z Index registers can be used in the same way as data registers But they are special registers because they can change device numbers and numeric values in a program when combined with another device number or numeric value used as operands in applied instructions gJ D O D 2 10 1 Numbers of index registers 1 9q Ul
50. 32 bit type when a data register or file register on the low order side Example DO is specified the subsequent number on the high order side Example D1 is automatically occupied Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low order side but it is recommended to specify an even device number for the low order side under consideration of the monitoring function of display units display modules and programming tools 2 8 3 Functions and operation examples of data registers Data registers store numeric data Each data register stores 16 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign Two data registers combined can store 32 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign 1 General type and latched backed up type data registers e Once data is written to a data register it does not change unless other data overwrites it When the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the power is interrupted however all data stored in general type data registers are cleared to 0 If the special auxiliary relay M8033 has been driven in advance data are held even when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP e Latched backed up type data registers hold their contents even when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the power is interrupted e The contents of data registers are latched backed up by a battery EEPROM etc built in the PLC
51. 5 Constants can be indexed also When K30V0 is specified an instruction is executed for the decimal value K35 30 5 Octal devices X Y KnX and KnY For example when Z1 K8 is specified and X0Z1 is executed an instruction is executed for the device X10 X0 8 Octal addition When indexing a device whose device number is handled in octal a numeric value converted into octal is added for the contents of V and Z Accordingly note that X0Z1 indicates X12 and does not indicate X10 when Z1 K10 is specified Hexadecimal values H For example when V5 K30 is specified a constant H30V5 is handled as H4E 30H K30 When V5 H30 is specified a constant H30V5 is handled as H60 30H 30H 116 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 11 Pointer P and I 2 11 Pointer P and I 2 11 1 Numbers of pointers The table below shows pointer P and numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal When an input interrupt type pointer is used the input number assigned to the pointer cannot be used together with a high speed counter or speed detection which uses the same input range 1 FX3s FX3G FX3GcC FX3u FX3uc PLCs Branch type Input interrupt input delay Timer interrupt END jump type interrupt type type Series FX3U FX3UC PLCs Series FX3G FX3GC PLCs Series FX3S PLC PO to P62 P64 to P4095 4095 points Br
52. 5 00 Time Zone GMT 4 00 GMT 3 30 GMT 3 00 GMT 2 00 GMT 1 00 GMT GMT 1 00 GMT 2 00 GMT 3 00 GMT 3 30 GMT 4 00 GMT 4 30 GMT 5 00 GMT 5 30 GMT 5 45 GMT 6 00 GMT 6 30 GMT 7 00 GMT 8 00 GMT 9 00 GMT 9 30 GMT 10 00 GMT 11 00 GMT 12 00 GMT 13 00 Check this item to execute time setting when the power of the PLC Execute time setting at turn ON i an E main unit is turned ON As shown on the left Select whether processing is continued or stopped if an error occurs in On error Action the time setting executed when the power of the PLC main unit is turned ON Execution Interval Specify the time interval to execute time setting 1 to 1440 min Execution Time Specify the time in increments of 30 minutes to execute time setting 1 Only either one can be selected between Execution Interval and Execution Time 5 Click the END button to finish the setting and close the Ethernet Port Time Setting dialog box 296 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 6 On the Ethernet Port tab click the Log Record Setting button On the Ethernet Port Log Record Setting dialog box set the error log save destination and others The user device D R is used to save the error log etc The user device R cannot be used in FX3s PLCs SUI NO 09q _ Ethernet Port Log Record Setting I Set error log save de
53. 8044 1 Target state relay numbers are as follows ON state relay number 5 FX1S S0 to S127 7 e FX1N FX1NC SO to S999 D 8046 1 ON state relay number 7 D 8047 ON state relay number 8 ppo a E E E E E E D 8049 1 Smallest active state among 900 to 999 when M8049 is ON relay number ne ee e ee 1 Activated when the END instruction is executed Stores the smallest number of active annunciator relays M8049 Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details Unconnected head I O number in I O configuration error When programmed input output numbers are unconnected D8060 stores the head unconnected device number Example When X020 is unconnected D 8060 Value converted into BCD gom Device number 10 to 337 1 Input X 0 Output Y DROS ae a posz 2 peos 6 poss 065 pose 066 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 202 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC Parallel link Refer to the data communication manual for details D18070 Number and name Content of register D 8071 D2 Seat ea TS 018072 Unavailable Le ate ees D 8073 Pe Sampling trace es a ee meal ERES AEA Ss mel _ ee cell ie iets a Ss 2 el 2 es a es es sc EPESA me _ es
54. 8193 l D 8194 l D 8195 i D 8196 e eet e a ee dneve Cee re ae D 8198 a ee D 8199 ea ae ae i Simple N N link Refer to the data communication manual for details D 8201 Current link scan time D201 D 8202 1 Maximum link scan time D202 D 8203 bdo of data transmission sequence errors in master D203 i Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave 1 v 2 v V z Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave 1 ff 2 4 of z x Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave x 1 v 2 v v z Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave P 1 v 2 v V x x Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave i 1 2 Pr J P Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave s 1 v 2 v V S 4 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave 7 1 i 2 vy T D 8211 Code for data transmission error in master station D211 5 D 8212 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 1 D212 2 D 8213 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 2 D213 v D 8214 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 3 D214 D 8215 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 4 D215 D 8216 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 5 D216 D 8217 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 6 D217 x D 8218 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 7 V vV COREA GEANE e e ee 1 FX1S PLCs use d
55. BUT nsrsion Seen cauntortning cock www DUT reraton sencor soas TT DUTY instruction Scan count for timing clock output 4 ee fea eee ed a DVIT instruction Interrupt input specification instruction Interrupt input specification Default Unavailable A aig Geetegke a o order Low order Yo00 Current value register High order Default 0 Y000 Bias speed Initial value O jf u a ae a aoo order Low order Y000 Maximum speed High order Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed Initial value 10000 Creep speed Initial value 1000 irae Sew I order Low order f Y000 Zero return speed High order Default 50000 Y000 Acceleration time Default 100 EPA Ra rae aa Y000 Deceleration time Default 100 e Deine 100 Low order order Low order y001 Current value register ara n Ed Le ef 001 Bias speed Initial value 0O Bias speed Initial value 0 gamer TTT High order order Default 100000 Creep speed Initial value 1000 sano oe ee reo order Default 50000 ie ae a a Voor ecsleraiontime veno 7 1 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 2 Available in Ver 1 30 or later Content of register Corresponding special device M8330 M8331 M8332 M8333 M8334 M8336 190 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and late
56. Cleared P or 10 ms eared ie cane i Does not change while M8033 is ON D ime counting coi D Reset coil 7 Does not change Cleared For 1 ms Cleared g Does not change while M8033 is ON B Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change Does not change Cleared Counter contact General type Cleared i Counting coil Does not change while M8033 is ON Reset coil C Latched backed up type Does not change 1 Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN For special data registers refer to Chapter 4 sioug Q sIa OWeled jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 27 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 4 FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NcC PLCs The memory type varies depending on the PLC and is classified as follows by the device initialization timing Classification Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change A1 Backed up by battery The device status is not held correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage A Latched type memory A2 Backed up by EEPROM Does not change Does not change The device status is held correctly for 10 days when the ambient tempera ture is 25 C after the capacitor is fully charged but the device status is not held correctly after the capacitor is discharged Set to initial A B Specia
57. Communication the D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 cleared and must be unchecked Setting Protocol Non Procedural Data Length 7Bit Parity Odd Stop Bit oe 1Bit Transmission Speed 9600 Header Terminator Print Window Print Window Preview Set item Channel selection Operate Communication Setting Protocol Data Length Parity Stop Bit Transmission Speed Header Terminator Control Line H W Type Control Mode Sum Check Transmission Control Procedure Station Number Setting Time Out Judge Time Control Line H W Type Regular R5 232C Control Mode Invalid Sum Check Transmission Control Procedure Form1 without CR LF Station Number Setting o 6 Q0H OFH Time Out Judge Time 1 10ms 1 255 Default Check End Cancel Contents of setting Setting range Select a channel in which a serial port is set CH1 CH2 Check this item when using the selected serial port in computer link no protocol communication or inverter communication Uncheck this item when transferring and monitoring sequence programs in GX Works2 or when using the selected serial port in N N Network parallel link MODBUS communication or FX3U ENET ADP Set each item in accordance with the application For details on each item refer to the data communication manual 1 In FX3s PLC channel is fixed to CH1 288 FXCPU Structured Programming
58. D7999 D8000 to D8511 D10004 and later PLCs 200 points 312 points 2 7488 points 4 512 points 2 7000 points maximum Data registers Fixed latched File registers latched EEPROM General type EEPROM backed General type Special type backed up type FX3G FX3GC DO to D127 D128 to D1099 D1100 to D7999 D8000 to D8511 D10004 and later Data registers Fixed latched File registers latched EEPROM General type EEPROM backed General type Special type backed up type Gentes ac aaa Kokal 128 points 128 points 2744 points 512 points 2000 points maximum 1 This area is not latched but can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched but can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 The characteristics about latch battery backup cannot be changed using parameters 4 Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by parameter setting 5 This area can be changed to the latched battery backed up area by parameter setting while an optional battery is attached but the latched battery backed up range cannot be specified When simple N N link or parallel link is used some data registers are occupied for the link Refer to the data communication manual 94 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 In FX1S FX1N FX1NC
59. DHCMOV instruction is used just before the comparison instruction S CMP or ZCP or data comparison instruction 5 1 If it is necessary to execute comparison and update an output contact Y at the timing at which the e current value of a high speed counter changes use a comparison instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT 2 Using a comparison instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT A comparison instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT executes comparison and outputs the comparison result while the target high speed counter is counting The number of times of using these instructions is restricted as shown in the table below When an output relay Y is specified for the comparison result the comparison result is directly reflected sioug Q on the ON OFF status of the output without regard to output refresh executed by the END instruction 6 Mechanical operation delay about 10 ms cannot be avoided in a relay output type PLC VHS Use a transistor output type PLC RER ae p Instruction Restriction of number of times of using instruction z Sa DHSCS FX3U FX3UC PLCs These instructions can be used up to 32 times including the DHSCT instruction DHSCR F XOS F X0 FXON F X1S FX1N FX1NC F XU F X2C FX2N F X2NC F X3S F X3G FX3GC PLCs These instructions can be used up to 6 times 7 DHSZ FXOS FX0 FXON FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs do not support the DHSZ instruction O This instr
60. Description 1 The flash memory built in a memory cassette holds sequence programs 2 A battery is used also to hold latched backed up type devices and clock data Maintenance is not required The upper limit is set for the number of times of overwriting Refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC EEPROM backup method F Xos F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX3S FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Item Latched backed up contents Maintenance Cautions Description 1 The EEPROM built in the PLC holds sequence programs and latched backed up type devices 2 A capacitor is used also to hold the clock data Maintenance is not required 1 The upper limit is set for the number of times of overwriting Refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC 2 For secure backup it is necessary to keep the PLC power ON for 5 minutes or more and then turn OFF the power 4 Capacitor backup method FX1N FXiNC PLCs Item Latched backed up contents Maintenance Cautions Description 1 The large capacity capacitor built in the PLC holds latched backed up type devices and clock data 2 The capacitor holds data for 10 days when the ambient temperature is 25 C if it is fully charged as described below Maintenance is not required 1 The large capacity capacitor is charged while the PLC is ON and fully charged after the PLC is ON for 30 minutes or more 2 When the voltage of the large capacity capacitor
61. Errondan eT a e e pa ER e e i l e pa ES A A ps errara a TP E EA A S S pea e A E ORS S ON Se SS lt 4 E ae pS lt S K J D 8410 Turn Around Delay fi 72 D 8412 Number of Retries cc D8414 Se ie i aea D8415 E e a i T EEE E D8416 ee ee aS E D18419 orao u ae MODBUS serial communication ch2 D to MODBUS serial communication Manual for details p saa Commanna et TT Doar pot e e e IZ Erosion L oew oje e e IZ e T TTT pas erraren LT Da a A a E E it k E Sel NI Fee oe NS REE ye p N N D 8430 Turn Around Delay y1 v2 7 D 8431 Message to Message Delay D 8432 Number of Retries vi yl V2 o ee a ee eee a ee ae CE es a ee ee E D18439 ee EE a ae 1 Available in Ver 2 40 or later 2 Available in Ver 1 30 or later 194 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register j z FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fxgs Corresponding special device MODBUS serial communication ch1 ch2 Refer to MODBUS serial communication Manual for details D 8470 Lower MODBUS Device Mapping 1 vo vl D 8471 Upper D 8472 Lower MODBUS Device Mapping 2 vl vi D 8473 Upper D 8474 Lower MODBUS Device Mapping 3 va g D 8475 Upper D 8476 Lower P A MODBUS Device M
62. F hexadecimal O F DO a 16 bits 3 6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory UO GO A buffer memory BFM of a special function block or special function unit can be specified directly Only FX3uU FX3uc PLCs support this function BFM is 16 bit or 32 bit word data and mainly used for operands in instructions For specifying BMF specify the unit number U of a special function block or special function unit and the BFM number G consecutively Example UO GO indicates BFM 0 in the special function block or special function unit whose unit number is O Indexing is available for BFM numbers The specification range is as follows Unit number U Oto 7 BFM number G 0 to 32766 Example of MOV instruction MOV EN ENO K10 s d UO G10 Transfer source Unit BFM 10 number Example of indexing BFM number MOV EN ENO K20 s d UO0 G10Z0 Transfer source Unit BFM 10 Z0 number 132 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 7 Indexing 3 7 Indexing 3 7 1 The functions and structures of index registers are explained in detail in 2 10 Index Register V and Z Refer to this section in advance Indexing in basic instructions Only FX3uU FX3uc PLCs support this function In the case of bit devices Bit devices X Y M except special auxiliary relays T and C CO to C199 used in the LD
63. FX2N FX2NC PLCs Data registers Latched Fixed latched battery backed up type File registers battery i latched battery General type backed up Battery EEPROM Capacitor Special type backed up type t backed up backed up backed up ype DO to D127 D128 to D255 D8000 to D8255 D1000 4 and later FX1S PLCs Se mee 128 points 128 points 256 points 1500 points maximum FX1N FX1NC DO to D127 D128 to D255 D256 to D7999 D8000 to D8255 D1000 and later PLCs 128 points 128 points 7744 points 256 points 7000 points maximum FX2N FX2NC DO to D199 D200 to D511 D512 to D7999 D8000 to D8255 D1000 4 and later PLCs 200 points 312 points 7488 points 256 points 7000 points maximum gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO 1 This area is not latched but can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting SF 2 This area is latched but can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter SoS setting 3 The characteristics about latch backup cannot be changed using parameters 4 Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by parameter 4 setting g When simple N N link or parallel link is used some data registers are occupied for the link a Refer to the data communication manual a 3 FXoS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs siouy QI Data registers Fixed latched File registers General type Latched backed up type
64. Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input 71 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 4 In FX1S FX1N FX1Nc PLCs Peat Input terminal assignment Counter No Classification O28 w wt wo fw ff w f f oa o y ee f w y i eR ea w fof f f C245 S W U D S w pojo T et a ee e w ae 2 counting Sl ieee cs lr ii SAV ae O CSS o S5 O wi d d l E H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input U U 5 In FX2N FX2Nc PLCs PAS Input terminal assignment Counter No Classification re ee ee ee eer ey oes 1 phase aa O O O counting C248 O SWO O So O O lV i f caa ow M OOO O O SAREE eae counting ca w CPAP PR i EE Pe ee lll H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input 1 Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set reset instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ is used For the condition under which hardware counters are handled as softw
65. In FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 16 bit up counter 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 0 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Latched backed up Fixed latched backed up type Latched Fixed latched backed up backed up General type type General type type type backed up backed up backed up backed up backed up FX1S CO to 15 C16 to C31 FX1N FX1NC CO to C15 C16 to C31 C32 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234 FX2N FX2NC CO to C99 C100 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed using parameters Counter numbers not used as counters can be used as data registers to store numeric values 55 O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jUue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa sioug Q jo Buas pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 3 In FXos FX0 FXoN FXuU FX2c PLCs 16 bit up counter 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 0 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 type backed up type type FXOS FXO CO to 13 C14 to C15 FXON CO to C15 C16 to C31 FXU FX2C CO to C99 C100 to
66. Item Description Oo This parameter specifies the maximum value for the number of steps to which a sequence program 999 can be input aS 1 The upper limit is determined by the capacity of the built in memory or attached optional S x D memory T 2 The memory capacity includes the program memory file registers and comment area This parameter incorporates comments into the program memory 1 Because comments remain in the PLC the contents can be easily understood at the time of 4 Memory Comments Capacity Capacity MEN anen oe 2 Upto 50 comments can be input when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps i in the memory capacity o This parameter incorporates data registers into the program memory 5 1 A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled together Q File Register which is convenient Capacity 2 Up to 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps in the memory capacity This parameter enables to change the latched backed up device range and non latched non backed up device range inside FX2N FX2NC PLCs These device ranges cannot be changed in FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs This parameter sets the PLC operation mode without a battery in FX2N FX2NC PLCs When the batteryless mode is selected the PLC automatically stops detection of battery voltage low error and initializes the contents of latched backed up devices M
67. M10 M20 to prevent confusion Specification of consecutive words A series of data registers starting from D1 means D1 D2 D3 D4 In the case of words with digit specification they are specified as shown below when they are handled as a series e K1X000 K1X004 K1X010 K1X014eeee6 e K2Y010 K2Y020 K2Y030 e e K3MO K3M12 K3M24 K3M36eeeee e K4S16 K4S32 KAS48eceeee Use the above devices in units of digit so that devices are not skipped When K4Y000 is used in a 32 bit operation high order 16 bits are regarded as 0 It is necessary to use K8Y000 when 32 bit data is required 131 SUI INC 09q UU omy oO q ep 2 9 39 jUue SUOD y payloads aoinag eads Aa sioug Q S19 UELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 5 Specification of Bit for Word Device Da b 3 5 Specification of Bit for Word Device DO b By specifying a bit of a word device the specified bit can be used as bit data Only FX3uU FX3uc PLCs support this function When specifying a bit of a word device use a word device number and bit number hexadecimal Example D0 0 indicates the bit No O of data register CdD Indexing is not available for both the device number and the bit number Target word device Data register or special data register Bit number O to
68. Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting special function block The Special Function Block tab is available only in FX3uU FX3uc PLCs SUI NO 09q _ 1 Click the Special Function Block tab and then set the special function block unit name and built in CC Link When setting special units it is necessary to check in advance the check box Special Function Block Settings on the Memory Capacity tab When setting the station information in Built in CC Link LT Setting it is necessary to check in advance the check box Built in CC Link LT Setting on the Memory Capacity tab 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo FX Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port a2 35 gt lt 0 DS a D aoe Special Function Block Settings gt Unit No Unit Name 0 sacl SS 4 C a Delete ap C E E D sa Delete al 8 SC C v Read PLC Data o lt O 4 Built in CC Link LT Setting Setting O S wn Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range This is the unit number of each special function block unit Input the name of each special function block unit whose initial values will kay ae Unit Name Beet or 16 full width characters This button moves the cursor to t
69. Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in Opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the
70. OFF status of the write protect switch eloeds soug QI Protect Momoryitype switch D 8003 EEPROM memory cassette or flash memory cassette EEPROM memory cassette or flash memory cassette D 8004 a o e o Error M number x 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON D 8005 lalol Unit 0 1 V Battery voltage Current value of battery voltage Example 3 0V jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suooun4 24o N Initial value e 2 7V Unit 0 1 V Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON D 8006 Low battery voltage detection level 1 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16K steps in the parameter setting 177 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device Instantaneous power v v M8007 interruption D 8008 Initial value Instantaneous power e FX3U PLCs AC power supply type 10 ms P M8008 interruption detection e FX3U FX3UC PLCs DC power supply type 5 ms time Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 Pie Lowest input device number of function unit or extension Unit number where i v v M8009 24V DC has failed power supply unit where 24V DC has failed Clock Number and name Content of register PLC status D 8007
71. ON and data cannot be written to the file register area A data is written to only the data register area B When a file register is specified in the output variable Cd in a general instruction data is transferred only to the data register area B e A file register can be specified in the input variable Cs However if a Same number is specified in both the input variable and the output variable Cd the same number register update function is activated For the same number register update function refer to the previous page e By controlling the BMOV instruction execution direction reverse flag M8024 in the BMOV instruction data can be transferred in both directions in one program as shown in the figure below i M8024 BMOV instruction execution direction inverse flag gt d Batch transfer of data registers M8024 OFF D1100 D200 lt d Batch transfer of data registers M8024 ON D1100 D200 and writing to file registers ictal BMOVP instruction Ninun execution direction reverse flag OFF Always OFF during operation 101 O D O D O D Ul S2913 OO jue SUOD 9 qd y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa sioug Q S19 UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 Jey N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 8 Data Register and File Register D Cautions on reading When a file register D1000 or later is specified as
72. On the Ethernet Port Open Setting dialog box set the protocol open system and others Up to four connections can be set up SUI NO 09q _ Ethernet Port Open Setting Host Station Destination Destination OO a fie MELSOFT Connection _ E 2 TCP w MELSOFT Connection T E 5 a Tcr m MELS5OFT Connection Ooo i MELSOFT Connection Oooo o Input decimal value For the Host Station Port No Destination IP Address and Destination Port Mo 3 O 0 O 3 lt 0 a ooo D Rg Set item Contents of setting Setting range Protocol Select a protocol to be used Not Set TCP UDP TCP 4 Select MELSOFT Connection Open System Select the open system MC Protocol or Data Monitoring 14 UDP m H D The open system is fixed to MC Protocol MC protocol Set host station port No p 1025 to 5548 or 5560 to 65534 Data monitoring 80 Default 1025 to 5548 or 5560 to 65534 Host Station Port No This column is valid only when the selected open system is MC Protocol or Data Monitoring Set destination IP address 5S O n This column is valid only when the selected protocol is UDP and the selected open system is MC Protocol When this column is valid No Setting is displayed in red Click No Setting to display the IP address setting dialog which allows setting of the IP address When setting of the IP address is completed the entered IP address is displayed in
73. Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 2 FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs CPU System ROM Built in device memory RAM moi Bit device memory Data memory Contact image memory Data register D Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Timer current value register T Counter current value register C Index register V and Z Extension register R Timer contact time counting coil reset coil T counter contact counting coil and reset coil C 4 I ee ee ee ee l Built in program memory EEPROM Optional memory I EEPROM l D JE l Sequence program j N Sequence program i aE File register D i i n l Special setting File register D c I Special setting Ile Extension file register ER l gt Transfer initialization Extension file register ER l by instruction i l km e E E E ee ee ee a ee ee ee ee ee aa ie a a i e The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of an optional memory 1 when the power is turned ON and isolates the built in program memory The PLC gives the priority to the optional memory 1 Optional memory cannot be connected to FX3Gc PLCs 18 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 FX3s PLCs Built in device memory RAM moi Bit
74. PLCs 3 Click the Execute button to reset the keywords or validate the reset keywords again 283 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo jUue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa S O S wn jo Bujes pue sedi SJ J WELJEd suo oun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 This subsection explains the parameter setting procedures using GX Works2 The screens explained here are provided for FX3U FX3uc PLCs Set items and their contents vary depending on the PLC Refer to the following sections 6 1 Parameter List 6 2 Parameter Initial Values 6 3 Memory Capacity Setting Range 6 6 1 PLC Parameter setting Opening the parameter setting screen In the project view double click Parameter PLC Parameter Project PP Cai Gee ja Ath i Parameter if Network Parameter EG Global Device Comment i a Global Label fey Program Setting jy Device Memory 284 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting the memory capacity FX Parameter SUI NO 09q _ Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port Memory Capacity Symbolic Information
75. PLCs whose production is finished Manual name Manual number Usp ee tt produci Contents aa or Additional Manual name code PLC main unit FX1S HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D83901 O9R626 Details about the hardware including I O specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FX1S PLC main unit Additional Manual Details about the hardware including I O FX1N HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D89301 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FX1N PLC main unit Details about the hardware including I O FX2N HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D66301 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and O9R508 maintenance of the FX2N PLC main unit Details about the hardware including I O FX1nc HARDWARE MANUAL svaosnesi07 AddtionalMangali Pee NCtens Mine ifstalaton and 09R505 maintenance of the FX1NC PLC main unit Japanese only Details about the hardware including I O FX2NC HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D76401 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and O9R509 maintenance of the FX2Nc PLC main unit Programming Details about simple N N link parallel link i E a e Bata JY997D16901 Additional Manual computer link and no protocol communication O9R715 RS instruction and FX2N 232IF 10 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Related Manuals F X0S FX0 F Xon FXu FX2c PLCs whose production is finished Manual name Manual number ee wa
76. PLO Type FXSLEXSLIC hal Language 4 Structured Ladder FED 1 D O v J lt O D soug Q jo Buas pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2u0 N 111 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER Z Creating the device memory This operation is not required when using the device memory offered as the default 1 Right click Device Memory in the project data list to open the submenu 2 Click Add NEW Data to open the New Data dialog box Set the Data Name 3 Input the data name and click the OK button to open the created Device Memory dialog box Project h E i MERE BA Parameter gt Global Device Comment 2 Global Label Program Setting POU L Program POU_O1 H Program Local Label i FB FUN 6 Structured Data Types gt Local Device Comment amp Device Memory Sort gt Co Property New Data Data Type Device Memory er Data Name MAINI v cancel gl Device Memory MAINI 112 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER Setting the data gJ D O D O D 1 Select Edit Input Device to open the Input Device dialog box 2 Set the Device Range Display Mode and Register Input De
77. Pils 2 Boe 4 Oi 6 a E ee ee 2nd special adapter TT o l 3rd special adapter dT doo l 4th special adapter e A a a a st expansion board o doo e o r gt 2nd expansion board o ooo eo o l Ist special adapte doodo rrr 2nd special adapter FF eA A ee Turns ON when the multiplication or division result is 0 Para za z Sees ae oe a Tune ON whan oe oausia Be eva e a Unavailable eee Count the number of connected analog special adapter from the main unit Available in Ver 1 20 or later Expansion board connected to the BD1 connector of a FX3G PLC 40 point and 60 point type or the BD connector of a FX3G PLC 14 point and 24 point type and FX3s PLCs Expansion board connected to the BD2 connector of a FX3G PLC 40 point and 60 point type Only a FX3G PLC 40 point and 60 point type can be connected Available in Ver 1 10 or later Available in Ver 2 30 or later 148 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model N i f i umber and name Operation and function FX3U FX3UC FX3G Ex3Gc FX3S Corresponding special device Unconnected I O Ae error Refer to Chapter 5 for details and flag LA psor ee ee ee M 8313 to M 8315 Unavailable esses D8316 2 M 8317 Unavailable sess BFM initialization n oa
78. Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later e FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs Operation and function Number x 1st analog special adapter M 8280 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Input mode switching Ch2 noe Output mode switching V283 Not sed no Noted wo Not sed M 8286 Output hold mode cancel M 8287 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8288 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M8289 _ Not used disabled Sets whether or not output channel is used 2nd analog special adapter 2 M 8290 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8291 Input mode switching Ch2 V203 Output mode switching wo Rot se wo Not wed wo Not sed M 8296 Output hold mode cancel M 8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8298 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8299 Sets whether or not output channel is used Operation and function 1st analog special adapter M 8280 Temperature unit selection M 8281 Input sensor selection 2nd analog special adapter 2 M 8290 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8291 Type K J switching Input sensor selection M8289 Not sec 1 Inthe case of FX3G PLC versions 1 20 or later are applicable m m OO Number 2 Can be connected only to 40 point or 60 point type FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs 238 FXCPU Structured Pro
79. QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q D 8370 R BE Ee aE E 6 e E E E E E E D8370 Ream Tmeotmesns TT PT T 7 D 8383 RS2 ch0 Terminators 3 and 4 ees ie a D 8384 RS2 ch0 Receive sum a data Le les ls g 18365 RSZ Receive sum ealoun res TT Te T Dy896 Ramses PT Pe pess omesse aae PP D18380 praon moseas TT TT T peoo mes Unavailable OOOO PT T 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 2 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3u PLC 191 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FxX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Interrupt program 09 wasn a e Symbolic information storage status and execution program protection status using the block password Symbolic Protection of D 8395 information storage execution program Symbolic Information E Block password status D 8396 CC Link LT setting information Bae eee D 8397 Unavailable Ring counter D 8398 Up counting ring counters of 0 to M8398 D 8399 2 147 483 647 Unit 1 ms 1 indicates areas used by the system 2 Available in Ver 3 00 or later 3 Only the FX3uUc 32MT LT 2 is available 4 1 ms ring counters D8399 and D8398 are activated when t
80. STOP command use the STOP switch assigned to an arbitrary input Even if the built in switch is set to RUN the PLC enters the STOP mode when the STOP command is given because the STOP command has the priority over the built in switch 232 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 RUN STOP command from a programming tool 1 When using the programming software for personal computer The programming software has the remote RUN STOP function for the PLC Use the programming software to set the PLC to the RUN or STOP mode using a command sent from the personal computer SUI INO 09q 2 When using any other programming tool The PLC enters the RUN mode when M8035 forced RUN mode and M8036 forced RUN input are set to ON by the forced ON OFF operation Set M8037 forced STOP input to ON in this status to let the PLC enter the STOP mode 3 When the RUN STOP switch built in the PLC is set to RUN The remote STOP input from a programming tool and M8037 forced STOP input are enabled 9q ulseoiieg N Oo 4 2 16 Constant scan mode M8039 and D8039 Fixed scan time QOUWM oO oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D When the special auxiliary relay M8039 is set to ON and desired scan time in units of ms is written to the special data register D8039 t
81. Ver 3 01 or later High speed ring counter High speed ring counter operation ee ee ee ae 6 The high speed ring counter D8099 is activated when the END instruction is executed after M8099 turned ON Undefined TETU 172 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Special adapter M8120 M 8121 gt M 812257 M 812357 M 8124 M 8125 M 8126 M 8127 M 8128 M 81296 al 2 ei 4 Oh 6 7 High speed table M 8130 M 8131 M 8132 M 8133 M 8134 to M 8159 8 Advanced function M 8160 M 8161 2 M 8162 M 8163 M 8164 M 8165 M 8166 M 8167 M 8168 M 8169 9 10 Aie Applicable model FXOS EXON FXu FXoc Corresponding FX0 special device Communication setting latch S eee 2 2 f 3 RS 232C send wait a RSZ sera Tao oe 2 y s RS 232C receive complete flag Vv D8123 RS 232C carrier being received i Leet 2 C ee ee a E eee eS E CE e a E E co el a E When M8120 is set to ON latched type data registers D254 and D255 are changed to the non latched type These data registers can be used as general registers in programs Operation and function gt lt S gt RS Available in Ver 1 20 or later Available in Ver 3 07 or later Avai
82. a E Does not change while M8033 is ON register T Does not change Cleared For 1 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Counter current value Does not change while M8033 is ON register C Latched backed up type Does not change High speed type Does not change Clock data Does not change 2 1 General type devices can be changed to the latched type by parameter setting if an optional battery is attached 2 Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN For special data registers refer to Chapter 4 3 The clock data is held by the power accumulated in the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC The clock data is not held correctly if the voltage of the built in large capacity capacitor becomes low The large capacity capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days when the ambient temperature is 25 C if it is charged fully by turning ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more The clock data is backed up by the battery when an optional battery is attached and the battery mode is selected by parameter setting 24 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 Types of bit device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP RUN RUN STOP Does not change Cleared Input relay X Clear
83. a data link Hold input data not checked Clear Station Setting disorder station is held Hold input data checked Hold Clears compulsorily not checked Refresh Clears compulsorily checked Clears compulsorily Case of CPU STOP Setting Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at programmable controller CPU STOP S O S wn 3 Click the OK button to finish the setting and close the Operation Setting dialog box SJa OWEIed jo Buas pue sedi suojoun4 24o N 299 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 4 Click Station Information in the Setting Contents column on the Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration dialog box CC Link Station Information Sa Expanded Cyclic Number of Remote Station Reserve Invalid Station Type Setting Occupied Stations Points Station Select v Occupied Station 1 32Points v No Setting Occupied Station 1 32Points v No Setting Occupied Station 1 32Points v No Setting Remote I O Station Occupied Station 1 32Points y No Setting A i i Y No Setting No Setting F F z a A i Y Occupied Station 1 32Points y No Setting Occupied Station 1 32Points v No Setting Default Check End Cancel Set item Station Type Expanded Cyclic Setting Number of Occupied Stations Remote Station Points Reserve Invalid Stati
84. absence of the SRET instruction improper acam ore GIO WIRa ESO e relationship between FOR and NEXT etc g pe 6 Example T2002 itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T200Z means uvo u o lt T300 which causes a device number error R S 3 6730 Improper sampling time TS lt 0 To Z T 6732 Improper input filter constant a lt 0 or 100 lt a lt The PLC Stops PID operation 6733 Improper proportional gain KP lt 0 This data error occurs in the control parameter set value or during 6734 Improper integral time T lt 0 PID instruction 7 heck th tents of ters 6735 Improper derivative gain KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD NEOP ECONS OF PATASTE E 6736 Improper derivative time TD lt 0 D lt The PLC continues operation while regarding the operation data as a the maximum value gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Scan time A data error has occurred in the control parameter set value or PID F operation Check the contents of parameters 261 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs PLC auo operaron Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 The measured value variation exceeds the limit da APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 The deviation exceeds the limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 The integral result exceeds the limit i Outside the range from 32768 to 32767
85. and D8013 to D8019 1 Assignment of special auxiliary relays M8015 to M8019 and special data registers D8013 to D8019 Number p Name Operation and function Stops the clock when set to ON mene Ce a The time is written and the clock is activated again at the edge from ON to OFF M8016 Time display stop Stops the time display when set to ON but continues time counting Corrects the second s digit at the edge from OFF to ON Sets the second s digit to 0 when the value in the second s digit is 0 to 29 and carries 30 MeOH petheecoric comection over the minute s digit and sets the second s digit to 0 when the value in the second s digit is 30 to 59 M8018 Installation detection Always remains ON M8019 Real time clock RTC error Turns ON when the values of special data registers exceed the setting range at time setting Number p Name Setting range Operation and function D8013 Second data 0 to 59 D8014 Minute data 0 to 59 Use these devices to write the initial value at time setting or read D8016 Day data 110 31 A year data can be changed over to the four digit year D8017 Month data 1 to 12 In the four digit year mode 1980 to 2079 can be displayed 00 to 99 FXU FX2C PLCs do not support the four digit year mode D8018 Year data ai FX0 FXOS FXON PLCs do not t the real time clock last two digits of year s do not support the real time clock e Clock accuracy 45 sec month at 25 C AOE AMC Cone Leap year cor
86. as inserting the WDT instruction D into the sequence program Do not turn OFF the power while the contents of file registers are changed 4 If the power is turned OFF during the change the data stored in file registers may be filled with th unexpected values or a parameter error may occur D e Writing data to the EEPROM memory s lt In the case of FX3S FX3G FX3Gc PLCs gt S It takes 80 ms to write data to one serial block 500 points Execution of the program is paused during this period but the watchdog timer is refreshed automatically cautions are required lt In the case of FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N F X2NC PLCs gt It takes 10ms to write data to 1 point Execution of the program is paused during this period and the watchdog timer is automatically refreshed lt In the case of FXON PLCs gt Write data from peripheral equipment sioug Q 2 Cautions on handling file registers using the same number register update function of the Bi BMOV instruction 253 e When updating the contents of file registers having the same number make sure that the file register 2 number is same between the input variable and the output variable Cd e Make sure that the number of transfer points specified by n does not exceed the file register area 7 e Ifthe number of transfer points exceeds the file register area an operation error M8067 occurs and the BMOV instruction is not executed e Indexing 7 When the input variable and output variabl
87. auxiliary relays inside the PLC Coils of auxiliary relays are driven by contacts of various devices inside the PLC in the same way as output relays Auxiliary relays have many electronically normally open contacts and normally closed contacts which can be used arbitrarily inside the PLC However external loads cannot be driven directly by these contacts External loads should be driven by output relays gJ D O D O D Ul S2913 2 3 1 Numbers of auxiliary relays OO The table below shows auxiliary relay M numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal QIU 1 FX3s FX3G FX3GcC FX3u FX3uc PLCs S2o DS D go B Latched battery Fixed latched battery General Generaltype backed up type backed up type SpecialtypE FX3U FX3UC ciate to M499 M500 to M1023 M1024 to M7679 M8000 to M8511 4 PLC 500 points 524 points 2 6656 points 912 points g D General type Be aU Lal aa Generaltype type Special type yP backed up type yP p yP D FX3G FX3GC MO to M383 M384 to M1535 Mica to M7679 M8000 to M8511 PLC 384 points 1152 points 6144 points 512 points Fixed latched EEPROM General type See E TTE General type Special type FX3S PLC MO to M383 M384 to M511 M512 to M1535 M8000 to M8511 384 points 128 points 1024 points 512 points siouy QI 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter 6 setting aos 2 This area is latched backed up
88. be called RAM file registers to notify that they are the latched type 95 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 8 2 Structure of data registers and file registers 1 16 bit type One 16 bit data register or file register can store a numeric value within the range from 32768 to 32767 High order K _ D 0 16 bit type t Low order pig OLt 011 011 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 1 TN O O t N OOt AN OOo Yt AN c Sign 0 Positive 1 Negative A numeric value can be read from or written to a data register by an instruction usually Or a numeric value can be directly read from or written to a data register from a display unit display module or programming tool 2 32 bit type Two serial data registers or file registers can express 32 bit data A data register having a larger device number handles high order 16 bits and a data register having a smaller device number handles low order 16 bits Inthe index type V handles high order 16 bits and Z handles low order 16 bits Two serial data registers or file registers can store a numeric value within the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 High order k D 1 High order 16 bits gt k D 0 Low order 16 bits gt Low order TN OD TA ODOTNAN Nr ON OM O N 073 536 268 134 67 33 In the case of
89. be used When a counting input pulse is not provided none of high speed counter output contacts does not turn ON even if the PLC executes an instruction in the status Current value Set value Counting can be started or stopped in a high speed counter when the output coil OUT C is set to ON or OFF Program this output coil in the main routine If the output coil is programmed in a step ladder circuit subroutine or interrupt routine counting cannot be started or stopped until the step ladder or routine is executed Make sure that the signal input to a high speed counter does not exceed the response frequency described above If an input signal exceeds the response frequency a WDT error or parallel link communication malfunction may occur The response frequency changes depending on number of used counters but the input filter value is fixed Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input When a high speed counter is reset by the RST instruction it cannot execute counting until driving of the RST instruction is set to OFF Program example X010 RST EN ENO d CC235 Timing chart X000 The current value does not change even if pulses are input because the C235 reset instruction is valid Current value of C235 l C235 C235 remains reset Gant of RST C235 is set to ON nara of RST C235 is set to OFF because the conta
90. blue Destination IP Address 0 0 0 1 to 255 255 255 254 decimal Set destination port No N oS Destination Port No This column is valid only when the selected protocol is UDP and 1025 to 65534 eal P the selected open system is MC Protocol To T 3 Click the END button to finish the setting and close the Ethernet Port Open Setting dialog box suo oun4 2yo N 295 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 4 On the Ethernet Port tab click the Time Setting button On the Ethernet Port Time Setting dialog box set the SNTP server IP address and others Ethernet Port Time Setting Time Setting SNTP Function Setting v Input Format DEC T Time Zone GMT Execute the time setting when the power is turned ON On error Action C Execution Interval Execution Time 12 vl loo Default Check Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range SNTP Function Setting Select whether to use the time setting function 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Decimal SNTP Server IP Address Set SNTP Server IP Address 00 00 00 01 to DE EF FF FE Hexadecimal Input Format Select the input format used to set the SNTP server IP address DEC HEX Select the time zone for synchronizing the time among the following choices GMT 12 00 GMT 11 00 GMT 10 00 GMT 9 00 GMT 8 00 GMT 7 00 GMT 6 00 GMT
91. called word devices Even bit devices can handle numeric values when they are combined In this case the number of digits Kn and the head device number should be combined The number of digits is expressed in units of 4 bits K1 to K4 are used for 16 bit data and K1 to K8 are used for 32 bit data For example K2MO indicates 2 digit data handled by MO to M7 0 Positive 1 Negative DO Low order Transferred K2M0 0 T N I E I O E 211 o T4 Tot ott M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 MS M4 M3 M2 M1 MO Transferred Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative D1 Low order o0 o ojo ojo o jo o j1jo 1 o 1jo 1 When 16 bit data is transferred to K1MO to K3MO data is not transferred to high order bits because the data length is insufficient 32 bit data is transferred in the same way When the number of digits specified for bit devices is K1 to K3 in a 16 bit or K1 to K7 in a 32 bit operation insufficient high order bits are always regarded as 0 It means that such data is always positive 2 digit BCD data handled by X004 to X013 is converted into binary data and then transferred to DO DO A bit device number can be specified arbitrarily usually but it is recommended to set the least significant digit to 0 for X and Y In other words it is recommended to specify X000 X010 X020 YOOO YO10 YO20 For M and S multiples of 8 are ideal but it is recommended to specify MO
92. changed to the latched battery backed up type by parameter setting while an optional battery is attached but the latched battery backed up area cannot be set 3 Stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC or stored in the EEPROM in a memory cassette while a memory cassette is attached 2 9 2 Data storage destination and access method Because the memory for data storage is different between extension registers and extension file registers the access method is different as shown in the tables below Data storage destination Device Data storage destination FX3U FX3UC Built in RAM backed up by battery Extension registers R FX3G FX3GC_ Built in RAM FX3U FX3UC Memory cassette flash memory Extension file registers ER FX3G Built in EEPROM or memory cassette EEPROM FX3GC Built in EEPROM Access method Extension file registers registers A Only dedicated instructions can access Access method Reading in program Writing in program A Only dedicated instructions can access Display module e G Test operation in online mode of GX Works2 fr Se Data change method Batch writing by GX Works2 PO x O Computer link function x FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 9 3 Structure of extension registers and extension file registers One extension register consists of 16 bits Extension registers can be used
93. er C251 e When an index register is used for a counter number specified in the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT C253 instruction all hardware counters are handled as software counters only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Example C235Z0 6 FX2N FX2NC PLCs a oS C235 59 C236 2o C246 T C251 e C253 hardware counter is handled as a software counter when the logic is reversed using the external reset input signal logic change function only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs F Example When the logic of the external reset input signal is reversed for C253 O For reverse of the logic of the external reset input signal refer to Subsection 2 7 6 F zA M8388 z n Own 2 EN CCoil CValue 83 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 10 Response frequency of high speed counters 1 Response frequency of hardware counters The tables below show the maximum response frequency of hardware counters When hardware counters are handled as software counters in some operating conditions their maximum response frequency becomes equivalent to that of software counters and they are subject to restriction of the total frequency For conditions under which hardware counters are handled as software counters refer to the previous page 1 In FX3u FX3uc PLCs Maximum response frequency Counter No a C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 100kHz 1 phase 1 counting input C244 OP C245
94. error occurrence PLC PP communication error M8062 D8062 0000 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 0000 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 to 6311 6312 6313 6314 Parameter error M8064 D8064 0000 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6409 Parallel link communication error 1 M8063 D8063 Parity error overrun error or framing error Communication character error Confirm that the equipment connected to the programming panel PP or programming connector is connected securely to the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected Data format error while the PLC power is ON Command error Continues operation Communication data sum check error No error Parity error overrun error or framing error Communication character error Communication data sum check error e Inverter communication computer link and programming Data format error ey Confirm that communication parameters are set correctly in Command error accordance with the application Continues __ oe operation Monitoring timeout error e Simple N N link parallel link etc Confirm that the program is set correctly in accordance with the No error application e Confirm the wiring of communication cables Parallel link character error Parallel link sum check error Parallel link format error Program sum check error Memory capacity setting error Stops Latched area setting error Sto
95. extension cables are connected correctly FROM TO instruction error This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation Review the program or check the contents of operands used in instructions Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may occur for the following reason for example Example T2002 itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T200Z means T300 which causes a device number error Other error absence of the IRET instruction absence of the SRET instruction improper relationship between FOR and NEXT etc Improper sampling time TS lt 0 Improper input filter constant a lt 0 or 100 lt a Improper proportional gain KP lt 0 lt The PLC stops PID operation gt This data error occurs in the control parameter set value or during Improper integral time TI lt 0 i PID instruction Improper derivative gain KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD Check the contents of parameters Improper derivative time TD lt 0 Sampling time Ts lt Scan time The measured value variation exceeds the limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV The deviation exceeds the limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV The integral result exceeds the limit lt The PLC continues operation while regarding the operation data as Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 the maximum value gt A data error has occurred in the control parameter set value or PID The derivative value exceeds the
96. fff M 8405 to M 8407 Unavailable M18408 w o a ca v18409 eea a a En a M 8410 Unavailable MODBUS serial communication ch2 eT Ce RR to MODBUS serial communication Manual aa details M 8421 MODBUS Request in Process yo z5 6 MAA a M 8422 MODBUS Communication Error v5 y s v8 EARR D8422 M 8423 MODBUS Communication Error latched AS Geo ve ae D8423 M 8424 Listen Only Mode EAN s5 ae M 8425 to M 8427 Unavailable 18428 w ea 1110420 E T T a a e M 8430 Unavailable Le fe a ee i ee za z MODBUS serial communication ch1 ae rover te Rete ODEVE eens eon to MODBUS serial communication Manual for details M 8411 ODES Cant taton R awer ee ee i 5 Available in Ver 2 40 or later 6 Available in Ver 1 30 or later Number and name Operation and function 152 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FxX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function SUI INO 09q FX3U CF ADP ch1 Refer to FX3U CF ADP User s Manual for details paa ot to ao O EE a a a a M18402 eae Af tt E Baas Bae E E ee ee 9q ulseoiieg N9 neo ewm e M18405 e TTT ae ee oe SRO o T a a a oe ee E E ed M 8418 CF ADPinstucionenor E
97. from ON when the actual time reaches the input set time Points on time setting a The values stored in date time registers cannot be changed while M8015 is OFF Make sure to set M8015 to ON at the beginning and then input desired date and time b Input the time several minutes ahead of the desired time Forcibly set M8015 to OFF from ON when the actual time reaches the input time The input time becomes valid and the clock starts time counting c If values indicating impossible date and time Example February 30 2006 are input the input date and time are ignored Input possible date and time d The day of the week D8019 is automatically corrected in accordance with the date without regard to the written numeric value 222 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 9 Input filter adjustment D8020 D8021 1 In FX3S FX3G FX3GcC FX3u FX3uc PLCs Inputs X000 to X017 have a digi determined by the value in the range from 0 to 60 2 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF Input terminal Filter 1 X000 to X007 in FX3G PLC 2 Oto 15 in FX3s FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter When the program shown below is executed the filter c
98. held correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage FXU FX2c PLCs 30 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 Types of bit device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change Cleared Input relay X Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared Output relay Y Cleared uIno ed1Aeq Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary TENN Does not change Cleared relay M l Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type auxiliary relay M A Set to initial Special auxiliary relay M Cleared Jane Does not change 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Contact image memory Does not change 2 X Y M S Oo General type state relay Does not change Cleared OSs Cleared gt 5 2 S Does not change while M8033 is ON 8 3 Latched backed up type n a 9 mss sete claw S oes not change D Annunciator S Does not change 2 Does not change Cleared 4 For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON I Timer contact cone a 4 Does not change Cleared F i i or 10 ms eared Time counting coil Does not change while M8033 is ON F Reset coil T D Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change 2 Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Counter cont
99. ie ee ee M18142 erect Pee Ee ees l Wa ee a M18144 feo 2 eS Se i M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command J LY i M 8146 Oo ee men tS ee a l M 8147 Y000 Pulse output monitor BUSY or READY a ee ee M 8148 Y001 Pulse output monitor BUSY or READY ef oe Te ee M18149 Unavailable o doodo ood oo doo i i 144 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX3U Fxsuc FX3G FxX3Gc Fx3s Corresponding special device Inverter communication function Refer to the data communication manual for details M 8150 Unavailable he toe st pee ea Pf fpf As mano mein Lf Communication error latch for EXTR instruction error latch for EXTR instruction D8157 M 81 538 Inverter communication error latch ch2 e ee D8158 M 8159 IVBWR instruction error ch2 Ee Lahe fe D8159 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 Available in Ver 1 10 or later Number and name Operation and function SUI INO 09q fe lt S 9q ulseoiieg N9 Oo lt S lt QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 n oo a8 3 ow r gt D Advanced function M 8160 XCH instruction SWAP function fe fe F M 8162 High speed parallel link mode fpf M 8163 Unavailable M 81643 FROM and TO instructions Transfer poin
100. improper the difference at the start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute tuning again lt The PLC forcibly finishes auto tuning and does not start PID operation gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the start of auto tuning did not agree with the actual operation direction caused by the output for auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto Continues tuning and measured value and then execute auto tuning again operation lt Step response method gt Auto tuning operation direction mismatch lt The PLC finishes auto tuning and does not start PID operation gt The PLC did not execute auto tuning correctly because the set value lt Step response method gt fluctuated during auto tuning The auto tuning operation is improper Set the sampling time to a value sufficiently longer than the output change cycle or set the input filter constant to a larger value After changing the setting execute auto tuning again lt Limit cycle method gt The output set value for auto tuning is abnormal ULV upper limit lt LLV lower limit lt The PLC forcibly finishes auto tuning and does not start PID lt Limit cycle method gt operation gt The PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto Confirm that the target setting contents are correct tuning is abnormal SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt lt The PLC forcibly fin
101. include the waiting time for the constant scan operation trig Maximum value of scan time gered by M8039 Unit 0 1 ms i Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 Stores the ana log value 0 to 255 of the Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 vyanane ae log potentiome ter No 1 0 to 59 seconds For real time clock 0 to 59 minutes For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 0 to 23 hours For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 1st to 31st day For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 January to December For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Last 2 digits of year 0 to 99 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 O Sunday to 6 Saturday For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 1 Available in Ver 2 1 or later 210 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX0S EXon FXu FX2c Corresponding FXO special device Number and name Content of register SUI NO 09q _ Input filter Input filter value 0 to 15 of X000 to X007 Initial value 10ms D 8020 Input filter adjustment Refer to Subsection 4 2 9 Input filter value O to 15 of X10 to X17 Initial value 10ms a E
102. is activated 3 S The state relays activated by the external fault diagnosis program D can be turned OFF by the reset button X005 Every time X005 is set to ON the active annunciator type state relay having the smallest number is reset in turn While the special auxiliary relay M8049 is not driven annunciator type state relays can be used as latched backed up type state relays in sequence programs in the same way as general type state relays 47 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T 2 5 Timer T Timers add and count clock pulses of 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms etc inside the PLC When the count value reaches a specified set value the output contact of the timer turns ON A set value can be directly specified by a constant K in the program memory or indirectly specified by the contents of a data register D In timers TS indicates a contact TC indicates a coil and TN indicates the current value Refer to the Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals 2 5 1 Numbers of timers The table below shows timer T numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal 1 FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc PLCs Retentive type for Retentive type for 100 4 4 For 1 ms pulses 0 001 to 32 767 sec For 100 ms pulses For 10 ms pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec 1 ms pulses ms pulses 0 001 to 32 767 sec 0 1 to 3276 7 sec TO to T1 99 T246 to T249 T2
103. latched area or latched area can be cleared M8031 Non latched memory all clear M8032 Latched memory all clear SUI NO 09q _ Device number Cleared devices 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Contact image of output relay Y general type auxiliary relay M and general type state relay S Contact and time counting coil of timer T Contact number counting coil and reset coil of general type counter C Current value of general type data register D Except data registers used as file registers Current value register of timer T Current value register of general type counter C M8031 Non latched memory all clear Oo Contact image of latched type auxiliary relay M and latched type state relay S Contact and time counting coil of retentive type timer T Contact number counting coil and reset coil of latched type counter and high speed counter Current value register of latched type data register D Current value of general type data register D Data registers used as file registers Current value register of retentive type timer T and 1ms timer T Current value register of latched type counter and high speed counter Latched type extension register R QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D M8032 Latched memory all clear 1 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs equipped with an optional battery general type devices which have been changed to the latched type are handled as devices in the latched area
104. manual for details pee a Qe a 4 D18201 i D18202 D 8203 Number of data transmission sequence errors in master P P P z station D 8204 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave y P y 7 y station No 1 D 8205 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave F e station No 2 D 8206 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave P J P y y station No 3 SIOJOWEIe jo Bunjes pue s di Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave station No 4 D 8208 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave 4 station No 5 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave P P station No 6 Number of data transmission sequence errors in slave Peete station No 7 vV vV vV D 8211 Code for data transmission error in master station v vV vV vV vV D 8209 suooun4 24o N v pz Sos rans Farenin ser mae sa T 7 Dae Coe for daiaansmission error in slave staton No 2 7 Dez Goe for aata transmission eror in seve staton No 3 V D 8215 Code for data transmission error in slave station No 4 pe ode for data wansmission eror save stono s 7 7 7 7 7 pez Deza ode Yor aata ransmisson erorin seve setono 7 7 7 7 7 peze w mez mavae OOOO dL a SI S p J fs ERE g lt S lt lt S 187 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device
105. mode 0 21 us Extension mode 0 42 us The PLC can store symbolic information in the following capacity Make sure that the capacity of symbolic information to be stored does not exceed the available capacity In the case of built in memory 16K memory cassette FX3U FLROM 16 and 64K memory cassette FX3U FLROM 64 and FX3U FLROM 64L Symbolic information capacity Maximum capacity of memory Capacity of memory set by parameters In the case of FX3U FLROM 1M Fixed to 1300 kB It is recommended to use the FX3U FLROM 1M when there is a large amount of symbolic information to be stored It is possible to check the symbolic information capacity using the memory capacity calculation offline of GX Works2 For datails refer to the GX Works2 manual When symbolic information is stored it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed After changing the memory capacity write the symbolic information again 276 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 4 Compatible Optional Memory Models 6 4 Compatible Optional Memory Models SUI NO 09q _ 1 FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Modein Ame Maximum number Enon ne Allowable number Remarks of steps ry tyP of times of writing FX3U FLROM 64 64000 Flash memory 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX3U FLROM 16 16000 Flash memory 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX3U FLROM 64L 64000 Flash memory ieccotim
106. mw D 8108 Number of connected special units fT Mf oy fT eT vy o 1 When the FX3U FLROM 16 is attached 2 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16K steps in the parameter setting Output refresh error Refer to Chapter 5 for details D 8109 Y number where output refresh error has occurred D 8110 D 81 11 D 8112 Unavailable D 8113 D 8114 D 8115 to D 8119 RS instruction and callie link eh1 Refer to the data communication manual for deta BEECECEEEEL GEREREE SAAS EEL BEREGEEREE GORDEDE RORERRRERES GOCOEED SEAS IEEE format setting Dan 3 3 Backed up against power interruption 4 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 183 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 a ooo EF ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX3U Fx3uc FX3G Fx3Gc Fx3s Corresponding special device High speed counter comparison and high speed table 0 HSZ neructon Heh spesdcomparsontapecoumer Te pe T T eo DE SZ and PLSYinstutons Spoed pater become 77 ais D 8132 HSZ and PLSY instructions ve Spean oe M8132 D 8133 Speed pattom frequency ZARA ea
107. of battery voltage o Example 3 0V Initial value y g Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is Q detection level 5 turned ON D a z D 209 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name PLC status D 8007 Instantaneous power interruption D 8008 Instantaneous power interruption detection time D 8009 Unit number where 24V DC has failed Clock D 8010 Current scan time D 801 1 Minimum scan time D 8012 Maximum scan time D 8013 Second data D 8014 Minute data D 8015 Hour data D 8016 Day data D 8017 Month data D 8018 Year data D 8019 Day of the week data Applicable model FX0S EXon FXu FX2c COrresPonding FXO special device EGE _ Accumulated instruction execution time from the step 0 Unit 0 1 ms a Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 V Content of register Stores the number of times M8007 is set to ON Cleared when the power is turned OFF Initial value e FXU FX2C PLCs AC power supply type 10 ms e FXU PLCs DC power supply type 10 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 Minimum input device number of function unit or extension power supply unit where 24V DC has failed Minimum value of scan time Unit 0 1 ms The displayed value does not
108. operation varies depending on the PLC Not cleared in FX2N FX2NC PLCs FX2NC PLCs require an optional memory board equipped with real time clock 157 SUI INO 309g 1 9q ui sanaq IN Oo QUM o o O 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 3 gea a S D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed jo Buas pue sedk suo oun4 Jey N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Operation and function j z FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc Corresponding special device PLC mode M 8030 Does not turn ON the battery LED on the PLC panel even if Battery LED OFF the battery voltage becomes low 2 command Refer to Subsection 4 2 10 M 8031 Non latched memory all Clears the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and a clear clears the current value of T C and D to 0 M 8032 Does not clear file registers D in the program memory Latched memory all Refer to Subsection 4 2 11 clear M 8033 Holds the contents of the image memory and data memory Memory holding against when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP STOP mode Refer to Subsection 4 2 12 M 8034 1 All output disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN command M 8037 Forced STOP command Communication parameter setting flag to set simple N N lin
109. or DHSZ When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is not used instruction is used C235 C236 C241 60kHz 1 phase 60kHz t counting C237 C238 C239 input C240 C242 C243 10kHz C244 C245 C246 60kHz Eo aoe eos sOkHe 200 KHz Number of positioned axes x 40 kHz 60 kHz Number of positioned axes x 5 kHz C251 30kHz 2 phase 30kHZ 2 counting C252 C253 out C253 0P C254 5kHz pu C255 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY PLSR DSZR ZRN PLSV DRVI DRVA e Calculation of the total frequency The total frequency is calculated using the following expression Total frequency gt Sum of frequency used by 1 phase counters Sum of frequency used by 2 phase counters Calculation example Example When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz lt Counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 counting 50 KHz is input C236 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input C237 1 phase 1 counting 10 KHz is input C253 2 phase 2 counting 5 kHz is input Total 115 kHz lt 120 kHz Overall frequency Nr S 87 O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 qd y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug Q jo Buas pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo
110. packed ee Special type FX0 FXOS DO to D29 D30 31 D8000 to D8069 PLCs 30 points 2 points 27 points j 6 FXON DO to D127 D128 to D255 D8000 to D8129 D1000 and later PLCs 128 points 4 Ce 128 points 38 points 1500 points maximum SeS D1000 and later a2 p FXU FX2C Tete D512 to ee D8000 to D8137 2000 points maximum go PLCs oe 488 points 85 points D6000 to D7999 DO to D199 312 points 2000 points RAM file 4 4 For link FXU PLCs 200 points Master gt Slave D490 to D499 l Ver 2 30 or Slave gt Master D500 to D509 D8000 to D8135 _ O earlier 69 points a Reference T 1 This area is not latched but can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting S n 2 This area is latched but can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 This area is fixed to the latched backed up type and the contents can be cleared by the RST and ZRST instructions 4 This area is fixed to the non latched non backed up type and the characteristics about latch backup cannot be changed 5 Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by parameter setting 6 Data registers D6000 to D7999 can be used as file registers by driving the special auxiliary relay M8074 and prohibiting sampling trace Different from file registers secured inside the program memory D6000 to D7999 are secured inside the system memory of the PLC and may
111. programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion 305 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Revision History Revision History Date of preparation 1 2009 7 2009 2 2010 7 2011 2 2012 9 2012 9 2012
112. registers D and backed up against power interruption by battery in FX3U FX3uc PLCs In FX3G FX3GcC PLCs general type devices can be backed up against power interruption if an optional battery is connected FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3uUc PLCs can store the contents of extension registers R in extension file registers ER However FX3U FX3uc PLCs can use extension file registers ER only while a memory cassette is attached Index register V and Z Refer to Section 2 10 Registers V Z are available for indexing Add index registers V Z to other devices as follows In the case of VO 5 Z0 5 D100V0 D105 C20Z0 C25 lt Device number Value of VLI or ZLI Data registers and index registers are used to indirectly specify set values of timers and counters or used in instructions Pointer P and Refer to Section 2 11 Pointers are classified into the branch type and the interrupt type e Branch pointers P specify the jump destination of the CJ FNC 00 Conditional jump and CALL subroutine call instructions e Interrupt pointers I specify the interrupt routine for input interrupt timer interrupt or counter interrupt 10 Constant K H and E Refer to Chapter 3 Among various numeric values used in PLCs K indicates decimal integer H indicates hexadecimal value and E indicates real number floating point data Constants are used for set values and current values of timers and count
113. relay number 3 D8041 stores the second smallest number of active state D 8043 o TEDT IE ON state relay number 4 In this way D8040 to D8047 sequentially store up to 8 active state relays M8047 D 8044 Target state relay numbers are as follows Z 7 V ON state relay number 5 FXO FXOS SO to S63 e FXON SO to S127 D 8045 J elyi wv ON state relay number 6 EO AZG S002039 D 8046 1 ON state relay number 7 D 8047 1 ON state relay number 8 ppo oaase o y e A 219043 Stores the smallest number of active annunciator relays P P M8049 Smallest active state among S900 to S999 when M8049 is ON relay number D 8050 to D 8059 Unavailable Fo E 1 Activated when the END instruction is executed Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details Unconnected head I O number in I O configuration error When programmed input output numbers are unconnected D8060 stores the head unconnected device number Example When X020 is unconnected D 8060 4 o 2 0 Value converted into BCD poa Device number 10 to 337 1 Input X 0 Output Y M8060 D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware code M8061 p02 e062 Error for parallel link error P06 7 e064 p06 7 e065 068 e088 peer Error code for operation eror V M007 D 8068 2 Latched step number where operation error has occurred 4 4 i M8068 D 8069 2 Step number where M8065 to M8067 error has occurred 2 KARIES M8065 to M8067 2 Clear
114. same as the previous condition Same as Prev Set cel Select the device used as the initial setting execution condition RX SB Input Format suooun4 JeyjQ N Set the device number used as the initial setting execution condition e When Condition Device is set to RX Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 00 to 7FH Executional Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode 00 to DFH As shown on the left Condition Device No e When Condition Device is set to SB Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 00 to FFH Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode 00 to 1FFH Execute Select the initial setting execution condition ON OFF Condition 301 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Set item Contents of setting Setting range Select the device to which the initial setting execution contents are written RY RWw Set the device number to which the initial setting execution contents are written e When Write Device is set to RY Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 00 to 7FH eee Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode 00 to DFH S Stown on the left Details of Execution e When Write Device is set to RWw Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 00 to FH Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode 00 to 1FH Set the contents of the initial settings When Write Device is set to RY Write Data Select ON or OFF As shown on th
115. special adapter M 8280 Ch1 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Input mode switching Ch2 M 8282 Ch3 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Output mode switching WBE Rot se Ue Not sed wT Not sed M 8286 Output hold mode cancel M 8287 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8288 _ Not used disabled Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M8289 Not used disabled Sets whether or not output channel is used 4th analog special adapter M 8290 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8291 Input mode switching Ch2 woe Output mode switching wo Not sed wo Not sed no Not sed M 8296 Output hold mode cancel M 8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8298 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8299 Sets whether or not output channel is used 1 In the case of FX3uc PLC versions 1 20 or later are applicable 2 Inthe case of FX3U and FX3uc PLCs versions 2 61 or later are applicable 236 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Operation and function N um be r 4 14 FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 1st analog special adapter M 8260 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection
116. storing character string data including OOH or OOOOH which indicates the end of the character string data in devices specified as the destination in an instruction 1 Character string data stored in word devices Example of data which can be recognized as e Example of data which cannot be recognized as character string data character string data b15 b8 b7 bO0 b15 b8b b0 D100 2nd character 1st character D100 2nd character 1st character D101 4th character 3rd character D101 4th character 3rd character D102 6th character 5th character D102 6th character 5th character 2 I i 2 l l 2 l l D110 OOH 21st character D7999 n th character n 1 th character OOH which indicates OOH which indicates the end of the character the end of the character string cannot be detected in the range from the string can be detected specified device to the last device number 2 Character string data stored in bit devices with digit specification Example of data which can be recognized as e Example of data which cannot be recognized as character string data character string data 129 SUI INC 09q UU omy oO q ep 2 9 39 jUue SUOD y paljioeds aoinag eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Bunjes pue s d suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 3 Character Strings 16 bi
117. terminal and Deeaniaier switching of function C248 OP OUT_C_32 e The reset input is not provided EN ENO CCoil C253 OP e The reset input is not provided 81 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S9149 OO jue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa sioug Q S19 UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 8 How to use 2 phase 2 counting input counters C251 to C255 for 4 edge counting 2 phase 2 counting input counters C251 to C255 usually executes 1 edge counting but can be used for 4 edge counting by the programs shown in the table below FX0S F X0 F XON FX1S F X1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N F X2NC F X3S F X3G F X3GC PLCs do not support this function Counter No When using 2 phase 2 counting input counter for 4 edge counting Description C251 C252 OUT_C_32 1 edge counting before change EN ENO CCoil Phase A CValue t 1 4 Phase B Up counting C253 Phase A H i 1 1 1 1 Phase B l Down counting 4 edge counting after change 11 el 1 1 Phase A C253 OP Phase B OUT_C 32 1 1 1 1 EN ENO Up counting CCoil CValue pl a A Phase A i i 1 1 1 1 Down counting C254 C255 82 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 9 Condition under which hardware counters a
118. the battery voltage becomes low Clears the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and clears the current value of T C D special D and R Does not clear file registers D in the program memory and extension file registers ER in the memory cassette Refer to Subsection 4 2 11 Holds the contents of the image memory and data memory Memory holding against when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP STOP mode M 8034 1 All output disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN command M 8037 Forced STOP command M 8038 Parameter setting M 8039 Constant scan mode mel Refer to Subsection 4 2 12 Communication parameter setting flag to set simple N N link Refer to the data communication manual Makes the PLC execute cyclic operations while keeping the scan time specified in D8039 Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 Activated when the END instruction is executed FX3U FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device Refer to Subsection 4 2 10 Applicable model 140 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc FX3G Fx3cc Fx3s_ Corresponding special device Step ladder and annunciator WKBUAO l Disables transfer between states v vV v v v i Transfer dis
119. the operation cycle is long it automatically counts two or more clocks X010 OFF ON Y010 Contact is not of 42 sec timeout ON activated at this point 1st cycle 2nd cycle n th cycle n 1 th cycle Timer starts counting TO Contact is activated 52 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T 2 5 6 As shown in the above operation diagram the accuracy of operation of the timer contact after the coil is driven until the contact turns ON is shown in the following outline expression q T Timer set value sec T To 0 001 sec timer for 1 ms 0 01 sec timer for 10 ms or 0 1 sec timer for 100 ms To Operation cycle sec If the contact is programmed before the timer coil 2T0O results in the worst case When the timer set value is 0 the output contact turns ON when a coil instruction is executed in the next cycle An interrupt execution type timer for 1 ms pulses counts clock pulses of 1 ms as an interrupt processing after a coil instruction has been executed Program examples Off delay timer and flicker timer Off delay timer X001 TS5 X001 Y000 Y000 T5 _ 20 sec Flicker timer X001 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec T1 T2 T1 TS2 gt H lt One operation cycle In addition the flicker operation can be performed by the ALT instruction Multi timer using the STMR instruction Off delay timer
120. the output contact turns ON When the current value decreases from 5 to 6 the output contact turns OFF X012 X012 Up counting Down counting Up counting M8200 X013 A X014 4244 Current 3 3 value 4 2 2 1 o r a E eee ee 0 OUT_C_32 f 3 EN ENO When output contact has 2 3 3 CCoil been already turned ON 2 5 5 a T CValue aN bese oh 3 7 Y001 V Set value constant The set value can be indirectly specified instead e The current value increases or decreases without regard to the operation of the output contact When the counter executes up counting from 2 147 483 647 the count value becomes 2 147 483 648 In the same way when the counter executes down counting from 2 147 483 648 the count value becomes 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called ring counter e When the reset input X013 turns ON and then the RST instruction is executed the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the output contact turns OFF e In a latched type counter the current value output contact operation status and reset status of the counter are latched backed up by a battery etc in the PLC For details on backup methods against power interruption refer to Section 1 2 e A 32 bit counter can be used as a 32 bit data register 32 bit counters cannot be handled as target devices in 16 bit applied instructions e If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by the DMOV instructio
121. the positioning table for the pulse output destination YOO3 D 4 Set the relay number of the rotation direction output signal FX3U FX3UC Initial setting Pulse output destination YOOO Y010 Y000 to Y357 5 Signal Pulse output destination YOO2 Y012 a O T Pulse output destination Y003 2 Y013 FX3G FX3GC Refer to the Positioning Control Manual Y000 to Y177 FX3U FX3UC Set the head number of devices storing the set data pulse number and frequency DO to D6400 1600 devices FX3U FX3UC or 1200 devices FX3G FX3GC are occupied starting from the RO to R31168 Head Address head device number set here without regard to the number of axes Initial setting RO FX3G FX3GC e Refer to the Positioning Control Manual DO to D6800 S23 RO to R22800 3g P je No This column shows the table number _ z sa l Numbers 1 to 100 can be set Select the positioning type among the following DDVIT Interrupt positioning instruction 7 Positioning DPLSV Variable speed output pulse instruction i Instruction DDRVI Relative positioning instruction Q DDRVA Absolute positioning instruction D Refer to the Positioning Control Manual T Set the pulse number output by the operation instruction set in Positioning Instruction Refer to the Pulse column Positioning Control 2 Refer to the Positioning Control Manual Manual Set the speed pulse frequency output by the operation instruction set in Positioning R
122. the source of the BMOV instruction and a file register having the same number is not specified as the destination that is when the same number register update function is not activated the contents of the file register area A in the program memory are not read 1 When a file register is specified as the source and a data register is specified as the destination Built in memory or System RAM Data memory Data register memory cassette Program memory Program comment a D1000 v i 500 points x File register Data register 14 blocks 7000 points A maximum Data register Batch transfer of data registers e When X000 is set to ON the contents of the data register area B are read as shown in the left figure e A file register can be specified in the output variable Cd However if a Same number is specified in both the input variable and the output variable Cd the sSame number register update function is activated For the same number register update function refer to the previous page 2 When file registers of different numbers are specified in the source and destination Built in memory or System RAM memory cassette Program Data memory memory Program Data register comment D1000 5 l D1100 500 points x File register satel D1199 14 blocks Al D1400 7000 points D1499 maximum Data register Write X001 k1 EN D1100 D1400 K100 e When X001 is set to ON th
123. to Chapter 5 for details 016109 aarne anere ouere enor hano e ae o n pet ee Function board dedicated to FX1S FX1N PLCs Dene N ARo ote ee TE Poo o E Fe a a a l Bee Pe mae eot E ee DETS oDe Unavalable RS instruction and computer link ch1 Refer to the data communication manual for details D 8120 2 RS instruction and computer link ch1 y P z we P Communication format setting D 81212 Computer link ch1 Station number setting RABE D 8122 3 RS instruction Number of remaining send data points ee eo ee D 8123 RS instruction Monitoring of number of received data points D 8124 RS instruction Header Initial value STX D 8125 RS instruction Terminator Initial value ETX SI S S S SISISIES ERE EDE D 8126 Unavailable D 8127 Computer link ch1 On demand head number specification v D 8128 Computer link ch1 On demand data quantity specification v D 8129 2 RS instruction and computer link ch1 Timeout time setting v 2 Backed up against power interruption 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP v v v Corresponding special device M8104 M8104 M8109 M8112 M8113 M8114 M8122 M8123 M8127 M8128 M8129 204 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc COrr
124. to Y013 YOOO to Y017 YOOO to Y027 YOOO to Y037 YOOO to Y047 YOOO to YO77 p 8 points 12 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points When extended faut X000 to X267 256 FXU PLC p 184 points points Outour Y000 to Y267 total p 184 points FX2C 64M FX2C 96M FX2C 128M FX2C 160M When extended inbi X000 to X037 X000 to X057 X000 to X077 X000 to X117 X000 to X267 256 FX2C PLC P 32 points 48 points 64 points 80 points 184 points points Output Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y057 Y000 to Y077 Y000 to Y117 Y000 to Y267 total p 32 points 48 points 64 points 80 points 184 points 38 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y 2 2 2 Functions and roles Examples of terminal names and wiring sink input are for the FX3U Series PLC O D O D O D External power supply 1 9q Ul S9149 signal YOOO NO contact OO i QDU x000 Y000 Output terminal E H NC contact De 2A A E E NENN S N frame eof E E E E The PLC receives signals from external switches The PLC outputs signals to external loads through 4 through input terminals output terminals Contacts for external output th AN Input relay X connected fo ia input terminal output devices such as relay contacts TRIACs and F inside the PLC is an electronic relay isolated transistors of output relays ar
125. variable Cd Make sure also that the number of transfer points specified by n does not exceed the file register area lf the number of transfer points exceeds the file register area an operation error occurs and the BMOV instruction is not executed e When input variables and Cd_ are indexed the instruction is executed if the actual device number is located within the file register area and if the number of transfer points does not exceed the file register area 100 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 3 Data register File register lt Writing by the BMOV instruction gt When a file register D1000 or later is specified as the destination of the BMOV instruction it is possible to directly write data to the file register area A in the program memory FXON PLCs do not support this function In FXU FX2c PLCs the special device M8198 reverses the BMOV instruction execution direction o Write Built in memory or System RAM OFF memory cassette M8024 Data D200 memory Program memory D599 Data register iad Program ee comment D1000 D1100 D200 D1100 500 points x File register Data register K400 14 blocks A e When X001 is set to ON data is transferred to the data i ea D1499 register area B and file register area A as shown in the maximum Data register left figure If the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to
126. when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN For special data registers refer to Chapter 4 2 The clock data is held by the power accumulated in the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC The clock data is not held correctly if the voltage of the built in large capacity capacitor becomes low The large capacity capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days when the ambient temperature is 25 C if it is charged fully by turning ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more 26 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 Types of bit device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change Cleared Input relay X Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary eared Does not change Cleared relay M l Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type auxiliary relay M A Set to initial r Special auxiliary relay M Cleared auen Does not change SuI INC ed1Aeq Output relay Y Cleared 9q uiseoiieg N9 Contact image memory X Y M S Does not change Oo OVUM General type state relay elected Does not change COS a TE iq Latched backed up type Z go a sei ew Does not change For 100 Cl F Does not change Cleared or ms eared Does not change while M8033 is ON 4 For 10 CI F Does not change
127. zero point return speed in the DSZR for each output number of pulse Initial value 4 50000 Acceleration Tine fims Set the ace reralel time for each output number of pulse 50 to 5000 Initial value 100 Deceleration Time ms narod tas time for each output number of pulse 50 to 5000 Select the interrupt input in the DVIT instruction for each output number of pulse Specify a user interrupt command device M for a pulse output destination device not used in the DVIT instruction 4 Initial setting Pulse output destinationYO00 X000 Setting range X000 to X007 M8460 DVIT Instruction Pulse output destinationY001 X001 X000 to X007 M8461 Pulse output destinationY002 X002 X000 to X007 M8462 Pulse output destinationY003 X003 X000 to X007 M8463 YO Set the pulse output destination Y1 Set the pulse output destination Y2 Set the pulse output destination Y3 6 Set the pulse output destination p This button displays the Individual Setting dialog box provided to set the table for the TBL Setting Range instruction For the setting procedure refer to the next step As shown on the left Interruption Input of 1 The setting range is from 10 to 100 000 Hz in FX3G FX3GC F X3uU FX3uUCc PLCs The setting range is from 10 to 200 000 Hz in FX3U PLCs when the pulse output destination is the high speed output special adapter 2 The creep speed should satisfy the relationship Bias speed lt Creep speed lt
128. 0000 decimal value is transferred to R10 and R11 Because a numeric value larger than 32767 is 32 bit data a 32 bit operation double D instruction is required When an extension register on the low order side R10 is specified an extension register on the high order side R11 is automatically occupied R10 e Transferring the contents of a data register to an extension register The contents of D10 are transferred to R20 R20 106 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 9 6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers Extension file registers ER are usually used as log data storage destinations and set data storage destinations Extension file registers can be handled only in dedicated instructions shown in the table below When using the contents of extension file registers in other instructions transfer them to extension registers having the same device numbers and then use corresponding extension registers gJ D O D O D In FX3u FX3uc PLCs extension file registers are available only while a memory cassette is attached T e FX3u FX3uc PLCs 2 Instruction Description LOADR This transfer instruction reads the contents of extension file registers ER to extension registers R OO This transfer instruction writes the contents of extension registers R to extens
129. 003 Ring counter value for rising edge z Os 5 8087 1 6 us unit ra D 8088 X003 Ring counter value for falling edge p za M8078 D 8089 Une any am ee D 8090 X003 Pulse width Pulse period F Ca Seon 10 us unit C D 8092 1 X004 Ring counter value for rising edge Z c ages 1 6 us unit S D 8094 X004 Ring counter value for falling edge EA M8079 D 8095 CUS He Unt a i D 8096 X004 Pulse width Pulse period P e 5 8097 10 us unit 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 2 Available in Ver 1 10 or later High speed ring counter Up counting ring counter of 0 to 32767 Unit 0 1 ms 16 z bits gt 3 The 0 1 ms high speed ring counter D8099 is activated when the END instruction is executed after M8099 turned ON 182 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Content of register Memory information D 8101 1 6 REDI Value converted into BCD PLC type and system Ta I 16 16 version Shown Version 1 00 on the right 16K steps A j P P y ed ae aie wer ef se a2 0 8103 Le aa ies D 8104 Terran Lee ees D 8105 Le fe es i D 8106 Lae eea i D18107 Number of registered device comments J lt
130. 061 and M8064 to M8067 turn ON D8004 stores the smallest device number and M8004 turns ON 1 M8060 M8061 and M8064 to M8067 are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Note that M8068 and D8068 are not cleared 2 When M8069 is set to ON the PLC will enter the STOP mode M8061 PLC hardware error if a failure occurs in an I O extension unit extension power supply unit or function block When M8069 is set to ON the PLC executes the I O bus check If an error is detected D8061 stores the error code 6103 or 6104 and M8061 turns ON When D8061 stores 6104 M8009 turns ON and D8009 stores the I O numbers connected after the extension power supply unit where 24V DC power failure has occurred This function is available only in FX3G FX3Gc FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 3 When units and blocks having programmed I O numbers are not actually connected M8060 turns ON and D8060 stores the head device number of unconnected units blocks This function is available only in FX3G FX3GC FX3u and FX3uc PLCs Example When X020 is unconnected 4fo 2 o Value converted into BCD E number 1 Input X 0 Output Y 1 10 to 337 in FX3u FX3uc PLCs and 10 to 177 in FX3G FX3Gc PLCs 4 When an I O device number is directly specified or indirectly specified using index registers for the LD AND OR or OUT instruction and if the specified I O device number is not actually connected M8316 turns ON and D8317 high order bits and D8316 low o
131. 095 Sector 9 ER18432 to ER20479 R18432 to R20479 Sector 2 ER4096 to ER6143 R4096 to R6143 Sector 10 ER20480 to ER22527 R20480 to R22527 Sector 3 ER6144 to ER8191 R6144 to R8191 Sector 11 ER22528 to ER24575 R22528 to R24575 3 Sector 4 ER8192 to ER10239 R8192 to R10239 Sector 12 ER24576 to ER26623 R24576 to R26623 Aes Sector 5 ER10240 to ER12287 R10240 to R12287 Sector 13 ER26624 to ER28671 R26624 to R28671 A 22 Sector 6 ER12288 to ER14335 R12288 toR14335 Sector 14 ER28672 to ER30719 R28672 to R30719 Bee Sector 7 ER14336 to ER16383 R14336 to R16383 Sector 15 ER30720 to ER32767 R30720 to R32767 T 2 9 7 Cautions on using extension file registers 4 g 1 Cautions on writing data to extension file registers in FX3u FX3uc PLCs 8 Because extension file registers are stored in the flash memory inside a memory cassette pay attention to s the following points S e When writing data to extension file registers using the SAVER instruction Initialize sectors to be written in advance before executing this instruction After initialization write data to extension file registers In FX3uc PLCs Ver 1 30 or later it is not necessary to initialize sectors to be written when using the RWER instruction e When writing data to extension file registers using the LOGR instruction Initialize sectors to be written in advance before starting to log data soug QI e When using the INITR instruction 6 This instruction initializes the contents of ext
132. 1 with extension function 1 Writing is not made in the state where it connected with the PLC and clock 277 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 4 Compatible Optional Memory Models 7 FX1N EEPROM 8L 2000 steps maximum FX EEPROM 8 FX EEPROM 16 FX EPROM 8 FX RAM 8 A ee E a SE a e R Es oa ee O ee ee ee ee re ee ees ee ee ee ee E a E ee a oa with extension function a ae S ee ee FX2NC EEPROM 16 v FX2NC EEPROM16C y with clock FX2NC ROM CE1 with extension function 4 and clock 4 FXos FX0 FXoN FXU FX2c PLCs Modellname Maximum number ene TE Allowable number Remarks of steps HU of times of writing FX EEPROM 4 4000 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX EEPROM 8 8000 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX EPROM 8 8000 EPROM Model name FXO FX0S FXU FX2C FX EEPROM 8 E en es ee Os Cautions 1 Memory cassettes except the FX3U FLROM 1M which save the symbolic information are applicable also to the FX3U FX3uUc PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 3 00 In this case the FX3U FX3uc PLC operates but the written symbolic information is invalid 2 If a memory cassette which saves programs including the block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is set valid is used for any PLC other than the FX3U FX3uUc PLC Ver 3 00 or later the PLC using such a memory cassette does
133. 1 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8298 Error status Error status 1 In the case of FX3uc PLC versions 1 30 or later are applicable 2 The model code is 20 for the PT ADP and 21 for the PTW ADP 240 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later e FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP Applicable Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 20 or later version 1st analog special adapter D 8280 Input data Ch D8281 input data Ch2 D8282 Output dala D 8283 Ch4 Input data Ch Output setting data Not used Ch1 Number of times of Number of averaging times pee averaging 1 to 4095 Mor useditdisabled for Ch1 1 to 4095 Ch2 Number of times of Number of averaging times D 8265 averaging 1 to 4095 Not usedidisablgd for Ch2 1 to 4095 Ch3 Number of times of D 8286 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used Ch4 Number of times of D 8287 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used Error status Error status D 8289 Model code 1 Model code 2 2nd analog special adapter 2 D 8290 Ch1 Input data Ch1 Output setti
134. 1 Error detection devices 1 Error detection M8060 and later and D8060 and later When some devices among M8060 to M8067 turn ON D8004 stores the smallest device number and M8004 turns ON 1 M8063 and M8067 are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Note that M8068 and D8068 are not cleared 2 When M8069 is set to ON the PLC executes the I O bus check If an error is detected D8061 stores the error code 6103 or 6104 and M8061 turns ON When D8061 stores 6104 M8009 turns ON and D8009 stores the I O numbers in the unit where 24V DC power failure has occurred Only FX2N FX2NcC PLCs support this function 3 When units and blocks having programmed I O numbers are not actually connected M8060 turns ON and D8004 stores the head device number of unconnected units blocks Only FXuU FX2Nc PLCs support this function Example When X020 is unconnected 4 0 2 0 Value converted into BCD o T Device number 10 to 337 1 Input X 0 Output Y 2 Operations of special devices for error detection Special auxiliary relays for error detection and special data registers for error detection operate under the relationship shown below The error occurrence state can be checked by monitoring the contents of auxiliary relays and data registers from a programming tool or by using the PLC diagnosis function D8009 gt M8009 24 VDC failure D8060 gt M8060 I O configuration error M8069 gt D8061 gt M8061 PLC hardware
135. 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input 4 edge counting terminal terminal Software counters Software counters Software counters Not provided 32 bit Not provided bidirectional counter Provided Provided Not provided Not provided 32 bit bidirectional counter Provided Provided Not provided Not provided 32 bit 1 edge counting bidirectional ene Provided Provided Classification Counter No 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input 4 edge counting terminal terminal Software counters Software counters Software counters Not provided 32 bit Not provided bidirectional counter Provided Provided Not provided Not provided 32 bit bidirectional coumer Provided Provided Not provided Not provided 32 bit 1 edge counting bidirectional coume Provided Provided 68 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 2 Input assignment for high speed counters Inputs X000 to X007 X003 are assigned as shown in the tables below according to each high speed counter number When a high speed counter is used the filer constant of a corresponding input number in the PLC main unit automatically changes Input terminals not used for high speed counters however can be used as general inputs For the input specifications of the PLC main unit refer to the hardware man
136. 12 a ee wa 2 they D 8085 The PLC system occupies these devices when the sampling Le i 4 D 8086 trace function is used in the eile A6GPP A6PHP PF v f D 8087 A7PHP or personal computer z 7 on aso meat EES EAA S ti o ee ee ee uci Pes ys a a ee ea Pe es Sl a Ss a sa Led hs i a eet 2 el Ca fe ee ZETNEA 1 Sampling trace devices are used by peripheral equipment High speed ring counter Up counting ring counter of 0 to 32767 Unit 0 1 ms 16 bits 7 D 8100 Unavailable 2 The 0 1 ms high speed ring counter D8099 is activated when the END instruction is executed after M8099 turned ON Corresponding special device M8075 to M8079 203 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register Memory information D18101 Unavailable C e a 2 2K steps v V D 8102 4 4K steps 4 4 4 8 8K steps 8 8 8 16 16K steps 16 16 PETG owi ooo PP e DPIC ESETERE D 6107 Unavailable ee ee eee 18708 ee ewes figs le ef 1 Available in Ver 3 00 or later Output refresh error Refer
137. 2 2013 9 2013 9 2013 4 2015 Revision A Description First Edition Special auxiliary relay and special data register for FX3U CF ADP instructions was added Manual name of a related manual was changed Keyword operation is changed Support of Permanent PLC Lock and Customer keyword FX3U FX3UC Supports Read from PLC Write to PLC of symbolic information Support of the setting Read protect the execution program for block passwords Supports connection of FX3U FLROM 1M FX3GC Series PLC was added Special parameter setting by GX Woks2 was added Special parameter error M8489 and D8489 was added The error code for parameter error was added The error code for special block error was added Instructions was added DHSCS Support special parameter in the FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs Support special parameter Ethernet adapter The description is changed Ethernet Adapter to Ethernet Port FX3S Series PLC was added Supported in FX3s series version 1 10 Supported in FX3G series version 2 20 FX3S 30MLIJ EL 2AD PLC was added FX3G 4EX BD and FX3G 2EYT BD connection was added A part of the cover design is changed FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN MODEL CODE 09R925 JY997D26001L Effective April 2015 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
138. 3U and FX3UC PLCs iera revatee a a a E E eors A A A eors Sereemm ooo e e e e eors TESE EEE ieoa Sempingtacesysemaea A eT EE e e a MEO ee E P a a e083 Pe Sd a a meen oe SEE E ME SE meos RE a la me RES DEE RA a a vieo a E E E a 142 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Pulse width Pulse period measurement FX3G FX3GC PLCs Refer to the FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction for details M 8074 M 8075 M 8076 M 8077 M 8078 M 8079 M 8080 M 8081 M 8082 M 8083 M 8084 to M 8089 1 Available in Ver 1 10 or later mele M 8090 M 8091 M 8092 M 8093 M 8094 M 8095 M 8096 M 8097 M 8098 High speed ring counter M 8099 M 8100 M 8101 M 8102 M 8103 M 8104 M 8105 M 8106 M 8107 M 8108 Output refresh error Refer to Chapter 5 for details M 8109 M 8110 M 8111 Expansion Board For FX3S FX3G M 8112 M 8113 M 8114 M 8115 M 8116 M 8117 M 8118 M 8119 Applicable model Operation and function FX3U FX3UC FX3G FX3GC FX3S Uravaiebe i dle Pase wihPuseperod measurement sting tag A7 000 Puse wivPuse perea measwrerenteo A 7 G07 Puse wists perea measwrmentfag A7 X003 Pulse width Pulse period measure
139. 4 2 7 mele ei Turns ON when the addition or subtraction result is 0 M 8021 Turns ON when the subtraction result is less than the y z y F y Borrow maximum negative value M 8022 Turns ON when carry occurs in the addition result or when Carry overflow occurs in the shift operation result M 8023 Unavailable in set BV eam eos _ cnesmerscmowm TT fT uous foise tT fT e e oe Changes over the 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer over the 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer M 8028 Enables interrupts while the E E A instruction is executed M 8029 Instruction execution Turns ON when the operation of DSW etc is completed v v v v v complete 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Je J lt S lt S lt S lt S K lt Corresponding special device 139 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name PLC mode M 8030 Battery LED OFF command M 8031 1 Non latched memory all clear M 8032 Latched memory all clear M 8033 Operation and function Does not turn ON the battery LED on the PLC panel even if
140. 497 IP address storage area clear error ie ef gA v4 lt S n A eR a a AE 1 Used when the SNTP function setting is set to Use in the time setting parameters 2 Available in Ver 3 10 or later 3 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 4 Available in Ver 2 10 or later 154 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function SUI NO 09q _ Error detection Refer to Gh 5 for details Mere eee U a raa si Fe O a SL E e nea epee ee oes M 6450 to Mj8459_ Unavailable E 1 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON 2 Available in Ver 2 20 or later Positioning Refer to the positioning control manual for details M 8464 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y000 l J 3 p r P D8464 Clear signal device specification function enable M 8465 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y001 r 73 r y y D8465 Clear signal device specification function enable M 8466 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y002 l r 73 p D8466 Clear signal device specification function enable M 8467 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y003 l 4 D8467 Clear signal device specification function enable 3 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 4 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are
141. 5 Incorrect combination among instruction device 6501 symbol and device number OUT T or OUT C is not provided before the set value Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs PLC Error operation O 9q ulseoiieg N 6502 The set value is not provided after OUT T or a OUT C Each instruction is checked during programming If a syntax error occurs correct the improper instruction in the program mode Oo 6503 Stops Insufficient number of operands in an instruction operation A same label number is used more than once A same interrupt input or high speed counter input is used more than once 6505 The device number is beyond the allowable range Circuit error M8066 D8066 6601 The LD or LDI instruction is used continuously 9 times or more e The LD or LDI instruction is not provided A coil is not provided The relationship between LD LDI and ANB ORB is improper 6504 jue SuoD 9 39 y payloads aoinag jeeds Aa 6602 The STL RET MCR El DI SRET IRET FOR NEXT FEND or END instruction P pointer or interrupt is not connected to the bus line e The MPP instruction is not provided SJOUF 6603 The MPS instruction is used continuously 12 times or more The relationship among MPS MRD and MPP instructions is improper The STL instruction is used continuously 9 times or more The MC MCR I interrupt or SRET instructio
142. 5 6 Types and Setting of Parameters 269 G21 Parameter LIS Gosens EE EA EAA AEE AORE 270 6 2 Parameter Initial Valts sssrini neiaa aaa a Aaa aa E E Aaa AEEA AEA 273 6 3 Memory Capacity Setting Range sssssssnussnnennnnnnennnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnennnnnnnnnn nenne 275 6 4 Compatible Optional Memory Models ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaneeseeeesaeeseenessannessonees 277 6 9 KeyWord aisin E a ca cates cals Whaley Aaa dene ARSA deena ude ASS Aa e Aa 279 6 5 1 PLC applicability and access restriction cccccceccccceeececeeececeeeeeeeeecesseeeeseeeeeeeseeeesaeeeesseeeeeaeeees 279 6 5 2 Registering and changing KECYWOMKGS ccccccssecccsssceecssecccseececseeeeenseseessaseeetsueeessueeessanesensueeeees 281 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 ssssssnnnusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen nnna 284 6 051 PLC Parameter Seun sccesc se ces srr a A A xc ee eeene aes 284 6 6 2 Network parameter scent ested a E a ee Bee aes 298 6 6 3 Transferring parameters sequence program and symbolic information to the PLC 302 7 Other Functions 303 7 1 Symbolic information storage and block PASSWOTM cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesens 303 TAA Storage of symbolic information wsAcaieess eed ne eee EA Sek ee SG 303 PAZ DIOCK Paso WOl Cesc cccsscess ce pacsag aes seacrants E a oe creseen ae ascot ces agte ae sees 303
143. 50 to T255 FX3U 200 points 4 points T200 to T245 6 points T256 to T511 FX3UC Interrupt execution i Latched backed u i PLC Routine program type SPONS latched backed up l p son Pols T192 to T199 type type Variable Retentive type for 3 Retentive type for For 1 ms pulses potentiometer For 100 ms pulses For 10 ms pulses 1 ms pulses Aon ences 0 001 to 32 767 ae 0 1 to 3276 7 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec 0 001 to 32 767 p yP ae 0 1 to 3276 7 sec sec Numeric value from 0 to 255 FX3G Bue si i oe Weer 2 built i int ee T200 to T245 SPORS 6 points T256 to T319 a FX3GC 46 coins Interrupt execution ned backed 64 points Only in FX3G PLC Routine program latched backed es an PLC type T192 to T199 up type UP WEE For 100 10 ms Retentive type for vara E For 1 ms pulses Retentive type for potentiometer For 100 ms pulses pulses 0 001 to 32 767 1 ms pulses 100 ms oulses oe 0 1 to 3276 7 sec 0 1 to 3276 7 sec i 0 001 to 32 767 p yp sec 0 1 to 3276 7 sec Numeric value 0 01 to 327 67 sec sec from 0 to 255 Ea T132 to T137 See PLC TO to T62 T32 to T62 T63 to T127 interp exe citon 6 points a 4 63 points 31 points 65 points eiched Gacked Latched backed 2 built in points up type up type Timer numbers not used for timers can be used as data registers for storing numeric values 1 Retentive type timers are backed up by the battery in FX3uU FX3uc PLCs 2 Retentive type timers are backed up by th
144. 53 M 8254 M 8255 E k E Re Js k When the 1 phase 2 input or 2 phase 2 input counter C is in the down counting mode the a E 3 EDER As corresponding M8 is ON e ON Down counting operation e OFF Up counting operation a 5 A X n 166 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 3 FXoS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Applicable model FX0S FXon FXu FX2c Corresponding FXO special device SUI NO 09q _ Number and name Operation and function PLC status ulseoineg IND M 8000 RUN RUN monitor input 2 NO contact M8061 Error occurrence M 8001 RUN monitor NC contact M8000 3 M 8002 M8001 Soe Initial pulse 2S O NO contact M8002 5 oo 8 4 M 8003 M8003 NC contact cals Refer to Subsection 4 2 1 M 8004 e Remains ON while either one among M8060 M8061 y r 7 P D8004 Error occurrence M8062 M8063 M8064 M8065 M8066 and M8067 is ON M 8005 Remains ON while the battery voltage is abnormally low D8005 Battery voltage low Refer to Subsection 4 2 3 M 8006 eloeds Turns ON when abnormally low battery voltage is detected SAO VONAJEAOW R
145. 7 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 The measured value variation exceeds the limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV The deviation exceeds the limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV The integral result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 lt The PLC continues PID operation gt The PLC continues operation with each parameter set to the maximum or minimum value The derivative value exceeds the limit due to the derivative gain KD beyond the limit The derivative result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 The PID operation result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 PID output upper limit set value lt PID output lower limit set value lt The PLC transposes the output upper limit value and the output lower limit value each other and continues PID operation gt Confirm that the target setting contents are correct The PID input variation alarm set value or output variation alarm set value is abnormal Set value lt 0 lt The PLC does not output alarm and continues PID operation gt Confirm that the target setting contents are correct lt The PLC finishes auto tuning and starts PID operation gt e The deviation at the start of auto tuning was 150 or less lt Step response method gt e When auto tuning was finished the difference was 1 3 or more of The auto tuning result is
146. 8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Operation and function n Counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 6 for details SUI INO 309g 182d uiseoineq INQ Q9 jue SuoD 9 39 WM O 49 oe n 4 gt a E r iq EE EE 5 meee When M8 turns ON the corresponding eS TS F Maa counter C becomes the down counting ele Ts i 3 5 5 WOEN mode M 8218 e ON Down counting operation M 8219 e OFF Up counting operation EE EE sioug Q 5 E v B22 Cr 6 M025 ee A E ygs 5 5 High speed counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 7 for details EE EE suooun4 2yo N 5 5 M 8238 C238 When M8 turns ON the corresponding M 8239 C239 counter C becomes the down counting ee mode M 8241 e ON Down counting operation 7 7 M 8242 e OFF Up counting operation 175 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FXOS EXon FXu FX2c oTe sponding FXO special device Number and name Operation and function High speed counter Up down counter monitor Refer to Section 2 7 for details M15246 misaa ne We e250 Me We ne ne M 8255 C255 TS e
147. 9 D 8090 D 8091 D 8092 D 8093 D 8094 D 8095 D 8096 D 8097 D 8098 The PLC system occupies these devices when the sampling trace function is used in the connected A6GPP A6PHP A7PHP or personal computer 1 1 Sampling trace devices are used by peripheral equipment 181 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 a ooo EF ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc Fx3G Fx36c Fx3s_ Corresponding special device Pulse width Pulse period measurement FX3G FX3GC PLCs Refer to the FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction for details Number and name Content of register D 80741 X000 Ring counter value for rising edge P De D 8075 a ESEN EE D 8076 X000 Ring counter value for falling edge y Lee M8076 D 8077 1 6 us unit e M8080 D 8078 X000 Pulse width Pulse period y he D 8079 10 us unit ra D 8080 X001 Ring counter value for rising edge z Ls m 1 6 us unit gt D 8082 X001 Ring counter value for falling edge V ra M8077 D 8083 PARN E ii D 8084 X001 Pulse width Pulse period r a D 8085 10 us unit re D 8086 X
148. C PLCs CPU E ERROR LED FX0S FX0 F XON F XU FX2c PLCs CPU E LED The system transfers 200 ms or 100 ms as the initial value when the power is turned ON When it is necessary to execute a program which requires the scan time longer than 200 ms or 100 ms the watchdog timer time can be changed using a program Program example M8002 Watchdog timer time Initial pulse D8000 300ms If the watchdog timer time WDT instruction is not programmed the value stored in D8000 becomes valid at the END processing When a watchdog timer error occurs A watchdog timer error may occur in the following cases Add the above program near the first step and extend the watchdog timer time or shift the FROM TO instruction execution timing 1 When many special function units blocks are connected If many special function units blocks for positioning cam switch link analog etc are connected it takes more time to initialize buffer memories when the PLC becomes the RUN mode As a result the operation time becomes longer and a watchdog timer error may occur 2 When many FROM TO instructions are driven at the same time If many FROM TO instructions are executed or many buffer memories are transferred the operation time becomes longer As a result a watchdog timer error may occur 3 When many high speed counters software counters are used If many high speed counters are programmed and they count high frequency at the same
149. C status The initial value is shown on the right Unit 1 ms Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON The value overwritten by a program is valid after the END or WDT instruction was executed Refer to Subsection 4 2 2 D 8001 2 4 RERI Value converted into BCD PLC type and system o gt 26 24 version Shown Version 1 00 on the right D 8000 Watchdog timer 200 200 200 200 200 2 2K steps 4 4K steps v 8 8K steps 4 D8102 In the case of 16K steps or more 8 is written to D8002 and 16 is written to D8102 Type of the built in memory type of the RAM EEPROM and EPROM memory cassettes and ON OFF status of the write protect switch D 8002 Memory capacity Protect Memory type switch D 8003 OOH RAM memory cassette Memory type 01H EPROM cassette EEPROM memory cassette or flash memory cassette EEPROM memory cassette or flash memory cassette 10H _ Memory built in PLC D 8004 s ofe o Error M number zy 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON D 8005 alo Unit 0 1 V Battery voltage Current value of battery voltage Example 3 0V Initial value e FX2N FX2NC PLCs 3 0V Unit 0 1 V Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON D 8006 Low battery voltage detection level 199 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds
150. C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 This area is fixed to the latched backed up type The contents can be cleared by the RST and ZRST instructions 4 This area is fixed to the non latched non backed up type The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed Counter numbers not used as counters can be used as data registers to store numeric values 2 6 2 Features of counters The table below shows the features of 16 bit counters and 32 bit counters These counters can be used in accordance with the operating condition such as counting direction switching and counting range Item 16 bit counter 32 bit counter TR Up counting and down counting can be switched refer Counting direction Up counting to Subsection 2 6 3 Set value 1 to 32767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 oe vac Constant K or data register Constant K or a pair of data registers specification ae valle Does not change after counting up Changes even after counting up ring counter Output contact Latches the operation status after counting up ratones no PPer Status MUP eo UnNNO ONIS roset in down counting Reset operation When the RST instruction is executed the current value of counter is reset to 0 and the output c
151. Capacity 16000 Built in memory is in use 96000 Bytes Check Other Items Comments Capacity 0 Block 0 Block to 31 Block Points 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 File Register Capacity 0 Block 0 Block to 14 Block Points Oo Program Capacity 16000 Steps a2 53 gt lt 0 DS a Special Function Memory Capacity oO Oo 3 908 0 Blocks 5 Special Function Block Settings 8 Blocks D Positioning Instruction Settings 18 Blocks Built in CC Link LT Settings 1 Block Only applies to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 4 g Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel D S J 4 gt lt Set item Contents of setting Setting range Memory Capacity Select the program capacity Initial value 16000 5 The symbolic information capacity when the built in memory or a memory cassette Symbolic Information is used is displayed here based on the Memory Capacity value m O 7 Capacity Press the Check Other Items button to display the symbolic information capacity when a memory cassette is used Refer to Section Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC Initial value 0 6 3 Comment Capacity 50 device comments block 500 steps Set the file register capacity Initial value O File Register Capacity 500 file registers block 500 steps Program Capacity The number of steps available for sequence program is displayed here Ki os Special Function Memory Set whether the special unit initial
152. D and R Device Head device number Set the head device number of the access log save destination Range The last device number in the occupied range calculated from the head device Last device number at number and number of records is displayed Set save destination for the result of time setting Select the device type of the time setting result save destination between D Head device type nmn and R Device l Set the head device number of the time setting result save destination Head device number Range 8 points are occupied from the head device number The last device number in the occupied range calculated from the head device Last device number ot ae number is displayed 7 Click the END button to finish the setting and close the Ethernet Port Log Record Setting dialog box suojoun4 24o N Result of time setting is stored if checked 297 6 Types and Setting of Parameters 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 6 6 2 Network parameter The following network parameter can be set in parameter setting e CC Link The CC Link parameter is available in FX3U FX3uUc PLCs Ver 3 10 or later and FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Ver 2 00 or later 1 In the project view double click Parameter Network Parameter CC Link Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Connection Block Setting Contents Special Functio
153. DITION Abbreviation of FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual DATA COMMUNICATION CONTROL EDITION Abbreviation of FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U FX3uUc Series User s Manual ANALOG CONTROL EDITION Abbreviation of FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U F X3UC Series User s Manual POSITIONING CONTROL EDITION ANALOG CONTROL EDITION POSITIONING CONTROL EDITION FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 1 Devices Constructing PLC 1 Device Outline uUI INO ed1Aeq This chapter explains basic contents of devices 12 9q uiseoiieg N 1 1 Devices Constructing PLC Each PLC has many built in relays timers counters etc Each of which has many normally open contacts and normally closed contacts Connect these contacts and coils to construct a program Each PLC also has built in memory devices including data registers D and extension registers R to store numeric data Oo jUue SuOD 9 d y paljioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI jo Bumjes pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 1 Devices Constructing PLC 1 1 1 Relation among devices Auxiliary relay M The PLC has many built in auxiliary relays The symbol of auxiliary relay is M State relay S The PLC has many built in state relays The symbol of stat
154. Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Operation and function Counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 6 for details M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 When M8 turns ON the corresponding M 8217 counter C Becomes the Quin GOURUNO mode e ON Down counting operation peers e OFF Up counting operation M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 High speed counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 7 for details M 8235 C235 M 8236 C236 M 8237 C237 M 8238 C238 M 8239 C239 When M8 turns ON the corresponding M 8240 C240 counter C becomes the down counting mode e ON Down counting operation ee CAT le OFF Up counting operation M 8242 C242 M 8243 C243 M 8244 C244 M 8245 C245 Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device 5 5 5 JI REGEGE ARE K EDEEDPERRREERERRE i 5 SORE RERRERREER PE EEREREEREEEEE RCCRCERERECRCOR 44444 sty sd ss4ysqsqy sas BEE F BER F FH 5 f i me EG 4s 5 Jit T RE 4444s RRR RARE REE A J DE E 147 UlnNO 09q 9q ulseoii
155. E Data register in the area B which are specified as comment powered ON operands in instructions except BMOV DOS D1000 When the PLC 01000 indirectly specified for timers or 3 Fo File register mode is switched Data register counters or specified as devices in the z z gt from STOP to RUN RST instruction are handled in the same oe 500 points x 14 blocks A a way as general data registers and the 7000 points maximum contents of such data registers are read and written in the same way as general D7999 data registers F Q The remaining area can be used as general purpose data registers D e Difference between the BMOV instruction and other instructions The table below shows difference between the BMOV instruction and other instructions for file registers S n D1000 and later Data writing to file registers using the BMOV instruction Reads data from and writes data to the file register is not available in FXON FXU Ver 2 30 or earlier area A in the program memory PLCs Use peripheral equipment for data writing BMOV instruction Because the data register area B is provided in the system RAM inside the PLC their contents can be arbitrarily changed without regard to restriction of the optional memory type Read data from and write data to the data register area Other instructions B in the image memory in the same way as data reading from and data writing to general data registers The contents of data registers spe
156. E d M 8419 Unavailable Unavailable ef e FX3U CF ADP ch2 Refer to FX3U CF ADP User s Manual for details ieee ea a a M1422 i nn bad ee M 8423 Unavailable ez ewm e Me a A a a E T E oe i d a a A rc BE eee ae eee a M 8438 oFADe rane M 8439 ae a 4 Available in Ver 2 61 or later 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 UELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 153 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Operation and function i FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fxgs Corresponding special device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 Refer to ENET ADP Manual for details M 8400 to M 8403 Unavailable M 8404 FX3U ENET ADP unit ready peman e F M 8405 Unavailable E METE Uar E n a FX3U ENET ADP ch2 Refer to ENET ADP Manual for details M 8420 to M 8423 Unavailable 5 M 8424 FX3U ENET ADP unit ready pape E AER z M 8425 Unavailable MB eID Ural oc coe on we sees via ed ea a FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 E to ENET ADP Manual for details ess to a ee me a E E a a a is raisons mines PP lt S rer lt S M 8496 IP address storage area clear completion E za Tk M 8
157. F lE 9q uiseoiieg N9 D 8021 Input filter adjustment Refer to Subsection 4 2 9 D 6022 ee ee D 8023 EMATEA i 3 D 8024 QUU a aratate an re ee ee 18026 z 7 H D 8026 E i D 8027 Index register Z0 VO D 8028 Value of register Z za D 8029 Value of register V EA g D Variable analog potentiometer FX1S FX1N D D 8030 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog 7 i 5 potentiometer VR1 Same value as D8013 Q D 8034 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog potentiometer VR2 Constant scan soug QI D 8032 Zw D 8033 E D 8034 E 3 D 8035 Unavailable E D 8036 E i 6 007 z ygs 3 Gant cE H O ied Initial value 0 ms Unit 1 ms ng D 8039 Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON v M8039 Constant scan time Can be overwritten by a program Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 7 Q 3 a 3 es D 211 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register i g FXOS EXon FXu FX2c Corresponding FXO special device Step ladder and annunciator D 8040 1 ON state relay number 1 D 8041 1 ON state relay number 2 D 8042 D8040 stores the smallest number of active state relays and ff y Z 7 ON state
158. FX 25DU 220 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 8 Howto set real time clock The following two methods are available to set the real time clock 1 Method using the built in display module FX3Uc 32MT LT FX3uc 32MT LT 2 or FX3uU 7DM 1 Setthe cursor to ClockMenu by pressing the or key on the Menu screen and press the OK key to display the Selection screen shown on the right Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Top screen 2 Set the cursor to Clock setting by pressing the or key Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Menu screen 3 Press the OK key to display the Clock setting screen Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Selection screen 4 Change the flickering data by pressing the or key and then press the OK key to determine the displayed value The set items change in the order Year month gt day gt hour gt minute gt second When the last data second is determined by the OK key the message Current time is set appears and setting of the current time is completed Operation key Contents of operation Returns to the previous set item a Returns to the Selection screen when the year data is flicke
159. FX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Content of register Number and name SUI INO 09q Input filter Input filter value of X000 to X017 X000 to X007 in FX3G FX3GC PLC main units Initial value 10 ms D 8020 Input filter adjustment Refer to Subsection 4 2 9 8021 ei feb fa D 8022 eee hae i ES E BES ES E ul es N p02 as DE A E S 3 D 8024 Unavailable 2 ee ei 2 D 8025 jue SuoD 9 39 D 8026 Lee tae Se 018027 4 fe ee Index register Z0 VO eo D 8029 Value of the register VO V lt a Variable analog potentiometer FX3G FX3S D 8030 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog y 2 i potentiometer VR1 D 8031 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog sea i 1 D8182 to D8015 store values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 potentiometer VR2 2 This function is not supported in the FX3s 30MU EL 2AD PLC WM O 49 oe n 4 gt a E r iq eloeds sioug Q Constant scan D 8032 a Tee Eso D 8033 Ee e a Ss 6 D 8034 a vo D18035 Unavailable EREE 3 28 Eee be je aS Bo 8 oO 018037 pe ee io i D 8038 ee Initial value 0 ms Unit 1 ms D 8039 Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON 4 v v v v M8039 Constant scan time Can be overwritten by a program Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 suooun4 24o N 179 FXCPU Struct
160. For the input specifications of the FX3U 4HSX ADP refer to the FX3U hardware manual Input terminal assignment X007 rr eee eee a ag ee a a i a a E ay el a a es sw a Counter No Classification 09 09 op E g D o U D 1 ph A E ee input ae re ee n ee a a sw a 2 phase Soinio S input C253 0P sw f f Toran H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input S 1 Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters For the wiring refer to the hardware manual of the PLC main unit 2 Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set reset instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT is used C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic for external reset input is reversed For the condition under which hardware counters are handled as software counters refer to Subsection 2 7 9 3 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program used input terminals and their functions are switched For the method to use software counters as hardware counters refer to Subsection 2 7 7 4 2 phase 2 input counters usually execute 1 edge counting but can be used for 4 edge counting by combining special auxiliary relays For the method to use a 2 phase 2
161. GC 1 to 12 Displays the number of procedures registered on the Remote Device ne Or Registered Proggdurgs Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration dialog box 4 E H F H i its F e2 Click the Regist Procedure button to display the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure E i PE O Registration dialog box D o Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Target Station 1 lt 4 Input Format IDEC Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Flag Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Devic No Condition Device No Data Execute Set New v et New et New et New et New E Execute Set New O T E execute setNew o Ao S x Execute setnew fo oo Execute setnew f To Execute 5et New v yo vl mi 3 2 S nN Lay un 44 4 44 4 4 4 4 4 events senen gt gt ao os events seenen gt gt 323 events seenen gt gt BS 3 Execute setne f Sz Execute set New A A g Default Cancel i Set item Contents of setting Setting range Select the data input format and display format of Write Data when Write DEC HEX Device in Details of Execution is set to RWw i Execute Flag Select whether or not the initial setting is to be actually executed a m Select whether the initial setting operation condition is to be set anew or Set New Operational Condition ae
162. How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions This chapter explains how to specify sources and destinations in instructions which is the basis for handling PLC instructions e Specifying constants decimal hexadecimal and real numbers e Specifying digits of bit devices e Specifying bit positions in data registers e Directly specifying BFM buffer memory in special function blocks units e Indexing by adding index registers 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers FX PLCs handle five types of numeric values according to the application and purpose This section explains the roles and functions of these numeric values 3 1 1 Types of numeric values 1 Decimal number DEC e Set value constant K of timers and counters e Device numbers of auxiliary relays M timers T counters C state relays S etc e Numeric values used as operands and instruction operations in instructions constant K 2 Hexadecimal number HEX e Numeric values used as operands and instruction operations in instructions constant H 3 Binary number BIN For a timer counter or data register a numeric value is specified in the decimal or hexadecimal notation as described above But Example of decimal number input Input fr
163. LC The response speed is several tens of Hz or less usually 16 bit counter For up counting counting range 1 to 32767 2 32 bit counter For up down counting counting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 z 2 High speed counter latched type backed up against power interruption Refer to Section 2 7 High speed counters can count several kHz without regard to operations in the PLC 32 bit counter For up down counting counting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1 phase 1 counting 1 phase 2 counting or 2 phase 2 counting assigned to specific input relays 6 Data register D Refer to Section 2 8 Data registers store numeric data FX PLCs have only 16 bit data registers whose most significant bit indicates the positive or negative sign but two combined data registers can handle 32 bit numeric value whose most significant bit indicates the positive or negative sign Refer to 5 Counter for the available numeric range Data registers are classified into the general type and the latched type backed up against power interruption in the same way as other devices 15 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 1 Devices Constructing PLC 7 Extension register R and extension file register ER Refer to Section 2 9 Only FX3G FX3GC FX3uU FX3uc PLCs support extension registers R and extension file registers ER Extension registers R are extended type of data
164. LC Name Jpuc System 1 PLC System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port Print Window Print Window Preview Default End Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range Up to 32 half width or 16 Title Input the program title in up to 32 half width or 16 full width characters full width characters 286 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting the PLC system 1 The PLC System 1 tab is available only in FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Click the PLC System 1 tab and set Battery Less Mode Battery Mode MODEM Initialized and RUN Terminal Input SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 FX Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 lpuc System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port Battery Less Mode Battery Less Drive Oo MODEM Initialized None z OUD z o oO 3 lt 0 05o RUN Terminal Input DD None v ROG r DE 4 W O O v J lt O 4 Print Window Print Window Preview Default End Cancel S O S wn Set item Contents of setting Setting range Select this item to operate the PLC without using the battery Battery Less Mode When the check box is checked the PLC automatically turns OFF the battery error indicator lamp an
165. List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s Corresponding special device Analog special adapter FX3U FX3UC Refer to Subsection 4 2 18 for the applicability of each analog special adapter D 8260 to D 8269 1st special adapter Le ee ee D 8270 to D 8279 2nd special adapter EAR IRARARa i D 8280 to D 8289 3rd special adapter eee ti Bo Number and name Content of register D 8290 to D 8299 4th special adapter ye Analog Special Adapter FX3G FX3GC FX3S Analog Expansion Board FX3G FX3S Refer to Subsection 4 2 17 for applicability of each analog special adapter and analog expansion board T a T Ses Built in analog function FX3S 30ML1 EL 2AD Refer to FX3S Hardware Edition for details D 8270 Ch1 analog input data 0 to 1020 D 8271 Ch2 analog input data 0 to 1020 D 8272 D18273 Unavailable EE D 8274 Averaging time for ch1 1 to 4095 y D 8275 Averaging time for ch2 1 to 4095 yor D 8276 D18277 Unavailable Error status b0 Ch1 upper over scale detection b1 Ch2 upper over scale detection D 8278 b2 Not used b3 Not used b4 EEPROM error b5 Averaging time setting error common ch1 and ch2 b6 to b15 Not used D 8279 Model code K5 1 Count the number of connected analog special adapter from the main unit 2 Available in Ver 1 20 or later 3 Expansion board connected t
166. M8002 Initial pulse S500 S4095 State relay T246 T255 Timer c100 1 4 16 bit counter C199 C220 4 32 bit counter C255 D200 1 Data register D7999 RO R32767 1 The device number shows a value when the initial latched area is set If the latched area is changed change the device number accordingly 5 Caution on using communication setting devices D8120 D8121 and D8129 Special data registers D8120 communication format D8121 station number setting and D8129 timeout check time are backed up against power interruption When using the batteryless operation function reset these devices once in the same way as the above example and then transfer set values using a program The communication conditions can be set in the parameter setting When the communication conditions are set in the parameter setting the PLC transfers the parameter values to the above special data registers before starting operation Accordingly it is recommended to set the communication conditions in the parameter setting 229 SUI NO 09q l 9q ulseoiieg INQ Oo jue sSuoD 9 309 WM O 49 oe n 4 gt a E r iq eloeds sioug Q sIo OWeed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and l
167. N mode 2 Flag operation timing RUN input RUN STOP M8000 ON RUN monitor NO contact M8001 ON RUN monitor NC contact 1 scan time M8002 ON Initial pulse NO contact M8003 ON Initial pulse NC contact 2 Initial pulse M8002 and M8003 The initial pulse M8002 and M8003 remains ON or OFF instantaneously only for 1 scan time when the PLC starts operation Use the initial pulse as the initial setting signal in a program for initializing the program or writing specified values 1 Program example M8002 Latched backed up type data registers D200 to D209 D200 are cleared D299 M8003 remains OFF instantaneously only for 1 scan time after the PLC becomes the RUN mode Initial pulse NO contact 2 Flag operation timing RUN input RUN STOP M8000 ON RUN monitor NO contact M8001 ON RUN monitor NC contact 1 scan time M8002 ON Initial pulse NO contact M8003 ON Initial pulse NC contact 216 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 2 Watchdog timer time D8000 4 2 3 The watchdog timer monitors the operation time of the PLC If the PLC does not finish operation within the specified time it turns ON the following LED and turns OFF all outputs FX3S FX3G F X3GC FX3U FX3uc PLCs ERROR ERR LED FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2N
168. ODEM This parameter automatically sends a specified AT command as the initialization command to a PLC System 1 Initialized modem connected to the serial port Latch range setting S O S wn Device Battery Less Mode o Os This parameter specifies the input number of the RUN input described above in the range from X000 aS D i ie RUN Terminal to X017 Tha wn Input In main units whose number of input points is 16 or less the input number can be set for available number of input points This parameter corresponds to the following settings by specifying each contents on the personal Serial port computer screen PLC System 2 operation Setting of the communication format D8120 setting Setting of the station number D8121 Setting of the timeout check D8129 This parameter sets protection to prevent erroneous reading and incorrect writing of a sequence Others never program The 8 digit keyword can be specified in alphanumeric characters A to F and 0 to 9 Program title This parameter enables to set a character string to be used as the program title suooun4 2yo N 271 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 1 Parameter List 3 FXoS FX0 FXon FXuU FX2c PLCs Classification tem Description Memory Capacity Device Others This parameter specifies the maximum value for the number of steps to which a sequence program ca
169. OFF status just before power interruption is required for restart use latched eyeing O CS backed up type state relays X001 SET EN ENO d S21 STL EN ENO S21 s Clamping Cyo01 S21 process Clamping o X002 SET EN ENO d 22 STL EN ENO S2 S Ming up Yo02 S22 process Upper limit o X003 SET EN ENO d State relays have many normally open contacts and normally closed contacts in the same way as auxiliary relays and these contacts can be used arbitrarily in sequence programs When state relays S are not used for step ladder instructions they can be used in general sequences in the same way as auxiliary relays M as shown in the right figure 46 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 4 State Relay S 2 Latched backed up type e Latched backed up type state relays store their ON OFF status even if the power is shut down while the PLC is operating so the operation can be restarted after shutdown from the previous last point in the process Latched backed up type state relays are backed up by a battery EEPROM etc built in the PLC For details on each backup method refer to Section 1 2 gJ D O D O D e When using latched backed up type state relays as general type state relays provide a reset circuit shown in the right figure around the head step in the program Initial pulse M8002 Ul S2913 S1000 to S1200 are initiali
170. OP 10kHz 200kHz 1 phase 2 counting input C246 C248 C246 C248 0P 100kHz 1 edge counting SOKHZ 100kHz 2 phase 2 counting input C251 C253 4 4 edge counting counting M 100kHz 2 In FX2N FX2Nc PLCs Maximum response frequency Counter No Main unit 1 phase 1 counting input 60kHz 1 phase 2 counting input 60kHz 2 phase 2 counting input 30kHz 2 Response frequency and total frequency of software counters The tables below show the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters When the DHSZ or DHSCT instruction is used in a program both the maximum response frequency and the total frequency are restricted for all software counters without regard to operands of the instruction While examining a system or creating a program consider the restrictions and use software counters within the allowable range of maximum response frequency and total frequency For conditions under which hardware counters are handled as software counters refer to the previous page 1 In FX3u FX3uc PLCs e When special analog adapters and FX3U 3UC Series special function blocks units are not connected Counter type Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used When DHSZ and When both DHSZ and DHSCT instructions SUE any Hake Aad eu Unid DHSCT instructions instruction is used instruction is used are not used are used Following software counter Software combined with Magnification
171. Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 2 Special data register D8260 to D8279 e FX3S FX3G PLC Operation and function FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD 1st analog expansion board D 8260 Output data D 8261 Input data Ch2 Not used D 8262 Not used Not used D 8263 Not used Not used Number of averaging times SUI NO 09q _ Number 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 D 8264 for Ch1 1 to 4095 Nol usog Number of averaging times 9 9205 for Ch2 1 to a Notusee 3 peas Notus Notuses Fe D 8268 Error status D 8269 Model code K4 2nd analog expansion board D 8270 Input data Ch1 Output data D8271 Input data Ch2 Not used 3 08272 Notused Not used D8273 Notus Not used 5 lt O 49 Number of averaging times D 8274 for Ch1 1 to 4095 Douso Number of averaging times D 8275 for Ch2 1 to 4095 Poru ee 5 Deze Nouse Not use Dezr7 Nouse Not use i D 8279 Model code K3 Model code K4 1 Inthe case of FX3G PLC versions 1 10 or later are applicable 6 2 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected ee lt aks D B23 wn Q D a a S z 235 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 19 Analog specia
172. Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 1 Y002 is not set in FX3G PLC 14 point and 24 point type and FX3Gc PLC 2 Note that this item can only be set if two high speed output special adapter adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC 3 This area can be set only in FX3U FX3uc PLCs Setting the Ethernet port The Ethernet port setting function is available in FX3u FX3uc PLCs Ver 3 10 or later and FX3s FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Ver 2 00 or later 1 Click the Ethernet Port tab FX Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port Channel z IP Address Setting Open Setti pen Setting Input Format Time Setting IP Address Log Record Setting Subnet Mask Pattern Default Router IP Address Optional Settings Default changed Communication Data Code Binary Code ASCII Code Disable direct connection to MELSOFT Do not respond to search for CPU on network Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range Select whether or not the Ethernet port is connected When it is Channel None CH1 CH2 connected specify the channel connected to the Ethernet port Select the input format and display format used to set the IP Input Format DEC HEX address subnet mask pattern and default router IP address 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Decimal
173. RO respectively Command input Eee The current value is initialized to FFFFH in each of RO to R4095 and ERO to ER4095 109 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 Initialization using GX Works2 Select Online Clear PLC memory in GX Works2 and clear Data device Note that this operation initializes the contents of timers counters data registers file registers and extension registers 3 Allowable number of times of writing data to the program memory Pay attention to the following points when accessing extension file registers In the case of FX3U FX3uc PLCs The allowable number of times of writing is 10 000 or less in a memory cassette flash memory Every time the INITR RWER or INITER instruction is executed each execution is counted as one time of writing Make sure that the allowable number of times of writing is not exceeded When a continuous execution type instruction is used data is written to the memory in each operation cycle of the PLC For preventing this make sure to use a pulse execution type instruction Even if the LOADR SAVER or LOGR instruction is executed each execution is not counted as one time of writing However it is necessary to initialize sectors to be written in advance before executing the SAVER or LOGR instruction When initializing registers using the INITR or INITER instructio
174. S8OIAEq The table below shows index register V and Z numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal When only V or Z is specified it is handled as VO or ZO respectively 1 FX3sS FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3uc PLCs OO Index type ODD FX3U FX3UC 2 8 VO V to V7 Z0 Z to Z7 so ss FX3G FX3GC me 3 2B FX3S PLCs 1O pomig z 1 The characteristics about latch backup against power interruption cannot be changed by parameters 4 W 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2Nc PLCs E zi Index type T V0 V to V7 ZO Z to Z7 S FX1S PLCs es 16 points FX1N FX1NC VO V to V7 ZO Z to Z7 5 PLCs 16 points i FX2N FX2NC V0 V to V7 ZO Z to Z7 2 PLCs 16 points 1 The characteristics about latch backup against power interruption cannot be changed by parameters 6 3 FX0S FX0 FXON FXu FX2c PLCs vp REES Index type E 2 gt 05 FXOS FXO ga PLCs V Z FXON PLCs Senne FXU FX2C i 7 PLCs Q 1 The characteristics about latch backup against power interruption cannot be changed by 5 parameters a 2 115 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 10 Index Register V and Z 2 10 2 Functions and structures 2 10 3 1 16 bit type 32 bit type Make sure to use Z0 to Z7 when indexing a device used in a 32 bit applied instruction or handling a numeric value beyond the 16 bit range This is because FX PLCs handle Z as the low order side of a 32 bit Kk 82 bit type 4s register as s
175. Sters ccccccsecceccceseeeecceeseeeecseeseeeeseueasecsssaeeeeseesseeeeeeas 94 2 8 2 Structure of data registers and file reGiSters ccccececceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeas 96 2 8 3 Functions and operation examples of data reGisSters ccccccccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaees 96 2 8 4 Functions and operation examples of file registers ccc cccccceecccceeeceeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeessaneeesanes 99 2 8 5 Cautions on USING file registers si soto Sass ee a ee 103 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER ccscccsseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneseeees 104 2 9 1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 104 2 9 2 Data storage destination and ACCESS method cc eeccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 104 2 9 3 Structure of extension registers and extension file registers ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 105 2 9 4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers cccceceecesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 105 2 9 5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers cceeccceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 106 2 9 6 Functions and operation examples of extension file reGiSters ccccceccccsececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 107 2 9 7 Cautions on using extension file registers
176. Transfer KO or k10 to the index registers V4 and Z4 in advance When X003 is set to ON and if V4 and Z4 are 0 K69000 is transferred to C235 C 235 0 C235 When X003 is set to ON and if V4 and Z4 are 10 K69000 is transferred to C245 C 235 10 C245 9 39 jUue SUOD y paijioeds aoinag eads Aa Cautions soug QI 1 Even if a numeric value written to index registers does not exceed the 16 bit numeric range 0 to 32767 make sure to overwrite both V and Z using a 32 bit instruction If only Z is overwritten and another numeric value remains in V the resulting numeric value will be extremely large and an operation error will occur 6 2 Itis not allowed to index 16 bit counters and use them as 32 bit counters VHS When 32 bit counters are required as the result of indexing add Z0 to Z7 to counters C200 and later 253 3 It is not allowed to index V and Z themselves 2 4 Direct specification of buffer memory in special function blocks units In the direct specification of buffer memory UO GO the buffer memory number can be indexed with index registers T The unit number cannot be indexed with index registers Q U0 G0ZO is valid but UOZO GO is invalid D 5 Indexing in bit digit specification 3 It is not allowed to index n in Kn used for digit specification c K4MOZ0 is valid but KOZOMO is invalid 6 Indexing in I O relays octal device numbers When the octal device number of X Y K
177. UlNO 09q M 8261 Not used Input sensor selection 2 M 8262 Not used Not used Not used gg M 8263 Not used Not used Not used 5 S M 8264 Not used Not used Not used M 8265 Not used Not used Not used M 8266 Not used Not used Not used M 8267 Not used Not used Not used 3 M 8268 Not used Not used Not used 2nd analog special adapter M 8270 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8271 Not used Type K J switching Input sensor selection QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D M 8272 Not used Not used Not used M 8273 Not used Not used Not used M 8276 Not used Not used Not used 5 M 8277 Not used Not used Not used 8 3rd analog special adapter soug QI M 8280 Temperature unit selection M 8281 Not used Input sensor selection M 8282 Not used Not used Not used M 8283 Not used Not used Not used M 8284 Not used Not used Not used 6 M 8285 Not used Not used Not used ee M 8286 Not used Not used Not used 8 M 8287 Not used Not used Not used aS z 4th analog special adapter 7 M 8290 Temperature unit selection M 8291 Not used Input sensor selection M 8292 Not used Not used Not used gt M 8293 Not used Not used Not used 3 M 8294 Not used Not used Not used S M 8295 Not used Not used Not used M 8296 Not used Not used Not used M 8297 Not used Not used Not used M8289 Not used 1 In the case of FX3uc PLC versions 1 30 or later are applicable 237 FXCPU Structured
178. Value converted into BCD Device number 1 Input X 0 Output Y D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware code Error code for PLC PP communication error D 8062 Error code for serial communication error O ch0 ik peos poss ppoe D 8067 Error code for operation error D 8068 Latched step number where operation error has occurred D 8069 Step number where M8065 to M8067 error has occurred 3 10 to 337 in FX3u FX3uc PLCs 10 to 177 in FX3G FX3Gc PLCs 4 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON 5 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 6 D8313 and D8312 store the step number when there are 32K steps or more M8060 D 8060 fo M8061 M8062 M8062 M8063 M8064 M8065 M8066 M8067 M8068 M8065 to M8067 7 D8315 and D8314 store the step number when there are 32K steps or more 180 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Parallel link Refer to the data communication manual for details pve 7 D 8071 D 8072 Unavailable D 8073 Number and name Content of register Sampling trace D 8074 D 8075 D 8076 D 8077 D 8078 D 8079 D 8080 D 8081 D 8082 D 8083 D 8084 D 8085 D 8086 D 8087 D 8088 D 808
179. X0 FXoN FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU FX2c FX2N FX2NC FX3s FX3G FX3Gc PLCs do not support the delay function of input interrupt pointers Specify the delay time using the following pattern program This delay function can electrically adjust the mounting position of sensors used for input interrupts without shifting the actual position 1 9q Ul S9149 OO Interrupt program Soe Event IOOC BS 9 l e Delay time specifying program 3 98 ae ee Make sure to describe the delay time specifying z program shown on the left at the head of an interrupt routing program 4 Because this is a pattern program change only hi l a the delay time 1 5 HEEE T 1 Delay time unit ms TENEN 4 Only a constant K or data register D can be S Program to be processed by input interrupt used to specify the delay time g Operation siouy QI e Interrupts are usually disabled in the PLC If interrupts are enabled by the El instruction when X000 or X001 turns ON Main program interniphenebied while the program is scanned the PLC 6 range executes the interrupt routine 1 or 2 ie and then returns to the main program by 82 the IRET instruction ake The IRET instruction is automatically gt a added during compiling l Interrupt program Event 1001 Rising edge of X000 is detected a Interrupt routine 1 en Interrupt program Event 1101 2_ Rising edge of X001 is detected R Interrupt routi
180. able M 8041 Enables transfer from the initial state during automatic y z y P P _ Transfer start operation Li eae i i i v vA va vA va Start pulse Gives pulse output in response to start input M 8043 Zero point return Should be set to ON in the zero return mode end state 4 complete M 80441 Should be set to ON when the machine zero point is e i Zero point condition detected M 8045 Disables reset of all outputs when the operation mode 2 2 2 i All output reset disable switches M 8046 2 Remains ON while M8047 is ON and either one among SO M8047 STL state ON to S899 and S1000 to 4095 is ON 2 AROR Enables M8040 to D8047 D8040 to D8047 STL monitoring enable M 8048 2 Remains ON while M8049 is ON and either one among r r i Annunciator ON S900 to S999 is ON M 8049 D8049 Enables D8049 v V v v 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 2 Activated when the END instruction is executed 3 1000 to 4095 are available only in the FX3s FX3G FX3GcC FX3uU or FX3UC PLCs Number and name Operation and function SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM oO oO 53 lt 0 n oo a8 3 ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q Interrupt disable the interrupt program is paused until the El instruction enables interrupts 600 disable M 8057 Timer interrupt I7 di
181. act Does not change while M8033 is ON Counting coil 7 Reset coil C Latched backed up type Does not change High speed type Does not change 1 Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN soug QI M8074 is backed up against power interruption 6 2 The device status is not held correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding SeS voltage aS 2 FXu FX2c PLCs 2 Q 31 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 1 2 3 Types of backup methods against power interruption There are following types of latch backup of the program memory and built in devices in PLCs 1 Battery backup method F XuU FX2cC FX2N FX2NC F X3G FX3GcC FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Item Latched backed up contents Maintenance Cautions FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Item Latched backed up contents Maintenance Cautions Description A battery backs up the built in RAM memory latched type devices and clock data Periodical replacement is required For rough guide to the replacement frequency refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC 1 When the battery voltage becomes low sequence programs and other latched backed up contents are lost 2 When an optional memory cassette flash memory is attached it is not necessary to back up sequence programs using the battery in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Flash memory backup method
182. aepo esentate S D 8135 Number of target pulses for speed pattern n L a e A AEA RE D 8137 Output pulse DAE ee ee a E Dae ee pera re ee oe om Pa 1 ieTet 3 peT Ee DET E E peT ee e pa ee eee ee Deve aa ee ee T Lan ee ee ee ee Unavailable Pea Se Peis Ls 2 2 D 8150 EMETA DIETS E E 18752 E 916753 pr pists ae ee ee i OT ee oe Oar e ee oe opr ee a ae Dae eet Ou ee 1 Available in Ver 3 07 or later 215 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 a ooo EF ow r gt D eloeds soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later This section explains how to use special devices provided to activate functions built in the PLC 4 2 1 RUN monitor and initial pulse M8000 to M8003 1 RUN monitor M8000 and M8001 Use the RUN monitor M8000 and M8001 which indicates the PLC operation status to drive instructions and give external display normally operating 1 Program example M8000 Yo00 Normally operating RUN monitor NO contact Always ON while the PLC Output to be always driven is in the RUN mode M8001 is always OFF while the PLC is in the RU
183. al supplied with product or additional Manual 1 Special unit block This manual explains details of each special unit block Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN 1 Detailed explanation may be provided by a separate manual in some products FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Related Manuals Related Manuals This manual explains devices and parameters for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Refer to other manuals for sequence instructions and applied functions This chapter introduces only reference manuals for this manual and manuals which describe the hardware information of PLC main units Manuals not introduced here may be required in some applications Refer to the manual of the used PLC main unit and manuals supplied together with used products Contact the representative for acquiring required manuals Common among FX PLCs structured Manual name Manual number Puppledwith product Contents Mode or Additional Manual name code MELSEC Q L F Structured SH 080782 Additional Manual Programming methods specifications functions 13JW06 Programming Manual Fundamentals etc required to create structured programs FXCPU Structured Programming B Devices parameters etc provided in structured Manual Device amp Common REOR pdamonayManual projects of GX Works2 ORS FXCPU Structured Programming ni Sequence instru
184. all a when the operation mode i All output reset disable a M 8046 2 Remains ON while M8047 is ON and either one among S0 to M8047 STL state ON S899 is ON 2 er at Enables D8040 to D8047 A y D8040 to D8047 STL monitoring enable M 8048 2 Remains ON while M8049 is ON and either one among S900 P J f Annunciator ON to S999 is ON M 8049 D8049 Enables D8049 v V 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 2 Activated when the END instruction is executed Number and name Operation and function 170 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Applicable model FXOS EXON FXu FXoc Corresponding FXO special device Number and name Operation and function O D O D O D Interrupt disable and pulse catch M 8050 2 Input interrupt v V V v sr I00O disable 5 S M 8051 P Input interrupt v V v Vv 5 1100 disable M 8052 When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer Input interrupt interrupt is ON o l f y v 3 1200 disable Even if an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while oun acceptance of the corresponding interrupt is disabled the SL M 8053 interrup
185. alues real numbers scientific notation are also used for monitoring binary floating point values FXos FX0 FXoN FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU FX2c PLCs do not support floating point operations 124 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers 3 1 2 Conversion of numeric values Numeric values handled in FX PLCs can be converted as shown in the table below Decimal number Octal number Hexadecimal number BCD SUI INC 09q 0000 0001 0000 0001 0000 1000 0000 1000 o 0000 1111 0001 0101 0001 0000 a 0110 0110 0011 a 1001 O UU omy oO q ep 2 Oo CO NI Gay By Wy N gt O jUue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoinag eads Aa a0 sioug Ca Major applications Decimal number Octalnumber number Hexadecimal number Binary number number BCD Constants K and 2 numbers of internal Numbers of internal input poe agita Swiicnes ane 6 Constants H Processing inside PLC seven segment display devices except input relays and output relays anie E relays and output relays a3 Z2 p E 3 1 3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations Handling of numeric values in floating point operations l i a Q Binary integers are handled inside PLCs 3 In division of integers the answer 40 3 13 1 is obtained for example T In squi
186. ample RO is specified the subsequent number on the high order side Example R1 is automatically occupied 6 Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low order side but it is recommended to mer specify an even device number for the low order side under consideration of the monitoring function of a ZS display units display modules and programming tools 2S w 2 9 4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers The contents of extension registers are backed up by the battery even when the power is turned OFF or when y the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN if the PLC is the FX3U FX3UC Series or the FX3G FX3GC Series if extension registers are changed to the latched backed up type and an optional battery is attached a For initializing extension registers execute the data clear operation using a PLC program or GX Works2 3 gt 1 Initialization using a program e When initializing some extension registers R Example When initializing clearing RO to R199 Command e When initializing extension registers and extension file registers in units of sector Sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers in FX3G FX3GC PLCs Example When initializing RO to R4095 and ERO to ER4095 initializing two sectors starting from RO and ERO respectively Command INITRP ENO 105 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extensi
187. ams Accordingly assign input relay numbers having input filter for applications requiring high speed receiving Refer to explanation of filter adjustment input interrupt high speed counter and various instructions Oo 2 Auxiliary relay M Sos Refer to Section 2 3 PF e Auxiliary relays are built in the PLC Different from input relays and output relays auxiliary relays cannot j receive external inputs or cannot drive external loads directly Auxiliary relays are available only in programs 4 e In some auxiliary relays the ON OFF status is backed up against interruption of the PLC power 3 State relay S 5 Refer to Section 2 4 y e State relays are used as process numbers in the step ladder e If state relays are not used as process numbers they can be programmed as general contacts coils in the same way as auxiliary relays sioug Q e State relays can be used as annunciators for external failure diagnosis 4 Timer T Refer to Section 2 5 e Timers count clock pulses 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms etc inside the PLC 6 When the count value reaches the set value output contacts are activated vo Timers can measure 0 001 to 3276 7 seconds in accordance with the base clock pulse S p 5 Counter C goa Counters are classified into the following types and can be used for suitable purposes and applications 1 Counter latched type 7 Refer to Section 2 6 Counters are used for signals inside the P
188. anch type Input interrupt type Branch type END jump type een PO to P62 P64 to P2047 2047 points Branch type Input interrupt type Branch ype END jump type Hii PO to P62 P64 to P255 255 points P63 1 point P63 1 point P63 1 point 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Series Branch type Input interrupt type Mimer mterrupt Counter interrupt type END jump type type FX1S PLCs FX1N FX1NC PLCs FX2N FX2NC PLCs PO to P62 63 points PO to P62 P64 to P127 127 points PO to P62 P64 to P127 127 points P63 1 point P63 1 point P63 1 point looU 1100 I20U looU 1100 I20U looU 110 I20U looU 110 I20U looU 10 I20U looU 10 I20U X000 1300 X001 1400 X002 I50L 6 points X000 1300 X001 1400 X002 I50L 6 points X000 1300 X001 1400 X002 I50L 6 points X000 I30L X001 140L1 X002 I50L 6 points X000 I30L X001 140L1 X002 I50L 6 points X000 I30L X001 140L X002 I50L 6 points I6 I7 I8 3 points Timer interrupt type l6LJ IZU IBL 3 points Timer interrupt type I6 Lll IZU I8LJ 3 points l6LI IZLI I8LJ 3 points Counter interrupt type 1010 1040 1020 1050 1030 1060 6 points 1010 1040 1020 1050 1030 1060 6 points 117 gJ D O D
189. and are combined with the step ladder instruction STL 2 4 1 Numbers of state relays The table below shows state relay S numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal 1 FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc PLCs a Latched battery Fixed latched battery Initial state type General type eE pakedo Doe Annunciator type SO to S499 FX3U FX3UC S0 to S9 500 points S500 to S899 S1000 to 854095 S900 to S999 PLC 10 points SO to S9 are provided 400 points 2 3096 points 100 points 2 for the initial state Initial state EEPROM Latched EEPROM Annunciator EEPROM Cenere backed up type backed up type backed up type yP FX3G FX3GC SO to S9 S10 to S899 S900 to S999 S1000 to 84095 PLC 10 points 890 points 100 points 3096 points Initial state EEPROM Fixed latched EEPROM Pen Tree backed up type backed up type yP SO to S9 S10 to S127 S128 to 8255 BAS PEE 10 points 118 points 128 points 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed using parameters 4 They can be changed to the latched battery backed up type using parameters while an optional battery is attached However the latched area cannot be set 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Latched battery Fixed latched backed up typ
190. and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Applicable model FX3U Fx3uc FX3G Fx3cc Fx3s Corresponding special device Operation and function Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details M 8060 I O configuration error Pee eae ae D8060 M 8061 PLC hardware error D8061 PLC PP communication error i y z D8062 M18062 e ee Serial communication error 0 chO 2 a fp eee TRA D8062 M 8063 2 3 Serial communication error 1 ch1 V D8063 064 p64 D8065 M 8065 Syntax error v v v v v se D8315 D8066 M 8066 Circuit error Z 7 r 7 J ant D8315 D8067 M 8067 4 Operation error v v 4 v 4 Hi D8315 D8068 M 8068 Operation error latch v v v v v D8312 D8313 1 It truns on only when a memory access error 6230 occurs in FX3S FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 2 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON 3 M8438 notifies a serial communication error 2 ch2 4 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 5 The PLC executes the I O bus check when M8069 is set to ON For details refer to Chapter 5 Parallel link M 8070 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the master station M 8071 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the slave station M 8072 Parallel link Remains ON during operation M 8073 Parallel link Turns ON when M8070 or M8071 is set P i incorrectly 6 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Sampling Trace FX
191. apping 4 vl vl D 8477 Upper D 8478 Lower e MODBUS Device Mapping 5 vi a D 8479 Upper D 8480 Lower g MODBUS Device Mapping 6 vi a D 8481 Upper D 8482 Lower g MODBUS Device Mapping 7 vl z D 8483 Upper D 8484 Lower g MODBUS Device Mapping 8 i T D 8485 Upper Available in Ver 2 40 or later SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM oO oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ao r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2yo N 195 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device FX3U CF ADP ch1 Refer to FX3U CF ADP User s Manual for details Step number of executing CF ADP instruction DREO ua os ce E a E oor See a D18407 a oso CFP verson a a Oe a PROE RATS nied ke ce C E D 8414 ieee ee hey I a ee D 8415 A tt D 8416 D18417 aa A D18418 Error code for CF ADP instructions AJ vt gt D18419 Operation mode display tt tT o o S FX3U CF ADP ch2 Refer to FX3U CF ADP User s Manual for details Step number of executing CF ADP instruction D 8423 D 8424 to D 8425 Unavailable ee E E D 8427 Unavailable D 8429 to D 8433 Unavailable Number and
192. are counters refer to Subsection 2 7 9 72 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 6 In FXu FX2c PLCs Input terminal assignment eer aon X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 C235 w ut sw fw wf w f oa o y ees f w y y f a ea w ofr f f C245 S W U D S w pojo T et a ee ewe 2 counting Sav o o i El il SlCr ii SAV ae O O o eS O w d d S A H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input U U 7 In FXos FX0 FXoN PLCs Input terminal assignment w m Counter No Classification o eoa ow aea H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input 73 SUI NO 09q 3 jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds a0inaq eloeds Aa siouy QI SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suooun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 3 Handling of high speed counters 1 1 phase 1 counting input X010 M8235 Down counting or up counting X011 RST EN ENO d CC235 8244 8244 Down count
193. arks Input 8 characters Available characters are A to F and 0 Keyword Protection 8 digits to 9 Input 16 characters Available characters are A to F and 0 When the customer keyword is set 16 characters are available for it to Oo Keyword Protection 16 digits 1 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 2 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 61 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 3 Click the Execute button to verify the keywords input by the user through collation with the keywords registered in the PLC e When the keywords input by the user are verified the PLC executes Write to PLC e When the keywords input by the user are not verified the PLC does not execute Write to PLC Cancelling the keywords 1 Select Online Password Keyword Delete to open the Keyword Delete dialog box 2 Input the keyword protection 8 digits keyword protection 16 digits currently registered in the PLC Keyword Delete Keyword Close When using an 8 digit keyword please input the First 6 digits only Set item Contents of setting Remarks Keyword Protection Input 8 characters Available characters 8 digits are A to F and 0 to 9 Input 16 characters Available characters It is not possible to cancel the keywords using the customer are A to F and 0 to 9 keyword Keyword Protection 16 digits 3 Click the Execut
194. ase counters and 2 phase counters together Calculation example USE EAD JECT Input output Magnification for calculating frequency total C235 1 phase Software counter TKHz Total frequency 5 kHz Sum of processing frequency 1 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz Sum of processing frequency 4 kHz lt Total frequency 5 kHz 8 In FXos PLCs Counter type Magnification for Maximum Total frequency Software Calculating total response kHz counter frequency frequency kHz 1 phase C235 to C238 1 counting C241 to C242 input C244 Pte C246 to C247 7 Cores COAG input ere C251 to C252 PUNNI 16254 input ieedinahtepeedicountenhic Input output Magnification for calculating frequency total ube Total frequency 14 kHz Sum of processing frequency 3 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 10 kHz Sum of processing frequency 10 kHz lt Total frequency 14 kHz Calculated value 1kHz 3kHz Calculated value 3kHz 3kHz 4kHz 91 O D O D O D 9q Ul S9149 OO jue SUOD 9 qd y paijioeds a0inaq eloeds Aa sioug Q sIa OWeled jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 11 Cautions on use 1 2 For a contact to drive the coil of a high speed counter use a contact which is normally ON during high speed counting Example M8000 RUN monitor x Input number corr
195. atched backed up type cceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 33 1 2 5 How to initialize latched backed up type GEVICES eee cececeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeessaeeeeessaeeas 33 2 Devices in Detail 35 2 1 DEVICE NUMBER LIS oaia aa NA A O a eee ee eA 35 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y iiaiai naaa aaa aaa aaa aaae iaaa NETen BANER 37 2 2 1 Numbers of input output relayS cccccccsecccceescecsseecceeeeeseeeeeeseeeesseaeeeseeeeessaeeesseaeeessaeeeteseeeessaes 37 22 2 UNCHOMS ANG TOES aa a a a Roce patiednaunae se 39 22 9 Operation timing Of VOTelayS keciren a aah ele oe ath ete be Be RI oa 40 2 3 Auxiliary relay M cnr a a r aa a a N 41 29t N mbersorauxiliary TelayS vorenn E a aan Silaat eins ocala alee 41 2 3 2 Functions and operation EXAMPIES ccccccccsececeececsececsececsececsucecsueecsuceesaeessuseseueeesaeeesaeeneneeness 42 24A State Relay S ana a 44 24 1 Nu umbers Of state Tl Seo shenstecs sactesderenas a a e e a a a anete 44 2 4 2 Functions and operation CxaMples ccccccccsececseecceeecseseceuceceueeceueeceusesseessaceseueeesaeeesaeessaeeess 46 29 TImMer UU honn cies ceeatasaseneaeewsaeas a a N dees 48 29 1 NumDErs OUMES oriee e a Sagi te taeeeoueeeee 48 2 5 2 Functions and operation CxXAMples cccccscccsscecseeccseeceeeeceucecsuseseuseseueessaeecsueeceneeesaeeeseeessiaeeess 50 2 5 3 Set value specification method s nssnennsnennnsnnnnnnnnrnnrnerrennrrnsrrrse
196. ater 4 2 11 Built in analog variable potentiometers D8030 D8031 D8013 e Program for built in analog variable potentiometers Program values for built in analog variable potentiometers are stored in the following special data registers as numeric data within the range from 0 to 255 in accordance with the scale position Values received as numeric values can be specified as the indirectly specified value for a timer to provide variable potentiometer type analog timers Special data registers FX1S FX1N FX3S FX3G PLC e FX0S FXO PLC FXON PLC VR1 D8030 D8013 VR1 D8013 D8030 VR2 D8031 VR2 D8031 Example of basic circuit Example of applied circuit M8000 X003 RUN monitor Ai DO Value of D8031 VR2 x 2 0 to 25 5 sec Transferred to D1 DO Data register which stores an analog variable potentiometer value integer in range from 0 to 255 gt xo to 51 sec The set value range can be changed to 32 767 maximum by multiplying the contents of the data register by n Do not use D1 in other programs 1 FX3s 30MU EL 2AD are not applicable to built in analog variable potentiometers 230 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 12 Clear command M8031 and M8032 For all devices image memory in the PLC the non
197. ation O lt The PLC finishes auto tuning KP 32767 and starts PID operation gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set the input filter constant a to a smaller value or set the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning to a smaller value and then check whether the situation is improved lt Limit cycle method gt 6758 The auto tuning result exceeds the integral time T Outside the range from 0 to 32767 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 lt Limit cycle method gt 6759 The auto tuning result exceeds the derivative time TD Outside the range from 0 to 32767 Oo 6760 Sum check error in the ABS data sent from the servo Check the connection to the servo and parameter setting oun oma se 5 lt 49 6762 me pori SpocINga van ere meet Confirm that the port is not specified by another instruction a 8 instruction is already used in another communication 3 g2 1 Confirm that the input X specified in the DSZR DVIT or ZRN j The input X specified in the DSZR DVIT or instruction is not used for the following purposes as Input interrupt including the delay function ZRN instruction is already used in another i D High speed counter C235 to C255 4 6763 communication bit Pulse catch relay M8170 to M8177 The interrupt signal device in the DVIT instruction i n is outs
198. autions on use 1 Use timers T192 to T199 in subroutines and interrupt routines These timers execute counting when a coil instruction or END instruction is executed Once the count value of such a timer has reached the set value the timer output contact turns ON when a coil instruction or END instruction is executed Because general type timers execute counting only when a coil instruction is executed refer to 2 5 5 Details of timer operations and timer accuracy below they do not operate normally if they are used in subroutines or interrupt routines in which a coil instruction is executed only in a certain condition 2 Ifa retentive type timer for 1 ms pulses is used in a subroutine or interrupt routine its output contact turns ON when the first coil instruction is executed after its count value has reached the set value 3 For writing the symbolic information and changing the set values of timers and counters using a peripheral equipment it is recommended to create programs with the set values specified indirectly If the set values are specified directly programs cannot be restored from the symbolic information after the set values are changed 2 5 5 Details of timer operations and timer accuracy A timer except interrupt execution type starts counting when the coil is driven and its output contact turns ON when the first coil instruction is executed after the timer has reached timeout Input processing Counting operation If
199. ays refer to Chapter 4 a Q 25 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 FX3s PLC 1 Types of program memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Parameter Does not change Sequence program Does not change Comment Can be secured by Does not change File register parameter setting Does not change 2 Types of word device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type Does not change Data register D l File type Does not change Set to initial m Special type Cleared ue Does not change Index register V and Z V Z Cleared Does not change Does not change Cleared For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared For 10 ms Cleared Timer current value Does not change while M8033 is ON register T ma sees Does not change Cleared or1ms eared Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Counter current value Does not change while M8033 is ON register C Latched backed up type Does not change High speed type Does not change Clock data Current value Does not change 1 Some devices are cleared
200. backed up type GEG tec ura Ope Special type FXOS FX0 MO to M495 M496 to M511 M8000 to M8254 PLC 496 points 16 points 57 points MO to M383 M384 to M511 EXON PLC O n M8000 to M8254 384 points 128 points 67 points FXU FX2C M500 to M1023 M1024 to M1535 M8000 to M8255 PLC 524 points 512 points 173 points MO to M499 FXU PLC Ver 500 points For link M8000 to M8255 2 30 or earlier Parent gt Child M800 to M899 169 point Reference Child gt Parent M900 to M999 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 This area is fixed to the latched backed up type The contents can be cleared by the RST and ZRST instructions 4 This area is fixed to the non latched non backed up type The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed 2 3 2 Functions and operation examples 1 General type All of general type auxiliary relays turn OFF when the PLC is turned M100 OFF When the ON OFF status of auxiliary relays just before power m interruption is required for control use latched backed up type T auxiliary relays NC contact Auxiliary relay circuit 42 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 3 Auxiliary relay M 2 Latched backed up type When the po
201. be changed cannot be changed range cannot be changed cannot be changed 3 cannot be changed cannot be changed S Program title Not registered Keyword Not registered Battery Mode Not used Refer to Section MODEM Initialized Not provided 6 1 RUN Terminal Input Not provided Serial port operation setting Not set 273 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 2 Parameter Initial Values 3 FX3s PLC 4 5 Item Initial value Setting range 16000 Program Capacity steps 4000 Memory 3 2 PS Refer to Section Capacity Comment Capacity blocks 6 3 File register Capacity pO blocks backed up cannot be changed Program title MODEM Initialized RO a RUN Terminal Input m Serial port operation setting FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs i Initial value Setting range em FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC Program Capacity 2000 8000 8000 Memory Commented Refer to Refer to Refer to See ection ga Section6 3 Section 6 3 Supplement relay M 384 to 511 384 to 511 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 State S O to 127 O to 127 500 to 999 0 to 999 ENEN Cannot be Cannot be backed up Counter C 16 bit 16 to 31 16 to 31 100 to 199 0 to 199 changed changed range Counter C 32 bit 235 to 255 220to255 220 to 255 200 to 255 Data Register D 128 to 255 220 to 255 200 to 511 0 to 511 Program title es Net me g registered registered registered aera Not Not N
202. becomes low latched backed up type devices are not held correctly When using the PLC for the first time after purchase or when using the PLC after power OFF for a long time 10 days when the ambient temperature is 25 C in the fully charged status clear latched backed up type devices 32 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 1 2 4 Change of devices between general type and latched backed up type 1 FX0s FX0 FXON FX18 FX1N FX1NC FX3S FX3G FX3Gc PLCs do not support the type change of latched backed up type devices When using latched backed up type devices as non latched type devices Some latched backed up type devices can be changed into the non latched type by parameter setting Devices dedicated to the latched type cannot be changed into the non latched type Such devices can be handled as non latched type devices by clearing all latched type devices using the initial pulse M8002 in a program 2 When using non latched type devices as latched backed up type devices 1 2 5 Non latched type devices can be changed into the latched backed up type by parameter setting 1 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs non latched type devices can be changed into the latched backed up type by selecting the battery mode using a parameter if an optional battery is attached How to initialize latched backed up type devices Latched backed up type
203. ble D200 to D511 312 points Latched backed up type D512 to D7999 7488 points 16 bits fixed lt file register gt lt D1000 to D7999 gt lt 7000 points gt The setting can be changed between the latched backed up type and the non latched type using parameters Section 2 8 Among 7488 fixed latched backed up type data registers D1000 and later can be set as file registers in units of 500 points using parameters Special type 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 4 Index type 16 bits VO to V7 ZO to Z7 16 points Section 2 10 Extension register Extension file register Extension register 16 bits Robr O7 laopo foes ey aoakenagainst power interruption Availabi V whi EE Section 2 9 Extension file register 16 bits ERO to ER32767 32768 points e o hed VTS A MAMOT essen Pointer For JUMP or CALL branch PO to P4095 4096 points For CJ and CALL instructions Input interrupt iO to I5 6 points Input delay interrupt Section 2 11 Timer interrupt I6 to 18 3 points Counter interrupt 1010 to 1060 For HSCS instruction Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instruction Constant 16 bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal K 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 16 bits 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal H 32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF 1 0 x 2178 to 1 0 x 2 178 0 1 0 x 2 18 to 1 0 x 2128 Chapter 3 Real number E 32 bits Both the decimal point expression and the exponent expression are available Specify charac
204. cable connection between the programming device and F the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected an aa 8704 Data format error reconnected during PLC monitoring 5 operation When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted a correctly 8730 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 251 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Special block error M8449 D8449 Verify that extension cables are correctly connected When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC FROM TO error Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Peripheral equipment access error Contents of error Action 021 0221 025 026 030 Continues operation This error occurs in the execution of operation e Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in applied instructions e Verify that specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected
205. can be specified as timer function values to provide variable potentiometer type analog timers Use the VRRD function to put analog variable potentiometer values into the PLC The analog value of the variable potentiometer No 0 is converted into 8 bit binary value and the value in the range from O to 255 is transferred to DO In this example DO is used as the timer set value Use the VRSC instruction to put the value of an analog variable potentiometer as a numeric value in the range from 0 to 10 in accordance with the scale position 51 O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jUue SUOD 9 d y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 Jey N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T 2 5 3 Set value specification method 1 Specification using a constant K x003 T10 is a timer for 100 ms 0 1 s pulses T When the constant 100 is specified T10 works as a 10 second timer 0 1 sec x 100 10 sec i Constant decimal integer 10 sec timer 2 Indirect specification using a data register Write in advance a value to the data register used for indirect specification in a program or set such a value in advance using a digital switch Note that the set value of a latched backed up type register can be indefinite when the battery voltage becomes low X D5 K100 10 sec timer 2 5 4 C
206. catch v2 function Input X004 pulse catch v2 Input X005 pulse catch v2 Unavailable 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 Available in Ver 3 07 or later Substitute function high speed counter interrupt function and substitute instruction function M 8180 M 8181 M 8182 M 8183 M 8184 M 8185 M 8186 M 8187 M 8188 M 8189 M 8190 M 8191 M 8192 M 8193 M 8194 M 8195 M 8196 M 8197 M 8198 M 8199 Unavailable Substitute of 1010 Substitute of 1020 Substitute of 1030 Substitute of 1040 ji w Write these special M instead of a pointer as the destination of the HSCS instruction p p oO oO S o5 Substitute of 1050 Substitute of 1060 A w Unavailable Substitute of SQR Substitute of FLT Substitute of SQRT Substitute of SER Substitute of RS Substitute of CCD Substitute of ASCI Substitute of HEX M8190 MOV M8191 MOV M8192 SMOV M8193 RAMP M8194 RAMP M8195 FMOV M8196 FMOV M8197 FMOV p S p Ny i y ps oO oO oO oO oO oO oO S o5 S d direction reverse in the BMOV instruction Unavailable 3 Available in Ver 3 07 or later p w 174 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Corresponding special device FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M
207. ch error has occurred in the D 8154 2 IVBWR instruction ch1 4 v M8154 Initial value 1 D 8155 Response waiting time in inverter communication ch2 ji jeep 4 Step number being processed in inverter communication D 8156 ch2 v v v3 v M8156 Initial value 1 D 8157 2 Error code in inverter communication ch2 pf fet fn M8157 Latched step where error has occurred in inverter D 8158 2 communication ch2 M8158 Initial value 1 Number and name Content of register SUI INO 801A0q 9q ui sanaq N9 Oo QUWM o o O 53 lt 0 a ooo TF 3 gea a S D eloeds Parameter number in which error has occurred in the D 8159 2 IVBWR instruction ch2 M8159 Initial value 1 sioug Q 1 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 3 Available in Ver 1 10 or later slo OWeled jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 185 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register i FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fxgs Corresponding special device Advanced function D 8160 D 8161 D 8162 D 8163 D 8164 D 8165 D 8166 D 8167 D 8168 Access restriction status D 8169 H20 1 xx ind
208. cial adapter special block where an error has occurred 00 Special block Unit number 0 10 Special block Unit number 1 20 Special block Unit number 2 30 Special block Unit number 3 40 Special block Unit number 4 50 Special block Unit number 5 60 Special block Unit number 6 70 Special block Unit number 7 81 Special adapter Communication channel 1 82 Special adapter Communication channel 2 252 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC operation Error bit Contents of error Action SUI NO 09q _ at error occurrence Special block error condition D8166 E s b1 This error occurs when an operation is executed or when the END T be dia eeu lenicie 8 Review the program and check the contents of the operands used b3 Continues Unit 3 access error i ee D4 operation UnA in applied instructions P ee tad e Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart b5 Unit 5 access error equipment Oo b6 Verify that extension cables are correctly connected b7 Unit 7 access error Q g D b8 to 7 S8 ye Not available e 2 RG S 49 w O 49 O D w q lt O q SJOUF SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N 253 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 5 2
209. cified as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area A to the data register area B when the PLC is powered ON e When a file register is monitored from peripheral equipment the contents of the data register area B in the data memory are read When file register current value change file register forced reset or PC memory all clear is executed from peripheral equipment the contents of the file register area A in the program memory are changed and then the changed contents are automatically transferred to the data register area B Accordingly when overwriting of file registers is required the program memory should be located in the built in memory or a memory cassette whose protect switch is set to OFF File registers stored in a memory cassette cannot be overwritten from peripheral equipment if its protect switch is ON 99 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 File register lt gt Data register lt Same number register update function of the BMOV instruction gt When a same file register is specified in both input variables and Cd in the BMOV instruction the same number register update function of the BMOV instruction is activated as described below FXON FX1S FXuU FX2c PLCs do not support the same number register update function In FXU FX2c PLCs the special device M8198 reverses the BMOV instruction execut
210. combined In a program put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter FX0S FX0 F XON F X1S FX1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N FX2NC PLCs do not support this function 1 In FX3u FX3uc PLCs When using software counter as hardware counter Counter No C244 OP C245 OP C248 OP C253 OP OUT C 32 EN ENO CCoil SE A ENO Description The counting input changes from X000 to X006 The reset input is not provided The start input is not provided It operates as a hardware counter The counting input changes from X002 to X007 The reset input is not provided The start input is not provided It operates as a hardware counter The reset input is not provided It operates as a hardware counter The reset input is not provided It operates as a software counter 80 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Counter No When using assignment of counter input terminal and Description switching of function C248 OP OUT_C_32 rn e The reset input is not provided EN C253 OP OUT_C_32 e The reset input is not provided ENO e The input counting 2 phase 2 counting changes as follows Phase A Changes from X000 to X006 Phase B Changes from X001 to X007 e The reset input is not provided e The start input is not provided C254 OP 3 In FX3s PLCs Counter No When using assignment of counter input
211. connected to an FX3u PLC Error detection ie we ee Se SS 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q Mj8487 sra 6 M 8488 Unavailable E ee a M 8489 Special parameter error CAAA cal aa D8489 N oS M 8490 to M 8511 Unavailable P F P 5 5 Available in Ver 3 10 or later T 6 Available in Ver 2 00 or later Q D a 2 S z 155 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 2 FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC PLCs Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function PLC status M 8000 RUN RUN monitor input NO contact M8061 Error occurrence M8001 E RUN monitor i m NC contact M8000 M 8002 M8001 Initial pulse NO contact M8002 M 8003 M8003 Initial pulse gt H lt Scan time 7 NC contact Refer to Subsection 4 2 1 M 8004 e Remains ON while either one among M8060 M8061 P y J y 7 D8004 Error occurrence M8063 M8064 M8065 M8066 and M8067 is ON M 8005 Remains ON while the battery voltage is abnormally low D8005 Battery voltage low Refer to Subsection 4 2 3 M 8006 Turns ON when abnormally low battery voltage is detected SAO VONAJEAOW
212. ct turns ON because the contact turns OFF 92 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C e Write the following program to reset only the current value of a high speed counter and not to turn OFF the contact 1 Program example gJ D O D O D The current value of C235 is cleared to 0 Ul S2913 1 When the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 at each scan while X010 remains ON 2 Timing chart OO QTY X000 S2o TE 3 90 8 P Current value of C235 4 g X010 G D 5 Because X010 turns ON Because the driving contact is the pulse execution type z FNC12 DMOV is executed C235 executes counting normally after that The current value of C235 is reset to 0 sioug CH e Write the following program to turn OFF the contact and reset the current value of a high speed counter 1 Program example o Os RUN monitor 7 Normally OFF O 1 When the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON T 2 Timing chart S X000 Current value of C235 1 SA Because the reset status is X010 f cleared C235 executes counting RST C235 Counter is reset part A Driving of counter reset is set to OFF in above p
213. ctions provided in structured Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction aun e an poatonal manuel projects of GX Works2 nee FXCPU Structured Programming Ve Application functions provided in structured Manual Application Functions rad padinonal Manual projects of GX Works2 PIRRE FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3u FX3uc PLCs Manual name Manual number aea ttt produci Contents aee or Additional Manual name code PLC main unit I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3uU extracted from the FX3U FX3U Series Hardware Manual JY997D18801 Supplied with product Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition l Details about the hardware including I O FAU Series User s Manual Hardware jva97p16501 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and 09R516 Edition l maintenance of the FX3U PLC main unit FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3UC 32MT LT 2 extracted from FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Hardware Manual JY997D31601 Supplied with product the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3uUC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3uc D DS DSS extracted BG eta oa eee en wale JY997D28601 Supplied with product from the FX3uc Series User s Ma
214. ctured programs provided by GX Works2 FX3S FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3uc User s Manual Analog Control Edition Additional Manual This manual explains details of analog special function blocks and analog special adapters for FX3s FX3G F X3Gc F X3u FX3uc PLCs and PID instruction Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Additional Manual This manual explains details of simple N N link parallel link computer link no protocol communication RS and RS2 instructions programming communication and inverter communication for FX PLCs Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer FX3S FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3uc Series User s Manual Positioning Edition Additional Manual This manual explains details of wiring instructions and operations of the positioning function built in FX3s FX3G FX3Gc F X3u FX3uc PLC main units Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer Individual manuals Manual supplied with product or additional Manual This manual explains details of each special unit block Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer 1 Detailed explanation may be provided by a separate manual in some products FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Devic
215. d bidirectional counter Provided Provided 1 C248 and C253 are usually used as counters having reset input but can be used as counters C248 OP and C253 OP not having reset input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8392 Software counters C241 C242 C243 1 phase 1 counting input C244 C245 C246 C248 OP C247 Software C248 1 edge counting Software counters C254 C255 1 edge counting 2 phase 2 counting input 1 phase 2 counting input Notation of high speed counters For some high speed counters in FX3s PLC the assignment of input terminals switches when special auxiliary relays are combined Such high speed counters are described as follows in this section Note that OP is not available in programming Switched device number C248 OP C253 OP Standard device number C248 C253 66 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 4 In FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs lt D Classification Counter No 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input O 4 edge counting terminal terminal C235 D 7 C236 2 c Not provided D l OO E 32 bit Not provided DE Software A 2 5 Q bidirectional CD Q counters o counter 5 ab i Provided Provided 3 c n oo so gt 2 l Not provided Zea E Software e i Q Sauna bidirectional Provided N counter OVIS ab
216. d OFF in 10 ms cycle ON duration 5 ms OFF duration 5 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle ON duration 50 ms OFF duration 50 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle ON duration 500 ms OFF duration 500 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 1 min cycle ON duration 30 s OFF duration 30 s Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Operation and function Stops and presets time counting For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Stops the time display For real time clock x Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Corrects by 30 seconds For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Detects installation Always remains ON For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Notifies a real time clock RTC error For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 Turns ON when the subtraction result is less than the maximum negative value Turns ON when carry occurs in the addition result or when overflow occurs in the shift operation result Spates ne BOV vercion xen est paaston paaston o Indicates the PR mode fe Changes over the 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer v Enables interrupts while the FROM TO instruction is P P executed V v V v Turns ON when the operation of DSW etc is completed The operation varies depending on the PLC Not cleared in FX1N FX2N FX2NC PLCs The
217. d be connected to bus 6617 line STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND and END The following instructions which can be used only in 6618 the main program are used in any other place such as interrupt and subroutine STL MC and MCR 6619 Action 6620 TAR The nesting level between FOR and NEXT is too the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of p much instructions is incorrect operation 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 The STL instruction is used continuously 9 times or more 6626 The following instructions cannot be used between STL and RET MC MCR I SRET and IRET 6627 6628 The following instructions cannot be used in the main program SRET and IRET 6629 The SRET or IRET instruction is not provided 6630 The STL RET or MC MCR instructions are provided in a subroutine position 6632 Ae position The following instructions cannot be used between FOR and NEXT STL RET MC MCR I and IRET This error occurs when a combination of instructions is incorrect in The number of FOR instructions and the number of Correct the instructions in the program mode so that their mutual NEXT instructions do not agree relationship becomes correct 248 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 a No error There is no jump destination for CJ or CALL instruction The label is undefined o
218. d clears devices in the latched backed up ranges Battery Mode 2 Select this item to operate the PLC with the battery MODEM Initialized Select this item to automatically initialize the connected modem when the PLC f power is turned ON i is i i None RUN Terminal Input Select this item to use an input terminal X for RUN input 3 X000 to X017 1 This item can be set only in FX2N FX2NC FX3U FX3uUCc PLCs 2 This item can be set only in FX3G FX3Gc PLCs jo Bujes pue sedi SJ J WELJEd 3 Up to the built in input number of main unit suo oun4 24o N 287 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 6 Types and Setting of Parameters 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting the PLC system 2 The PLC System 2 tab is available only in FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Click the PLC System 2 tab Only when setting the communication for a serial port of the extended PLC select a channel to be set and check the check box Operate Communication Setting Uncheck this check box when not setting the communication for a serial port FX Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Special Function Block Positioning Ethernet Port CH1 z o t The setting contents are cleared when unchecked iv pit ti When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board For Fx etc v
219. d function SI S EDE Parallel link M 8070 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the master station CACERES RA M 8071 3 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the slave station Hot M 8072 Parallel link Parallel link Remains ON during operation ON during operation Parallel link Turns ee ee a when M8070 or M8071 is set 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Sampling trace M18074 Unavailable o dodododo doo o M18075 System area during sampling trace J EY LY M18076 System area during sampling trace o J ll i M18077 Remains ON while sampling trace is executed 171 7 i M18078 Turns ON when sampling trace is completed 17 i M18079 Sampling trace system area Tl dalo d a i lees ee ee ee Ue Picea es ee oe Migos ped ee Le Meee ae ee es ee Ege oe ee ee ee Ulka BARS a a i EOS eee Le goos ee e a i M 8089 beee a 160 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later J 2 Applicable model Q Number and name Operation and function i O i FX1S FX1N FX2N FXINC Fx2nc COfesPonding special device z Undefined Mj8090 ee ee ee ee E po ea E Mey ie ae a ee ee i ed M 8094 Unavailable Le i Fes M18095 Pazar oe ede ee MJ8097 he eee a ae let eee Se High speed ring count
220. d is used 16 digits D Protection Level Customer Keyword f Read Write Protection SR a l Retype Keyword C Write Protection C All Online Operation Protection Valid characters are 0 9 A F dp Q v Keyword Protection 16 digits Please input Keyword and 2nd Keyword D D Set item Contents of setting Remarks Select either one among the following choices When Permanent PLC Lock is selected the restriction Keyword Protection 16 digits cannot be reset any more Keyword Protection 8 digits For resetting the restriction or for writing programs again Permanent PLC Lock 2 to the PLC all clear the PLC memory mi 3 2 S nN Function Selection Keyword Protection Input 16 characters Available characters are Input 8 characters in the former position and 8 characters 16 digits A to F and 0 to 9 in the latter position T v o lt Sa Input 8 characters Available characters are i Ze Protection nana wen egies Input 8 characters in the former position DL w 8 digits A to F and 0 to 9 o 2a wn Keyword Input REWE yP Input the same keyword This input is required for confirmation Keyword Customer Input 16 characters Available characters are Input 8 characters in the former position and 8 characters keyword A to F and 0 to 9 in the latter position Retype Input the same keyword This input is required for confirmation Select either one amon
221. d to the PLC main unit refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC Device name Reference O 4 I O relay WD Input relay X000 to X367 248 points Device numbers are octal D Section 2 2 Q Output relay Y000 to Y367 248 points The total number of inputs and outputs is 256 2 g Auxiliary relay lt 4 General type changeable MO to M499 500 points Devices can be changed between the latched Latched backed up type backed up type and the non latched type using changeable M500 to M1023 524 points parameters Section 2 3 Latched backed up type fixed M1024 to M7679 6656 points Special type 2 M8000 to M8511 512 points Chapter 4 State relay Initial state General type changeable ual sioug Q General type changeable S10 to S499 490 points 6 Devices can be changed between the latched DOS Latched backed up type S500 to 899 400 points backed up type and the non latched type using a ae changeable parameters Section 2 4 ake v Annunciator oo Latched backed up type S900 to S999 100 points changeable Latched backed up type fixed S1000 to S4095 3096 points 7 Timer on delay timer O 100 ms TO to T191 192 points 0 1 to 3276 7 sec D zA n ete T1492 to T199 8 points 0 1 to 3276 7 sec 5 for subroutine or interrupt routine n Counter General type up counter 16 bits CO to C99 100 points 0 to 32767 counts changeable Devices can be changed between th
222. ddle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8170 to M8177 are used 223 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 2 FXis PLCs Inputs X000 to X017 have a digital filter circuit of O to 15 ms respectively The digital filter constant is determined by the value in the range from 0 to 15 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF Input terminal Filter 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter When the program shown below is executed the filter constant is changed to O ms Because the C R filter is provided in the hardware however the filter constant actually becomes the value shown in the table below when 0 is specified Input number Input filter value when 0 is set X000 to X001 10us X002 to X017 50us e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the middle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8170 to M8175 are used FX1N PLCs Inputs X000 to X007 have a digital filter circuit of O to 15 ms respectively The digital filter constant is determined b
223. device memory Data memory Data register D Timer current value register T uI INC ed1Aeq l 9q uiseoiieg INQ Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Counter current value register C Index register V and Z Timer contact time counting coil reset coil T counter contact counting coil and reset coil C OO File register D os DS 3 e8 Built in program memory EEPROM Optional memory i a EEPROM 4 i Sequence program l P i Sequence program l E O o File register D i F l I I I l soug QI The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of an optional memory when the power is turned ON and isolates the built in program memory The PLC gives the priority to the optional memory SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2u0 N 19 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 4 FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC PLCs Built in device memory RAM a Bit device memory Data memory Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Data register D Timer current value register T Counter current value register C Timer contact time counting coil reset coil T Index register V and Z counter contact counting coil and reset coil C Bui
224. devices refer to Section 4 2 4 1 1 Special auxiliary relays M8000 and later 1 FX3sS FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc PLCs Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function PLC status M 8000 RUN RUN monitor input NO contact M8061 Error occurrence M 8001 i RUN monitor m NC contact M8000 Initial pulse NO contact M8002 M 8003 M8003 Initial pulse gt H lt Scan time E NC contact Refer to Subsection 4 2 1 M 8004 Remains ON while either one among M8060 M8061 y y J y y D8004 Error occurrence M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is ON M 8005 Remains ON while the battery voltage is abnormally low D8005 Battery voltage low Refer to Subsection 4 2 3 M 8006 Battery voltage low Turns ON when abnormally low battery voltage is detected D8006 latch Refer to Subsection 4 2 3 Remains ON during 1 scan when instantaneous power M 8007 interruption is detected Even if M8007 turns ON the PLC continues operation as far D8007 Instantaneous power fo iis v v merania as the duration of low supply voltage is within the time D8008 P period specified by D8008 Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 It is set when momentary power failure is detected When the duration of low supply voltage exceeds the time period specified by D8008 M8008 turns OFF and the PLC D8008 M 8008 Power interruption
225. devices can be initialized by clearing the whole PLC memory using peripheral equipment clearing all latched type memories using the special auxiliary relay M8032 or executing the ZRST instruction This subsection describes two major methods M8032 latched type memory all clear When M8032 is set to ON all latched backed up devices including reset coils of timers and counters are cleared M8032 can be set to ON and OFF using the forced ON OFF operation from peripheral equipment or in a sequence program Note that latched type devices cannot be set to ON while M8032 is ON When M8032 is set to ON in a program note that latched type devices are cleared during execution of the END instruction after M8032 turns ON Program example This program clears all latched type devices M8002 0 Initial pulse For details refer to Subsection 4 2 11 1 General type devices which have been changed into the latched type in the FX3G FX3Gc PLCs using an optional battery attached are also cleared 33 9q SuUI INO ed1Aeq ulseoineg IND Oo jue SuOD 9 d y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWeIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 1 Device Outline 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 2 ZRST instruction zone reset The ZRST instruction can clear multiple devices all at once Because only a limited device range can be speci
226. dge counting idirectiona Provided Not provided c C253 counter 8 poe 1 edge countin Provided Provided y S C255 g g O gt D 1 C248 and C253 are usually used as counters having reset input but can be used as counters C248 3 OP and C253 OP not having reset input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388 a n and M8392 2 C254 is usually used as a counter having reset input and start input but can be used as a counter C254 OP not having reset input or start input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8395 Notation of high speed counters For some high speed counters in FX3G FX3Gc PLCs the assignment of input terminals switches when special auxiliary relays are combined Such high speed counters are described as follows in this section Note that OP is not available in programming Standard device number Switched device number C248 C248 OP C253 C253 OP C254 C254 OP 65 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 3 In FX3s PLC Classification Counter No 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input 4 edge counting terminal terminal Not provided Not provided 32 bit bidirectional counter Provided Not provided Not provided Not provided bidirectional counters counter C249 C250 Provided Provided 4 Not provided Not provided C253 OP eee 1 edge counting Not provide
227. dication of instructions allowing indexing In the explanation of instructions operands allowing indexing are indicated as shown in the table below FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Word Device Others Operand System User Digit Specification System User Special Const Real Character Pointer type Unit ant Number String In the case of bit devices The right figure shows an example of the indexing operation in which the comparison result MO in the CMP instruction is indexed with the index register V1 Transfer KO or K5 to the index register V1 in advance When X001 is set to ON the comparison result is output to MO to M2 When MO is ON and if V1 is 0 YOOO YOOO 0 is activated When MO is ON and if V1 is 5 YOO5 YOOO 5 is activated When M1 is ON and if V1 is 0 YO10 YO10 0 is activated When M2 is ON and if V1 is 0 YO20 YO20 0 is activated When M2 is ON and if V1 is 5 YO25 YO20 5 is activated e For available index registers refer to Section 2 10 V1 0 V1 5 DO gt D1 MO ON gt YOOO ON YOO5 ON DO D1 M1 ON gt YO10 ON Y015 ON DO lt D1 M2 ON YO020 ON Y025 ON In the case of word devices 1 Indexing of operands in a 16 bit instruction The right figure shows an example of the indexing operation in which the transfer destination DO in the MOV instruction is indexed with the index register V3 Transfer KO or K10 to the index r
228. ding to the counting direction While X012 is ON C254 immediately starts counting when the input X006 turns ON Its counting inputs are X000 phase A and X001 phase B In addition to reset by X011 in a sequence C254 is immediately reset when X002 turns ON When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than the set value D1 DO Y004 turns ON When the current value becomes equivalent to or smaller than the set value Y004 turns OFF Y005 turns ON for down counting or OFF for up counting according to the counting direction 75 gJ D O D O D Ul S2919 OO jue SUOD 9 d y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 JeyjQ N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C e 2 phase encoder generates outputs for the phase A and phase B with a phase difference of 90 With these outputs a high speed counter automatically executes up counting and down counting as shown in the figure below When a counter is executing 1 edge counting Phase A H i Phase A i 1 1 i 1 1 1 Phase B ii ii Phase B I Up counting Down counting When a counter is executing 4 edge counting 1 1 4141 1 1 1 1 1 1 Phase A Phase B 1 1411 1 1 1 1 Up counting Down counting e The up down counting operation of C251 to C255 is indicated by t
229. ds sog aoinag jeeds Aa pue s di Jo Bunjes suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs PLC auo operaron Contents of error Action code at error occurrence PLC PP communication error M8062 D8062 6201 Parity error overrun error or framing error 6202 Communication character error 6203 Continues GorninUnicnton dala sun check cir Confirm that the equipment connected to the programming panel operation PP or programming connector is connected securely to the PLC 6204 Data format error Parallel link communication adapter error 1 M8063 D8063 No error 6301 Parity error overrun error or framing error oe E PARTAI Confirm that the power is ON in both PLCs 6303 Continues Communication data sum check error Confirm that the connection between the adapter and the PLC 6304 operation Data format error and the connection between ring adapters are performed 6306 Monitoring timeout error Parameter error M8064 D8064 6401 Program sum check error 6402 Memory capacity setting error 6403 Stops Latched area setting error Stop the PLC and set the parameters correctly 6404 operation Comment area setting error 6405 File register area setting error 6409 Other setting error 266 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Syntax error M8065 D806
230. duct where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative Registration Microsoft Windows and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries
231. e 2 Inthe case of FX3U and FX3uc PLCs versions 2 61 or later are applicable 239 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later Operation and function N um be r 4 4 sa FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 1st analog special adapter D 8260 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8261 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8262 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8263 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Number of averaging times Number of averaging times Number of averaging times ai for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 D 8265 Number of averaging times Number of averaging times Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8268 Error status Error status 2nd analog special adapter D 8270 Measured t
232. e amp Common Positioning of This Manual 2 When using FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Additional Manual Q L F This manual explains programming methods specifications functions etc required to create structured programs Structured This manual FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Additional Manual FX This manual explains devices and parameters for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Additional Manual FX This manual explains sequence instructions for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions FX Additional Manual This manual explains application functions for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Additional Manual FX This manual explains details of simple N N link parallel link computer link no protocol communication RS instruction programming communication and inverter communication for FX PLCs Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN Individual manuals Manual supplied with product or additional Manual Special unit block This manual explains details of each special unit block Explanation of instructions and inst
233. e button to verify the keywords input by the user through collation with the keywords registered in the PLC e When the keywords input by the user are verified the PLC cancels the registered keywords e When the keywords input by the user are not verified the PLC does not cancel the registered keywords 282 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 5 Keyword Resetting the keywords and validating the reset keywords keyword protect 1 Select Online Password Keyword Disable to open the Keyword Disable dialog box 2 Input the keyword protect 8 digits keyword protect 16 digits and customer keyword Keyword Disable f Keyword Disable Close PLC keyword is disabled temporarily Keyword When using an amp digit keyword please input the First amp digits only C keyword Protect PLE keyword is enabled Set item Contents of setting Remarks Keyword Protect Input 8 characters Available characters i Keyword 8 digits are A to F and 0 to 9 Disable Keyword Protect Input 16 characters Available characters When the customer keyword is set its 16 16 digits are A to F and 0 to 9 characters are available for it Keyword Protect es The reset keywords are made valid again 1 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 2 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 61 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC
234. e relay is S Output terminal or output connector Arrow indicates signal transfer Input terminal or input connector Input relay X The PLC receives signals from external input switches via input relays The symbol of input relay is X The PLC has built in input relays in accordance with its scale i Counter C The PLC has many built in counters The symbol of external loads via output relays t z Or Wav ee The PLC has many built in output relays Timer T The symbol of The PLC has many output relay is Y built in timers The symbol of timer is T Output relay Y The PLC drives Contact one normally open contact for external output of output relay The PLC has built in output contacts in accordance with its scale 14 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 1 Devices Constructing PLC 1 1 2 Device function list 1 Input relay X and output relay Y SuUI INO ed1Aeq Refer to Section 2 2 e Inthe PLC main unit input relays and output relays are assigned with serial octal numbers such as X000 to X007 X010 to X017 YOOO to YOO7 and Y010 to YO17 In extension units and extension blocks input relays and output relays are also assigned with serial octal numbers in the connection order from the PLC main unit 9q uiseoiieg N e Digital filters are used in specified input relays and the filter value can be changed in progr
235. e Cd are indexed the BMOV instruction is executed if S the actual device number is located within the file register area and if the number of transfer points does not exceed the file register area 103 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER FX0S FX0 F XON F X1S FX1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N F X2NC FX3S PLCs do not support extension registers and extension file registers Extension registers R are extended data registers D The contents of extension registers R can be stored in extension file registers ER In FX3U FX3uc PLCs however extension file registers ER are available only while a memory cassette is attached 2 9 1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers The tables below show the extension register R and extension file register ER numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal Extension register R Extension file register ER Latched battery backed up type File type FX3U FX3UC RO to R32767 ERO to ER32767 PLCs 32768 points 32768 points Extension register R Extension file register ER General type File type FX3G FX3GC RO to R23999 ERO to ER23999 PLCs 24000 points 2 24000 points 1 Available only while a memory cassette is attached because they are stored in the flash memory inside a memory cassette 2 Can be
236. e EEPROM memory built in PLC in FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 3 100 ms timers are changed to 10 ms timers when the special auxiliary relay M8028 is driven 4 This function is not supported in the FX3s 30ML1J ELI 2AD PLC 48 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs For 100 10 ms Retentive type arap potentiometer For 100 ms pulses pulses For 10 ms pulses For 1 ms pulses for 100 ms tne 0 1 to 3276 7 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec 0 001 to 32 767 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec T32 to T62 FX1S PLC oe 4 ee 32 points 31 points 1 point 0 1 to 3276 7 sec pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec EX4N ey al T250 to T255 TO to T199 T200 to T245 P 6 points FX1NC Capacitor latched 200 points 46 points Capacitor latched PLC backed up type backed up type Retentive type P tyP TO to T199 eee FX2N 200 points 4 points T250 to T255 p T200 to T245 Interrupt execution 6 points TAANE 46 points latched backed up Capacitor latched PLC Routine program p P p type backed up type type T192 to T199 Retentive type Timer numbers not used for timers can be used as data registers for storing numeric values Numeric value from 0 to 255 2 built in points 8 points for function board Only in FX1S FX1N PLCs 8 points for function board Only in FX2N PLC 1 100 ms timers are changed to 10 ms timers when the special auxiliary relay M8028 is driven
237. e aeeoea Turns ON when a FROM TO error occurs in a special function block unit specified in the BMF initialization function M 8318 after the PLC mode switched from STOP to RUN When M8318 turns ON D8318 stores the unit number where the error has occurred and D8319 stores the BMF number menemme avae o ee e S Indicates the model FX3UC 32MT LT or FX3UC 32MT LT 2 UlnNO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N9 D8318 D8319 Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 n oo a8 3 ow r gt D M 8322 1 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 0 FX3UC 32MT LT M18323 a e a e E ee ee ee ee ee WD ad Bultin CCLnKIT coniguraion complete f fp SS a a P iq 28 instucionnovereowion SP PP E 7 alee 1 Backed up against power interruption and cleared by the clear operation or automatically cleared when the clock data is set again 2 Turns ON if a specified I O device number is not connected when the I O device number is directly specified or indirectly specified by an index register in the LD AND OR or OUT instruction 3 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 4 Only the FX3uc 32MT LT 2 is available sioug Q sIo OWeed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 149 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G F
238. e analog potentiometer FX1S FX1N Corresponding special device D 8030 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog potentiometer VR1 D 8031 Value Integer from 0 to 255 of the variable analog potentiometer VR2 Constant scan pp EEEIEE p08 EAs ee D8034 Pe state o4 poe Peed pisos ARERR pe At EE Default Oms Unit 0 1 ms D 8039 Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON v v v v v M8039 Constant scan time Can be overwritten by a program Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 201 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 a ooo 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suooun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register j 5 FX1S FX1N FX2N Fx1NC FX2Nc Corresponding special device Step ladder and annunciator D 8040 1 ON state relay number 1 D 8041 1 ON state relay number 2 D 8042 D8040 stores the smallest number of active state relays ON state relay number 3 and D8041 stores the second smallest number of active D 8043 e ew ei v ON state relay number 4 In this way D8040 to D8047 sequentially store up to 8 active state relays M8047 D
239. e attached write Set the protect switch to OFF protected flash memory cassette Stops operation CC Link LT settings cannot be written to the built in CC Link LT special function block i Set the configuration again A built in CC Link LT special function block EEPROM If the problem persists something may be malfunctioning inside the writing time out SKSI occurred ar the built in CC PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Link LT special function block configuration could not be completed normally in self CONFIG mode PLC PP communication error D8062 Serial communication error 0 M8062 D8062 0000 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6230 Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 0000 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6312 6313 6314 6320 6321 6330 6340 ooo Me O Parity error overrun error or framing error Communication character error Confirm that the equipment connected to the programming panel PP or programming connector is connected securely to the PLC Communication data sum check error a This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected Data format error during monitoring of the PLC Continues operation When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consul
240. e connected to output F optically and has many normally open NO ferminals msideth PLE 5 contacts and normally closed NC contacts An output relay has many NO contacts and NC z 4 These contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC These input relays cannot be driven by programs contacts These contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC Differences in operations between external output contacts output devices and internal contacts are explained on the next page sioug Q S19 UWELJed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 39 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y 2 2 3 Operation timing of I O relays The PLC executes sequence control by repeatedly executing the following processing procedure In this batch I O method not only are there driving times of input filters and output devices but also response delays caused by operation cycles Input processing 1 2 3 6 indicate the processing order Input processing Before executing a program the PLC reads the ON OFF status of all input terminals inside the PLC into the input image memory Even if inputs change while the PLC is executing the program the contents of the input image memory remain unchanged but the changes in inputs are read during the input processing in the next cycle Even if an input contact changes from ON to OFF or from OFF t
241. e contents of the data register area B are transferred to the data register area B and file register area A as shown in the left figure If the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON and data cannot be written to the file register area A data is written to only the data register area B 102 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 8 5 Cautions on using file registers 1 Cautions on using a memory cassette When changing the contents of file registers secured in a memory cassette satisfy the following conditions gJ D O D O D e Set to OFF the protect switch of the memory cassette e Allowable number of times of writing data to the program memory For the allowable number of times of writing data refer to Section 6 4 When data is written by a continuous operation type instruction in a program data is written to the program memory in each operation cycle of the PLC For preventing this make sure to use a pulse execution type instruction BMOVP 1 9q Ul S9149 OO e Writing data to the flash memory lt In the case of FX3U FX3uc PLCs gt O OD It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data to one serial block 500 points a SS Execution of the program is paused during this period Because the watchdog timer is not refreshed A 90 8 during this period it is necessary to take proper countermeasures such
242. e filter constant is changed to O ms Because the C R filter is provided in the hardware however the filter constant actually becomes the value shown in the table below when 0 is specified M8000 RUN monitor KO Input number Input filter value when 0 is set X000 to X001 20us X002 to X017 50us e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the middle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8170 to M8175 are used 225 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM oO oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q jo Buas pue sedk SJ J WEJEd suojoun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 5 FXoN PLCs Inputs X000 to X007 have a digital filter circuit of O to 15 ms respectively The digital filter constant is determined by the value in the range from 0 to 15 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF Input terminal Filter 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter When the program shown below is executed the filter constant is changed to O ms Because the C R filter is provided in the hardware h
243. e i General type Annunciator type backed up type EEPROM backed up Capacitor backed up SO to S127 x 3 FX1S PLC 128 points i S0 to S9 are provided for the initial state SO to S127 128 points S128 to S999 SO to S9 are provided 872 points for the initial state FX1N FX1NC PLC SO to S499 FX2N FX2NC 500 points S500 to S899 S900 to S999 PLC SO to S9 are provided 400 points 2 100 points 2 for the initial state 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed to the latched backed up area by parameter setting 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by parameter setting 3 The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed using parameters 44 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 4 State Relay S 3 FXoS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs General type Latched backed up type piked a aa Annunciator type SO to S63 FXOS FXO 64 points PLC SO to S9 are provided for the j initial state O D O D O D S S0 to 127 FXON PLC 128 points SO to S9 are provided for the initial state S0 to 499 3 500 points aS e FXU FX2C SO to S9 are provided for the S500 to S899 S900 to S999 Seg PLC initial state 400 points 2 100 points 2 a OF S10 to S19 are provided for zero return P 1 This area is not latched backed up It can be changed
244. e latched Latched backed up type up backed up type and the non latched type using counter 16 bits changeable er Pais parameters General type bidirectional counter Section 2 6 32 bits changeable C200 to C219 20 points 2147483648 to 2147483647 counts Devices can be changed between the latched Latched backed up type backed up type and the non latched type using bidirectional counter 32 bits C220 to C234 15 points parameters changeable 35 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 1 Device Number List Device name Description Reference High speed counter 1 phase 1 counting input Bidirectional 32 bits eal 1 phase 2 counting input Bidirectional 32 bits pete Oia 2 phase 2 counting input Bidirectional 32 bits i Data register 32 bits when used in pair form Up to 8 points can be used among C235 to C255 latched backed up type The setting can be changed between the latched backed up type and the non latched type using parameters 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 counts Hardware counter 1 phase 100 kHz x 6 points 10 kHz x 2 points 2 phases 50 kHz 1 edge counting 50 kHz 4 edge counting Software counter 1 phase 40 kHz 2 phases 40 kHz 1 edge counting 10 kHz 4 edge counting Section 2 7 General type 16 bits changeable DO to D199 200 points Latched backed up type 16 bits changea
245. e left When Write Device is set to RWw 0 to 65535 DEC 0 to FFFFH HEX Click the END button to finish the setting and close the Remote device station Initial Setting Procedure Registration dialog box 7 Click the END button to finish the setting and close the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station No Setting dialog box 6 6 3 Transferring parameters sequence program and symbolic information to the PLC 1 Select Online Write to PLC from the tool menu to display the Online Data Operation dialog box Online Data Operation Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection R5 232C System Image y DJE oee wre E PLC Module Execution Target Dataf No Yes Tite f cof Edit Data Parame ter Program Select All cancel All Selections ezin IV Display Size Module Name Data Name Title Target Detail Last Change Target Memory Si ize a 2011 07 16 09 26 09 2011 07 16 09 26 08 o etail 2011 07 16 09 26 09 BA leFail D B Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed Mo Setting Already Set Program Size 0 Steps 16 000 Steps Symbolic Information Size 0 Byte 96 000 Byte Refresh Related Functions lt lt Execute Close Set Clock Clear PLC Memory 2 Check the Parameter and click the Execute button The selected contents are transferred to the PLC The transferred parameters bec
246. ea Does not change Cleared register T Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change 2 Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change 2 Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Counter current value Does not change while M8033 is ON register C Latched backed up type Does not change 2 High speed type Does not change 2 Clock data Does not change 2 Available in Ver 3 00 or later File type Does not change The program memory contents or device status is not held correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage if a memory cassette is not attached The device status is not held correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN For special data registers refer to Chapter 4 An optional memory cassette is required 22 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices e Caution When the battery voltage becomes low due to expiration of the battery life or another reason programs not stored in a memory cassette latched backed up type devices and clock data are not held correctly Clear latched type devices and transfer programs not stored in a memory cassette again In addition set the initial values and clock data if necessary For rough guide to the life and replacement timing of the ba
247. ear co os Ca ea om co com Applicable model Operation and function When M8 counter C becomes the down counting mode e ON Down counting operation e OFF Up counting operation turns ON the corresponding IH FET Ais Ais REGED EEEREE High speed counter Up down counter counting direction Refer to Section 2 7 for details M 8235 M 8236 M 8237 M 8238 M 8239 M 8240 M 8241 M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 235 com car com os cao a ea ao aa co lt S EEA k T Ais When M8 counter C turns ON the corresponding becomes the down counting mode e ON Down counting operation e OFF Up counting operation 1 4 5 Corresponding special device 165 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2Nc COlresPonding special device Number and name Operation and function High speed counter Up down counter monitor Refer to Section 2 7 for details M 8246 M 8247 M 8248 M 8249 M 8250 M 8251 M 8252 M 82
248. ecuting an operation Review the program and check the contents of operands used in instructions 6709 Others invalid branch ete Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may 6 occur for the following reason for example Example UO T5002 itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T500Z means S a T600 which causes a device number error 3 K 2232 This error occurs when a same device is used in both the source and d gt 6710 Mismatch among parameters rae Bee the destination in a shift instruction etc 6730 Improper sampling time TS lt 0 7 2 6732 Improper input filter constant a lt 0 or 100 lt a lt The PLC stops PID operation gt s 6733 Improper proportional gain KP lt 0 This data error occurs in the control parameter set value or during 6734 Improper integral time T lt 0 PID instruction a ters 6735 improper derivative gain KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD SCK ICO ens Ol RATAM a 6736 Improper derivative time TD lt 0 lt The PLC continues auto tuning gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Scan time The PLC continues the operation in the condition Sampling time Ts Cyclic time Scan time 249 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs Error code PLC operation Contents of error Action at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 674
249. ed Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary Cleared 1 Does not change Cleared relay M l Does not change while M8033 is ON Contact image memory Latched backed up type X Y M S auxiliary relay M A Set to initial Special auxiliary relay M Cleared ae Does not change 2 uIno ed1Aeq Output relay Y Cleared 9q uiseoiieg N9 Does not change Oo OVUM General type state relay Bese Does not change oog e F iq Latched backed up type 4 2 skis ae Does not change Annunciator S Does not change Does not change Cleared 4 For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON P E a a Does not change Cleared D or 10 ms eared D Timer contact Does not change while M8033 is ON Time counting coil 2 4 Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change i l f Does not change Cleared enera e eared Counter contact ae Does not change while M8033 is ON Counting coil Reset coil C Latched backed up type Does not change High speed type Does not change sioug Q 1 General type devices can be changed to the latched type by parameter setting if an optional battery is 6 attached DS 2 Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN za w For special auxiliary rel
250. ed as numeric data for control in other cases The figures below show the structure of timer current value registers When a timer number is specified in an input variable of an instruction the timer is handled as a device which stores 16 bit or 32 bit data in the same way as data registers 1 Structure of timer current value registers 1 16 bit High order K _ 16 bit Low order Availabl i p15 QliloliTolTolsToTsToTToTToTs po Axaleble numeric value range SES SOBEATHDNOHE TNT 32 bit 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Sign Or Od 0 Positive L2 FN 1 Negative 1 The sign is valid only when a timer is handled as a substitute for a data register 2 32 bit High order 32bt S ___ _ Low order b31 LOLI 1fol1 ol1 ol1 o 1 1 1 a STN ODTNOATNODTNODAYTNODATNODATNODTN Sian Ne ONONT CDOMNKNDATRNODDATAT MON g Oona NON ONENA HK OUWOKRMNHDOONNS 0 Positivee o0 ON OTN OFN OFX ND ON OCOOYTNS STR OTK OWKR DODTAN OMNONS 1 Negative wo NTON DMMOOW ANS NOnAtTKMNO OTN KoOOomMonr OWN 2 Use examples For the full use of timers as numeric devices refer to the instruction explanation manual offered separately FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction 54 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 2 6 Counter C
251. ed in a program can be used as devices for storing 16 bit or 32 bit numeric values data registers 300 decimal value is transferred to T10 The contents of T10 are transferred to the current value register of C20 In this case T10 is not working as a timer but is working as a data register With regard to 32 bit data two 16 bit timers or counters such as C1 and CO can express 32 bit data in the same way as data registers Each 32 bit counter such as C200 can handle 32 bit data individually 98 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 8 4 Functions and operation examples of file registers A file register sets the initial value of a data register having the same device number Each file register stores 16 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign Two file registers combined can store 32 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign Data registers D1000 and later can be specified as file registers by parameter setting For the maximum number of points to be specified as file registers refer to Subsection 2 8 1 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S9149 e In parameter setting 1 to 14 blocks can be specified One block secures 500 file registers and uses the program memory area for 500 steps For the number of blocks to be specified as paramet
252. ed in the hardware however the filter constant actually becomes the 33 value shown in the table below when 0 is specified ies l Q D T Input number Input filter value when 0 is set 3 X000 to X005 50us a X006 to X017 200s e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the middle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8056 to M8059 are used 227 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 10 Battery BATT BAT LED OFF command M8030 1 Batteryless operation While M8030 remains ON the battery LED does not turn ON even if the voltage of the battery used for memory backup becomes low FX0S FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX3S PLCs do not support M8030 Set M8030 to ON when indication of the low battery voltage error is not required or when the battery is removed When the batteryless operation is required however do not use M8030 but refer to 2 Parameter setting in peripheral equipment below Parameter setting in peripheral equipment Specify the batteryless operation mode in the parameter setting FX0S FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC F XU F X2C F X3S F X3G FX3GC PLCs do not support the batteryless operation mode 1 When the battery
253. ed when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 3 Available in Ver 1 20 or later lt S lt S 212 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX0S EXon FXu FX2c Corresponding FXO special device Number and name Content of register gJ D O D O D Parallel link Refer to the data communication manual for details Die UE ee ee a a 2 sl a 7y D 8072 Unavailable E D 8073 2 Sampling trace el a a ee opr ee e 3 8076 cece 92g sel re ee e g ladi e ey set rer se EREJET et Let ee e 3 a Le tee z aii Le g D 8085 The PLC system occupies these devices when the sampling fe aa ei se D 8086 trace function is used in the nee A6GPP A6PHP eae p 5 D 8087 A7PHP or personal computer 7 7 oe ee i ati e eis a are ee si Pe eit 6 K BEREAKSI e aia Ce i a SS sai Ls te Eee TE SAn ee aa Se ala pf ete v ai fe 1 Sampling trace devices are used by peripheral equipment High speed ring counter Up counting ring counter of 0 to 32767 Unit 0 1 ms 16 bits 2 l amp e ie suooun4 24o N pera furavatabe T E 2 The 0 1 ms high speed ring counter D8099 is activated when the END instruction is executed after M8099 turned ON 213 FXCPU Structured Programmin
254. efer to Subsection 4 2 3 Eee 5 latch Remains ON during 1 scan when instantaneous power m M 8007 interruption is detected Ss Even if M8007 turns ON the PLC continues operation as far Instantaneous power ct cata D8007 eet as the duration of low supply voltage is within the time period i specified by D8008 Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 Turns ON when instantaneous power interruption is detected 6 M 8008 When the duration of low supply voltage exceeds the time DOs Power enone period specified by D8008 M8008 turns OFF and the PLC D8008 23 p switches to the STOP mode M8000 OFF 3 a a Refer to Subsection 4 2 4 sa M 8009 Turns ON when 24V DC fails in either function unit or function r D8009 24V DC failure block Q D T 3 Ss D 167 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FXOS EXon FXu FX2c oTe sponding FXO special device Number and name Operation and function Clock M 8010 Turns ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle ON duration 5 ms OFF eae duration 5 ms v Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 Turns ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle ON duration 50 ms OFF M 8012 oe duration 50 ms V z 100ms clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 6 M 8013 Turns ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle ON duration 500 ms OFF Piette duration 500 ms v v v
255. efer to the Frequency Hz Instruction column Positioning Control Refer to the Positioning Control Manual Manual Up This button transposes the selected line to the upper line Down This button transposes the selected line to the lower line Insert Line This button inserts a line in the currently selected position Delete Line This button deletes the currently selected line This button deletes the entire setting of the positioning table for the selected pulse output Delete all Lines destination P Positioning table A check mark here means not to transfer the positioning setting when PLC turns ON settings will not be Put a check mark when changing the positioning setting from a display unit etc and then initialized when the using the changed contents even after restoring the power At this time set a latched PLC is powered on battery backed type device to Head Address Write This button writes the contents of the positioning table created here to up to 1600 devices i FX3U FX3UC or 1200 devices FX3G FX3GC starting from Head Address This button reads the contents of the existing positioning table from 1600 devices FX3U FX3UC or 1200 devices FX3G FX3GC starting from the head device number in the PLC Read without regard to the number of axes but does not read device numbers without the positioning instruction setting 293 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of
256. eg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Operation and function Ex3u FX3UC FX3G FX3GC FX3S Corresponding special device High speed counter Up down counter monitor Refer to Section 2 7 for details M 8246 M 8247 M 8248 M 8249 M 8250 M 8251 M 8252 M 8253 M 8254 M 8255 M 8256 to M 8259 7 7 When the T pnase anu or A prase 2 input counter C is in the down counting mode the 7 a e ON Down counting operation e OFF Up counting operation z 7 7 7 aa ee ae ee Unavailable aaa feo Analog Special Adapter FX3U FX3UC Refer to Subsection 4 2 18 for applicability of each analog special adapter M 8260 to M 8269 M 8270 to M 8279 M 8280 to M 8289 M 8290 to M 8299 Analog Special Adapter FX3G FX3GC FX3S Analog Expansion Board FX3G FX3S Refer to Subsection 4 2 17 for applicability of each analog special adapter and analog expansion board M 8260 to M 8269 M 8270 to M 8279 M 8280 to M 8289 M 8290 to M 8299 DEO M 8300 to M 8303 M 8304 Zero M 8305 M 8306 Carry M 8307 to M 8311
257. egister V3 in advance When X001 is set to ON and if V3 is 0 K500 is transferred to DO D 0 0 DO When X001 is set to ON and if V3 is 10 K500 is transferred to D10 D 0 10 D10 ENT ENO KO gt V3 KO S d V3 EN ENO K10 V3 K10 s d V3 K500 s d DOV3 V3 0 K500 gt DO D0 0 V3 10 K500 gt D10 D0 10 134 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 7 Indexing 2 Indexing of operands in a 32 bit operation In a 32 bit instruction it is also necessary to specify a 32 bit index register in the instruction When handling 32 bit data in a structured program however direct specification of 16 bit devices is not available different from a simple project Use a label when handling 32 bit data 32 bit counters can be specified directly because K10 they have 32 bit data length When an index register Z Z0 or later is specified in a 32 bit instruction the specified Z and its counterpart V VO or later work together as a 32 bit register KO V4 24 SUI INC 09q Z4 X002 K10 gt V4 Z4 og omy 2 5 4D 9 2 Z4 X003 K69000 C23524 The right figure shows an example of the indexing V4 Z4 0 _ K69000 gt C235 C235 0 operation in which the transfer destination C235 A AAT em Oe eee S 32 bit counter in the DMOV instruction is indexed with the index registers V4 and Z4
258. em 2 operation Setting of the communication format D8120 D8400 and D8420 setting Setting of the station number D8121 and D8421 Setting of the timeout check D8129 D8409 and D8429 This parameter sets interrupt inputs for the maximum speed bias speed creep speed zero return Constant setting speed acceleration time deceleration time and DVIT instruction It is necessary to set the memory capacity ae clue This parameter sets the operation table It is necessary to set the memory capacity Ethernet Port Special Special parameters are used in special adapters special blocks etc parameter They are stored in the main unit parameter Positioning 270 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 1 Parameter List Classification Item Description D This parameter sets protection to prevent erroneous reading and incorrect writing of a sequence D program The keyword protection 8digits keyword protection 16digits and customer keyword can Keyword ry be specified in alphanumeric characters A to F and 0 to 9 In addition a permanent PLC lock can be specified Others Program title This parameter enables to set a character string to be used as the program title Storage of the symbolic 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 TROUT AON For details refer to Section 7 1 Block password 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Classification
259. emperature Ch1 D 8271 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8272 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8273 Measured temperature Ch4 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8278 Error status Error status 3rd analog special adapter D 8280 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8281 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8282 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8283 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 Measured temperature Ch4 D 8284 Number of averaging times Number of averaging times Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8288 Error status Error status 4th analog special adapter D 8290 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8291 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8292 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8293 Measured temperature Ch4 D 8294 Number of averaging times Number of averaging times Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch
260. en Station Type is set to Ver 2 Remote Device Station or Ver 2 Intelligent Device Station 1 When Expanded Cyclic Setting is set to Single 32 x Number of Occupied Stations 2 When Expanded Cyclic Setting is set to Double Quadruple or Octuple 32 x Number of Occupied Stations 16 x Expanded Cyclic Setting When Station Type is set to No Setting Fixed to 32 in the case of Occupied Station 1 Select the reserve invalid station select among the following choices No Setting Reserved Station Invalid Station 5 Click the END button to finish the setting and close the CC Link Station Information dialog box 300 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 6 Click Initial Setting in the Setting Contents column on the Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration dialog box Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station No Setting SUI NO 09q _ Regist Procedure Target Station No No of Registered Procedures Re ist Procedure PS Regist Procedure pe Regist Procedure 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 PS Regist Procedure Pe Regist Procedure O7 Resist Procedure PB Regist Procedure Oo 20 S A F Q m Set item Contents of setting Setting range 53 902 a FX3U FX3UC 1 to 16 a Target Station No Set the station number of the unit to be initialized EX3G EX3
261. ency Hardware 4 edge counting 4 counters 5 1 edge counting C253 4 edge counting 1 edge counting C252 4 edge counting 1 edge counting Software counters C253 OP 4 edge counting C254 1 edge counting C255 4 edge counting For the condition handled as software counters refer to Subsection 2 7 9 For the total frequency refer to Subsection 2 7 10 Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters For the wiring refer to the manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit C244 C245 and C248 are usually used as software counters but can be used as hardware counters C244 OP C245 OP and C248 OP by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and one among M8390 to M8392 For the method to switch the counter function refer to Subsection 2 7 7 2 phase 2 input counters usually execute 1 edge counting but can be used for 4 edge counting by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and one between M8198 and M8199 For the method to use a 2 phase 2 input counter for 4 edge counting refer to Subsection 2 7 8 The external reset input usually causes reset at turning ON but can cause reset at turning OFF by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8389 For the method to change the logic for external reset input refer to Subsection 2 7 6 C253 is usually used as a hardware counter but can be used as a counter C253 OP not having
262. ency 30 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 50 kHz Sum of processing frequency 50 kHz lt Total frequency 60 kHz 88 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 5 In FX2N FX2NC PLCs Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used vinen ee DESER When only DHSCS and Following and DHSCZ When only DHSCZ eer DHSCR instructions are cite software counter Magnification instructions are not used instruction is used Software combined with for calculating used counter DHSCS DHSCR total frequency Maximum or DHSCZ response Counter type gJ D O D O D Total Maximum Total ee Total response frequency response frequency frequency instruction frequency frequency kHz kHz frequency kHz kHz kHz kHz 1 phase 1 counting C237 to C245 C235 C236 x1 10 10 5 5 input 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO 1 phase Sos 2 counting C247 to C250 C246 x1 10 20 10 11 5 5 5 5 2a input 3 908 mee C252 to C255 C251 x2 5 o 4 i S C252 to C255 4 input 4 When using two or more high speed counters or when combining a high speed counter and the SPD w PLSY or PLSR instruction make sure that the sum of the processing frequency does not exceed the total 2 frequency shown above z 8 Calculation example When the DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ instructions are not used Used high speed counter No Input OuTRUtI Magnif
263. enonse i Total DHSZ or DHSCT frequency arene instruction es p O ee e ber of times ber of times C247 C248 of using 50 1 5x ofusing 50 1 5 x 2 counting C249 C250 a a instruc Numberof instruc Number input 9 l 9 i 50 tions times of tions of times of using using x1 30 25 instruc instruc tions tions C251 C253 30 Num 25 Num ber of times ber of times 7 5 6 2 of using of using instruc instruc tions 4 tions 4 1 When index registers are added to a counter number specified by the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT instruction all hardware counters switch to software counters 2 High speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP can count at up to 10 kHz e Calculation of the total frequency Total frequency gt Sum of Response frequency of high speed counter x Magnification for calculating total frequency e Calculation example When only the DHSZ instruction is used 6 times in a program the total frequency is calculated as follows in accordance with the columns for When only DHSZ instruction is used shown in the table above This calculation example is provided for a system configuration not including special analog adapters and FX3U FX3UC Series special function blocks units Magnification for calculating total frequency K _ a ene eee a counter oa Cs DHSZ instruc C241 20KHz 40 6 40 6 times 34kHz 34 kHz Software counter noting rae fesem ese 1 The tota
264. ension registers and extension file registers in specified sectors DPF When initializing only extension file registers using this instruction make sure to temporarily move the Er contents of extension registers in target sectors to unused extension registers or unused data registers OE before executing this instruction When initializing only extension file registers in FX3uc PLCs Ver 1 30 or later use the INITER instruction 2 Initialization of extension file registers T Because the contents of extension file registers are stored in the attached memory cassette or built in EEPROM execute the data clear operation using a sequence program or GX Works2 T When writing data to extension file registers in FX3u FX3uc PLCs it is necessary to initialize areas to be 3 written in advance a When writing data to extension file registers in FX3G FX3GcC PLCs it is not necessary to initialize areas to be written 1 Initialization using a program only in FX3U FX3uc PLCs a Initialize only extension file registers in units of sector in Ver 1 30 or later Example When initializing ERO to ER4095 initializing two sectors starting from ERO j INITERP a ea ae Command input EN ENO The current value is initialized to FFFFH in each of ERO to ER4095 b When initializing extension registers and extension file registers in units of sector Example When initializing RO to R4095 and ERO to ER4095 initializing two sectors starting from RO and E
265. er High speed ring counter operation in units of 0 1 ms 16 mie E ee 1 In FX2N FX2NC PLCs the 0 1 ms high speed ring counter D8099 is activated when the END instruction is executed after M8099 turned ON 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ao r gt D eloeds Memory information M18101 ee mietoa Unavailable E E E E 5 103 ce a oui foes Lf et e i installed M 8105 eS ee efron ere ee a yga 3 Gant 2 Available in Ver 3 00 or later EE GE Output refresh error Refer to Chapter 5 for details 18109 foupuretesnenor Pe T TT a9 M 8110 ace PAE Eee T M 8117 Pe ee a 2 Function board For FX1S FX1N PLCs 3 a a eo paa e A e a a 3 M 8115 eee eS T a a Meng a a e aa Uae Pere ere ee eee Misr ee ON 161 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2Nc COlresPonding special device pee faan ne eo a sae j e o a MeT Carer secin tes tome TT Ph ie a ede ia Global sonal eeceatespowy A TT eT D8127 M 8127 On demand handshake signal dedicated protocol BEBE D8128 D8129 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the RS instruction is set to OFF Number and name Operation and function Communication link Refer to the da
266. er setting refer to Subsection 6 3 e When some of data registers D1000 and later are specified as file registers remaining unspecified data registers can be used as data registers OO The program Capacity and file register points differs from one PLC to another Sos This explanation here uses the FX3U and FX3uc PLCs as examples EF 1 Operation of file registers BE e The contents of the file register area A in the program memory set inside the built in memory or an optional memory are batch transferred to the data register area B in the data memory inside the system RAM when the PLC is powered ON or when the PLC mode is switched from STOP to RUN 4 If data registers in the area A are specified as file registers by parameter setting the contents of the area D A in the program memory are batch transferred to the area B in the data memory when the PLC is 8 powered ON or when the PLC mode is switched from STOP to RUN This means that the contents of changes stored in the data memory are initialized If it is necessary to save the contents of changes caused by a sequence program and stored in the data memory update the contents of the area A to changed values using the same number register update function of the BMOV instruction described later Built in memory or System RAM Data memory sioug Q memory cassette Program memory DO Data registers D1000 and later located 6 Program ikenta Pr
267. eration 6 D 8148 deceleration time v Initial value 100 ee 3 Gant D 8149 Unavailable Le B 23 1 Change the maximum speed to a value not more than 100000 using a sequence program d gt Q D a 3 S P 205 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Content of register Exis FXiN FX2N FX4NC FX2Nc Corresponding special device Inverter communication function Refer to the data communication manual for details Number and name D 8150 D 8151 D18152 Unavailable D 8153 D 81541 EXTR instruction Response waiting time D 8155 EXTR instruction Step number being processed in communication D 8156 EXTR instruction Error code EXTR instruction Latched step number where error has D 8157 occurred Initial value 1 D 8158 D18159 Unavailable 1 Cleared when the PLC power supply from OFF to ON 2 Available in Ver 3 00 or later Display module function FX1S FX1N PLCs Control device D for FX1N 5DM Initial value 1 Control device M for FX1N 5DM Initial value 1 206 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Numbe
268. error D8004 W W M8004 I O bus Special M number Turns ON when check smallest number an error occurs D8063 M8063 Parallel link error of error occurrence M8073 Parallel link mode M8063 RS 232C communication error D8064 M8064 Parameter error D8065 s M8065 Syntax error D8069 Error step number D8066 gt M8066 Circuit error Clear errors and then forcibly clear Monitor the M8068 using a programming tool contents of D8067 gt M8067 Operation error D to check i M8068 Operation error latch D8068 1st error step the error code p D8068 oath 254 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 3 Error detection timing Error detection timing SUI NO 09q _ When power is When PLC mode turned ON from switches from Other timing Error item OFF STOP to RUN M8060 I O configuration error Checked Checked During operation 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 During operation M8061 PLC hardware error Checked Lo When PLC receives signal from PP M8062 PLC PP error M8063 Link communication error aa When PLC receives signal from counterpart station M8064 Parameter error 3 M8065 Syntax error Checked Checked When program is changed STOP When program is transferred STOP ODD M8066 Circuit error AS D M8067 Operation error DT During operation M8068 Operation error latch D O z v 4
269. ers as well as input variables of instructions 16 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 1 2 Program Memory and Devices SuUI INO ed1Aeq 1 2 1 Memory structure 1 FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 9q uiseoiieg N Oo Built in device memory RAM Bit device memory Data memory Sos BS Oo Contact image memory Data register D y gt T Input relay X Output relay Y Timer current value register T gt Auxiliary relay M State relay S Counter current value register C Timer contact time counting coil Index register V and Z counter contact counting coil and reset coil Extension register R 4 g S Optional memory S Built in program memory RAM Flash memory z Parameter Sequence program File register D Special setting Parameter Sequence program File register D Special setting soug QI uononysu q uoNeZIeNiul JOJSUeL Symbolic information 1 Symbolic information 6 VO DOs Extension file register ER 5 P a a woe ee ee l A M a M a a M O M Sl fe OPPONENT ST AET The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of 7 an optional memory when the power is turned ON and isolates the built in program memory Q The PLC gives the priority to the optional memory D ay 3 S n 17 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device
270. ers setting error set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power SJOUF Syntax error M8065 D8065 Incorrect combination among instruction device 6 6501 symbol and device number VAS 6502 OUT T or OUT C is not provided before the set 3 value T amp K The set value is not provided after OUT T or z a 6503 OUT C Insufficient number of operands in an instruction A same label number is used more than once Each instruction is checked during programming 7 Stops ee 6504 enerion A same interrupt input or high speed counter input If a syntax error occurs correct the improper instruction in the p is used more than once program mode 4 6505 The device number is beyond the allowable range aa E 6506 An undefined instruction is used 3 O 6507 Label number P definition error T 6508 Interrupt input I definition error 6510 MC nesting number error 247 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 5 Errors 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC operation at error occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 0000 Noe Error code Contents of error times or more the number of LD or LDI instructions the number of LD or LDI instructions JE 5074 6075 6616 A coil is not used between MPS MRD and MPP or the relationship between them is improper The following instructions shoul
271. es an interrupt routine based on the comparison result obtained by the comparison set instruction for high speed counter DHSCS_1 Use these pointers for control which gives high priority to the counting result of high speed counters F X0S FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support counter interrupt pointers Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag 1010 1040 1020 M8059 1050 M8059 1030 1060 1 Cleared in FX3U FX3UC PLCs when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Operation Main program e Enable interrupts after the El instruction and then describe the main program e Drive the coil of a high speed counter OUT C 32 and specify an interrupt pointer in the EN ENO DHSCS _ instruction RUN CC255 CCoil monitor K2147483647 e When the current value of C255 changes DHSCS_ from 999 to 1000 or from 1001 to EN ENO 1000 the PLC executes the interrupt routine For use examples of interrupt program refer to the above description of input interrupt pointers Interrupt pointer number is specified Interrupt program Event 1010 Z When counter interrupt is specified Interrupt routine Interrupt program 123 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa sioug Q Jo Bunjes pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3
272. es fee PTASIA An Anek MEON ag provided Write protect switch and there is an area FX3U FLROM 1M 64000 Flash memory 10000 times 1300 kB dedicated to the storage of symbolic information 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo ODUM O 0o O Model name FX3U FX3UC 7 5S PRUFLRONN 7 4 3 g 1 Supported in Ver 2 20 or later 8 2 Supported in Ver 3 00 or later D lt 4 2 FX3S FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Model name Maximum number Menen Nog Allowable number Remake of steps ry typ of times of writing FX3G EEPROM 32L 32000 EEPROM memory 10000 times A id Swie Ang loaner ineton arg Model name FX3G FX3GC FXx3s 5S O n VAS 1 The FX3s Series PLC can hold 16 000 steps of memory but user program capacity is limited to 4 000 253 steps 23 3 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Maximum number Allowable number Model name Memory type ve Remarks of steps of times of writing FX EEPROM 4 4000 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided EX1N EEPROM 8L EEPROM 40000 times Write protect switch and loader function are 8000 provided FX EEPROM 8 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX EEPROM 16 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided emia ania EEPROM 10000 times with extension function 16000 suojoun4 24o N FX2NC EEPROM 16 EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided Ne MNO EEPROM 10000 times Write protect switch is provided with clock EEPROM 10000 times FX2NC ROM CE
273. esPonding special device High speed counter comparison high speed table and positioning D 8130 HSZ instruction High speed comparison table counter a ee ee ee ae M8130 D 8131 HSZ and PLSY instructions Speed pattern table counter See M8132 D 8132 Low order HSZ and PLSY instructions M8132 D 8133 Speed pattern frequency D 8134 HSZ and PLSY instructions M8132 D 8135 High order Number of target pulses for speed pattern Number and name Content of register SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 D 8136 PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated total number of pulses output to D 8137 Y000 and Y001 ee jue SuoD 9 39 oO WM O 49 oe n 4 gt a E r iq D 8138 D18139 Unavailable PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated number of pulses output to YOOO or current address of YOOO when a positioning instruction is used D 8140 Low order D 8141 High order PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated number of pulses output to YOO1 or current address of Y001 when a positioning instruction is used D 8144 Unavailable D 8145 Ti DRVI and DRVA instructions Bias speed initial value D 8146 Low order order ZRN DRVI and DRVA instructions Maximum Low order ZRN e FX1S FX1N PLCs 100000 initial value e FX1NC PLCs 100000 initial value D 8142 Low order eloeds D 8143 High order sioug Q D 8147 High order ZRN DRVI and DRVA instructions Accel
274. esponding to C235 OUT_C_32 X60 OUT C 32 EN ENO CCoil CValue Program a contact which is normally ON during counting If the operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device equipped with a contact such as simulation switch the counter may malfunction due to noise generated by chattering of the switch The input filter of input terminals in the PLC main unit used for high speed counters are automatically set as follows FX3uU FX3uUC PLCs 5 us X000 to X005 or 50 us X006 and X007 FX3G FX3GC PLCs 10 us X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50 us X002 and X005 to X007 FX3S PLC 10 us X000 and X001 or 50 us X002 to X007 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 20 us X000 and X001 or 50 us X002 to X005 FX0S F X0 F XON FXU FX2c PLCs 50 us X000 to X003 or X005 Accordingly it is not necessary to use the REFF instruction or special data register D8020 input filter adjustment The input filter of input relays not used for high speed counters remain 10 ms initial value Inputs X000 to X007 X003 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD DSZR DVIT ZRN instructions and general purpose inputs Make sure to use each input terminal only once For example when C251 is used X000 and X001 are occupied As a result C235 C236 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interrupt pointers 100 and 110 pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD instruction using X000 and or X001 cannot
275. esscecceeseccecseeseceseseeeeseeuseeesseeeeeessaseeeress 128 32 3 Constant E real n umbDer cieta tS fate nes erence cad aa a a D O DeO ial 128 3 3 Character Strin GS assisas a aA a 129 3 3 1 Character string constant ABC ccccccccsssseecceeseeeeceesseecceeeceesseuseeecsussessseuseeessseeesssaseress 129 3 3 2 Character string dataserie det eno ee ee ee E 129 3 4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices KNO cc ceceeessseeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeseeneeseesneeseeaenenes 131 3 5 Specification of Bit for Word Device DOLD cece ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesaneseaaeeseaneesenees 132 3 6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory UONGO cece eeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeees 132 SL IGG XING eivi a e aao A aaa 133 Sell indexing in Hasic INSTUCIONS ripiene a a a Aa 133 S2 Maex IT AMS TOCOS ean A a a a 134 3 7 3 Indexing example for instructions whose number of times of use is restricted c ceeceee 137 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 138 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later an snnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 138 4 1 1 Special auxiliary relays M8000 and later cc eeccceccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeessaaeeeeseaas 138 4 1 2 Special data registers D8000 and later ec cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeesseeeeeeaas 177 4 2 Supplement of Special D
276. evice numbers inside in the Applicable model column 2 Available in Ver 2 00 or later D 8219 to D 8259 208 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 3 FXoS FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Applicable model SUI NO 09q _ Number and name Content of register j g FXOS Exon FXU FX2c Corresponding FXO special device PLC status 2 The initial value is shown on the right Unit 1 ms Transferred gg from the system ROM when the PLC power is turned ON D mai The value overwritten by a program is valid after the END or g Watchdog timer y a prog a WDT instruction was executed Refer to Subsection 4 2 2 D 8001 2 Om Value converted into BCD Oo PLC type and system version enon Version 1 00 Q se on the right aS 2 2K st 3 9B D 8002 sa pena a 4K steps 8K steps Type of the built in memory type of the RAM EEPROM and EPROM memory cassettes and ON OFF status of the write protect switch Protect Memory Ype switch D 8003 Memory type Optional RAM memory Optional EPROM memory Optional EEPROM memory Memory built in PLC RAM built in PLC D 8004 sfolelo Memory capacity eloeds sioug Q Error M number 7 6 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON Me Unit 0 1 V 258 D 8005 sto To Battery voltage Current value
277. evices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 216 4 2 1 RUN monitor and initial pulse M8000 to M8003 cee ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaeees 216 42 2 Watchdog timer time DS000 acc oe dn on ae e aa 217 4 2 3 Low battery voltage detection M8005 and M8006 ccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeessaeeeeeaees 217 4 2 4 Power interruption detection time D8008 M8008 and M8007 cece ecceeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeees 218 4 2 5 Operation cycle scan time monitor D8010 to D8012 ccc cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeas 219 4 26 Internal clock M8011 10 M80 IA a holes snot ened edhe eee ae se 219 4 2 7 Real time clock M8015 to M8019 and D8013 to D8019 ec cececeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseneeeeeeas 220 42 6 How toset Feal tIMeG ClOCK seoed idoia ia aa a Hide ace ata ata deats 221 4 2 9 Input filter adjustment D8020 D8021 ec cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeaaas 223 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Table of Contents 4 2 10 Battery BATT BAT LED OFF command M8030 cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeees 228 4 2 11 Built in analog variable potentiometers D8030 D8031 D8013 ec cecceeeeeeeeeeeae ees 230 4 2 12 Clear command M8031 and M8032 cccccssscccsssceeceeceesenseecsuseecsueeecsuacecsuseessueessuseeeseues 231 4 2 13 Memory hold stop M8033 Ou
278. f counters 2 6 8 Counters execute counting by cyclic operation for contact operations of signals X Y M S C etc inside the PLC For example when X011 is used for counting input its ON duration and OFF duration should be longer than the scan time of the PLC which is several tens Hz or less usually On the other hand high speed counters described later execute counting as an interrupt processing for specific input and can execute counting at several kHz without regard to the scan time For high speed counters refer to Section 2 7 Counters handled as numeric devices Counters use output contacts which operate in accordance with the set value or use the count value current value as numeric data for control The figures below show the structure of current value registers of counters When a counter number is specified in an input variable of an instruction the counter is handled as a device which stores 16 bit or 32 bit data in the same way as data registers A 32 bit counter is handled as 32 bit data 59 gJ D O D O D 9q Ul S9149 OO jUue SUOD 9 qd y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 1 Structure of the current value register of a counter 1 16 bit High order K ___ 16 bit _
279. fied for the ZRST instruction only a part of latched type devices can be cleared at a time Program example This program clears latched battery backed up type devices in the ranges shown in the table below in the FX3U and FX3uc PLCs Clear input M500 M7679 S500 4095 T246 T255 C100 C199 C220 C255 D200 D7999 Auxiliary relay State relay Timer Counter Data register Latched backed up device range M500 to M7679 S500 to 84095 T246 to T255 C100 to C199 C220 to C255 D200 to D7999 For details on latched backed up type devices refer to Subsection 1 2 2 34 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 1 Device Number List 2 Devices in Detail gJ D O D O D This chapter explains how numeric values are handled in the PLC as well as the roles and functions of various built in devices including I O relays auxiliary relays state relays counters and data registers The following contents provide a basis for handling the PLC 9q Ul S9149 2 1 Device Number List OO Device numbers are assigned in the FX3u and FX3uc PLCs as shown below i a i i p OUD The assignment varies depending on each PLC For details refer to the reference section Seg For input relay numbers and output relay numbers when I O extension equipment and special extension a 8S equipment are connecte
280. for calculating total frequency Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum counter DHSCS DHSCR Total response response response response uenc DHSZ or DHSCT frequency frequency frequency frequency E y instruction kHz kHz kHz Eno x1 10 p10 40 Num 30 Num ber of times ber of times n S o C247 C248 of ae 80 1 5x of ms 60 1 5 x input C249 C250 se see Number of mie ee Number tions times of tions of times of using using 30 instruc instruc tions tions C251 C253 40 Num 30 Num ber of times ber of times x4 10 7 5 of using of using instruc instruc tions 4 tions 4 When index registers are added to a counter number specified by the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT instruction all hardware counters switch to software counters 2 High speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP can count at up to 10 kHz 84 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C e When special analog adapters and FX3U 3UC Series special function blocks units are connected Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used When DHSZ and When both DHSZ and DHSCT instructions Sey ony Bae A eu Dhe DHSCT instructions instruction is used instruction is used are not used are used Counter type Following software counter Magnification for calculating total frequency Software combined with Maximum counter DHSCS DHSCR
281. g Error item OFF STOP to RUN M8060 I O configuration error Checked Checked During operation During operation M8061 PLC hardware error Checked a cr Le When PLC receives signal from PP M8062 PLC PP error M8063 Link communication error Le M8064 Parameter error When program is changed STOP M8065 Syntax error Checked Checked When program is transferred STOP M8066 Circuit error When PLC receives signal from counterpart station M8067 Operation error During operation M8068 Operation error latch 264 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs 5 3 2 Error Code List and Action PLC Error operation code at error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 Head unconnected I O device number Contents of error Action Example When X020 is unconnected Value converted into BCD Example Continues oS o Devi Unconnected I O relay numbers are programmed fos operation Sice EE The PLC continues its operation j 1 Input X 0 Output Y Modify the program if necessary e 1st to 3rd digits Device number e Ath digit I O type 1 Input X 0 Output Y Example When D8060 stores 1020 inputs X20 and later are unconnected PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 6102 Ban A Confirm that extension cables are connected correctly 265 jue suoD SJ J WELJEd UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo 9 qd y paijioe
282. g Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 5 FX0S FX0 F XoN FXuU FX2c PLCs 1 2 1 12 Types of program memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Parameter Does not change Sequence program Does not change Comment Can be secured by Does not change File register parameter setting Does not change Types of word device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP x 7 Does not change Cleared enera e CI d a v5 Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type Does not change 2 Data register D File type Does not change A Set to initial i Special type Cleared 4 Does not change value gt Set to initial x Index register V and Z V Z Cleared Aua Does not change value Does not change Cleared For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON EE NE Saas Bisaiea Does not change Cleared register T Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change 2 Does not change Cleared General type Cleared EE E E E Does not change while M8033 is ON register C Latched backed up type Does not change 2 High speed type Does not change 2 Clock data Does not change Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN M8074 is backed up against power interruption The device status is not
283. g Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX0S EXon FXu FX2c COrresPonding FXO special device Special adapter D 8120 Communication format setting marrage D 8121 Station number Station number setting Gacahils D 8122 2 Number of remaining send data points in RS 232C Le ieee M8122 communication D 8123 2 Number of received data points in RS 232C communication ee Fed Bad al M8123 D 8124 Header 8 bits lt Initial value STX gt sees ieee are ae D 8125 Terminator 8 bits lt Initial value FTX gt Ferment 927 O 1 Backed up against power interruption 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 3 Available in Ver 1 20 or later 4 Available in Ver 3 07 or later 5 Available in Ver 3 30 or later Number and name Content of register 214 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX0S EXon FXu FX2c Corresponding FXO special device Number and name Content of register High speed table D 8131 HSZ and PLSY instructions Speed pattern table counter l e vere M8132 DRE un ontnenteny A D 8133 Erara pattern frequency PEE ra oer Nuna o
284. g and installation of the PLC main unit FX3s extracted from the FX3s FX3S Series Hardware Manual JY997D48301 Supplied with product Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3s Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Exa Sere Weare Nania Details about the hardware including I O a JY997D48601 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and O9R535 Hardware Edition maintenance of the FX3S PLC main unit Programming Details about the analog special function block FX3s FXs6 FXsec FXsu FXsuc User s JY997D16701 Additional Manual FX3U 4AD FX3u 4DA FX3uc 4AD and analog 09R619 Manual Analog Control Edition special adapter FX3u ADP FX Series User s Manual Data Details about simple N N link parallel link Ha z JY997D16901 Additional Manual computer link and no protocol communication 09R715 Communication Edition RS instruction and FX2N 232IF FX3s FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3uc Series er ae Explains the MODBUS serial communication User s Manual MODBUS Serial JY997D26201 Additional Manual network in EX38 EX3G EX3Gc FX3u EX3uc PLCs Communication Edition FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U F X3UC Series a Details about the positioning function built in the User s Manual Positioning Edition aan poo paditonal Manvel FX3S F X3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series ee FX3U CF ADP User s Manual jvoozpesaon AdditonalMiania e ee CE cag 09R720 special adapter FX1S FX1N FXiNC PLCs FX2N FX2NC
285. g the following choices e Read Write Protection e Write Protection e All Online Operation Protection suojoun4 JeyjQ N For selecting the protection level select Keyword Protection 16 digits Function Selection and set Permanent PLC Lock Protection Level 1 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 2 Available in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 61 or later and all FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs 3 Click the Execute button to register the keywords to the PLC If Permanent PLC Lock is selected clicking the Execute button opens the following dialog box Click the OK button to register the keywords to the PLC MELSOFT Application When protection is deleted a Memory Clear is required PUN The program will be deleted Do vou want to continue cancel 281 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 5 Keyword Writing a program to a PLC in which the keywords are registered 1 Select Online Write to PLC to open the Input Current keyword dialog box 2 Input the keyword protection 8 digits keyword protection 16 digits and customer keyword currently registered in the PLC Input Current Keyword That keyword is registered Processing cannot be done Input the current keyword Close Keyword When using an 2 digit keyword please input the first 8 digits only Set item Contents of setting Rem
286. gramming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8299 e FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Operation and function Number Z 2 FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP 1st analog special adapter D 8260 Ch1 Input data Ch1 Output setting data Input data Ch1 D 8261 Ch2 Input data Ch2 Output setting data Input data Ch2 D 8262 Ch3 Input data Ch3 Output setting data Output data D 8263 Ch4 Input data Ch4 Output setting data Not used Ch1 Number of times of Number of averaging times D 8264 averaging 1 to 4095 Mot useddizabied for Ch1 1 to 4095 Ch2 Number of times of Number of averaging times penne averaging 1 to 4095 Nor neod leaned for Ch2 1 to 4095 Ch3 Number of times of D 8266 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used Ch4 Number of times of D 8267 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used D 8268 Error status Error status Model code K50 D 8269 2nd analog special adapter Model code 1 Model code 2 D 8270 Ch1 Input data Ch1 Output setting data Input data Ch1 D 8271 Ch2 Input data Ch2 Output setting data Input data Ch2 D 8272 Ch3 Input data Ch3 Output setting data Output data D 8273 Ch4 Output setting data Not used van eae a bare OR Non Tina om C
287. gure shows an example of FX3U PLC sink input RUN STOP Pav Tov os x00 xoor PLC M8000 M8035 Forced RUN mode M8036 Forced RUN input X001 Forced STOP input Write the above program in the PLC in advance Setting method 1 Fix the built in RUN STOP switch on the STOP side 2 Specify the RUN switch input X X000 is specified in the above circuit diagram example Enable the external RUN STOP input and specify one input among X000 to X017 for the RUN input signal a Open the parameter setting dialog box in the programming tool In GX Works2 double click Parameter PC parameter in the project view to display the parameter setting dialog box Click the PC system 1 tab and set RUN terminal input b Specify the input number X to switch the PLC from the STOP mode to the RUN mode 3 Specify the STOP switch input X Specify an arbitrary input terminal actual I O in the PLC in a sequence program Refer to the above program 4 Transfer the program and parameters to the PLC 5 Power OFF the PLC once and then power it ON again to enable the parameter setting Cautions 1 When both the RUN switch and the STOP switch are pressed at the same time the priority is given to the STOP switch 2 When the built in RUN STOP switch is set to RUN in the STOP mode the PLC enters the RUN mode However note that the STOP command has the priority over the built in switch For giving the
288. h2 Station number setting RS2 ch2 Number of remaining send data points RS2 ch2 Monitoring of number of received data points Unavailable Communication parameter display ch2 Unavailable Computer link ch2 On demand head number specification v Computer link ch2 On demand data quantity specification RS2 instruction ch2 and computer link ch2 Timeout time RS2 ch2 Headers 1 and 2 lt lnitial value STX gt RS2 ch2 Headers 3 and 4 RS2 ch2 Terminators 1 and 2 lt lnitial value ETX gt RS2 ch2 Terminators 3 and 4 RS2 ch2 Receive sum received data L a RS2 ch2 Receive sum calculation result RS2 ch2 Send sum Unavailable Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP M8426 t Corresponding special device M8402 M8403 M8422 M8423 o M8429 193 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed Jo Bunjes pue sedk suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register i 2 FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc FX3s Corresponding special device MODBUS serial communication an Magia to MODBUS serial communication Manual for details p sao eanmonstentont O ATAA pa Pome A E
289. h4 Number of times of D 8277 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used D 8278 Error status Error status D 8279 Model code 1 Model code 2 3rd analog special adapter Error status Model code K50 D 8280 Ch1 Input data Ch1 Output setting data Input data Ch1 D 8281 Ch2 Input data Ch2 Output setting data Input data Ch2 D 8282 Ch3 Input data Ch3 Output setting data Output data D 8283 Ch4 Input data Ch4 Output setting data Not used oe eee or OMI 1to4005 P8285 averaging 1 10 4098 or CRZ ito 4005 Dazs a Notre T D 8287 a of Not used disabled Not used D 8288 Error status D 8289 Model code 2 4th analog special adapter D 8290 Input data Ch D8297 input data Ch2 D8292 Output data Ch 4 Ch4 Inputdata o data Ch4 Output setting data Not used D 8294 Ke Number of times of e E EA Number of averaging times averaging 1 to 4095 Error status Model code K50 D 8293 for Ch1 1 to 4095 Ch2 Number of times of Number of averaging times peed averaging 1 to 4095 Sees Ce eb ed for Ch2 1 to 4095 Ch3 Number of times of D 8296 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used Ch4 Number of times of D 8297 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used D 8298 Error status Error status D 8299 Model code 1 Model code 2 Model code K50 1 In the case of FX3uc PLC versions 1 20 or later are applicabl
290. he END instruction is executed after M8398 turned ON Number and name Content of register 192 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name RS2 instruction ch1 Refer to the data communication manual for details D 8400 D 8401 D 8402 D 8403 D 8404 D 8405 D 8406 D 8407 D 8408 D 8409 D 8410 D 8411 D 8412 D 8413 D 8414 D 8415 D 8416 D 8417 D 8418 D 8419 RS2 instruction ch2 and computer link ch2 Refer to the data communication manua D 8420 D 8421 D 8422 1 D 8423 D 8424 D 8425 D 8426 D 8427 D 8428 D 8429 D 8430 D 8431 D 8432 D 8433 D 8434 D 8435 D 8436 D 8437 f Applicable model FX3U FX3UC FX3G FX3GC FX3S Dig ee RS2 ch1 Number of remaining send data points E Le i 2 S ey a ee S Content of register Unavailable RS2 ch1 Timeout time setting RS2 ch1 Headers 1 and 2 lt Initial value STX gt RS2 ch1 Headers 3 and 4 RS2 ch1 Terminators 1 and 2 lt Initial value ETX gt RS2 ch1 Terminators 3 and 4 RS2 ch1 Receive sum received data E k RS2 ch1 Receive sum calculation result RS2 ch1 Send sum Unavailable Operation mode display ch1 fo gt details RS2 ch2 Communication format setting Computer link c
291. he ON OFF status of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 76 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 7 4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value 1 Current value update timing A high speed counter executes up counting or down counting when a pulse is input to its input terminal but the current value of the high speed counter is updated at the timing shown in the table below When the current value of a high speed counter is used as it is in the MOV instruction CMP instruction or applied instruction for data comparison etc the current value update timing is affected by scans as shown in the table gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq Current value update timing Hardware counter When OUT or HCMOV instruction is executed for counter Software counter When counting input is given OO 2 Comparison of the current value F The following two methods are available to compare and output the current value of a high speed counter 2g S Some instructions are not supported in some PLCs a Refer to the FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction a 1 Using the comparison instruction CMP zone comparison instruction ZCP or data comparison instruction 4 When the comparison result is not necessary during counting operation comparison may be smoothly Y executed in the main program if the
292. he power supply line Stops If the ERROR ERR LED does not turn OFF even after the above operation actions are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 6103 I O bus error while M8069 is ON Verify that extension cables are correctly connected 6104 24V failure in function unit while M8069 is ON 6105 Watchdog timer error The sampling scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 Check the program 24V DC power failure has occurred in a function unit when the power is turned ON The 24V DC power is not supplied for 10 seconds or 6106 I O table creation error CPU error more after the power is turned ON I O assignment to the CC Link LT built in the FX3UC 32MT LT LT 2 is disabled when the power is turned ON 245 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs Error code PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error Action PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 6107 6112 6113 6114 6115 Check the number of connected special function units blocks Some System configuration error bec special function units blocks have a connection number limit Changed settings for the built in CC Link LT special function block cannot be written to the attached flash Verify that the memory cassette is installed correctly memory cassette Changed settings for the built in CC Link LT special function block cannot be written to th
293. he scan time in the PLC does not become shorter than the value stored in D8039 If the operation is finished earlier the PLC pauses for the remaining time and then returns to the step No 0 Ww 1 Program example 8 D M8000 T Constant scan mode RUN monitor j The constant scan time is set to 20 ms D8039 sioug Q 2 Cautions 1 When using an instruction which is executed in synchronization with a scan a When using the RAMP HKY SEGL ARWS or PR instruction 6 It is recommended to use the constant scan mode or turn ON the scan with a constant time interval SS using timer interrupts 33 b When using the HKY instruction goa It is necessary to set the scan time to 20 ms or more because of the response relay caused by the key input filter 2 Scan time display D8010 to D8012 T In FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N F X2NC F X3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U F X3UC PLCs the constant scan time is included in the scan time display stored in D8010 to D8012 z In FXoS FX0 F XON F XU FX2c PLCs the constant scan time is not included in the scan time display stored in D8010 to D8012 4 2 17 State control in program by STL instruction M8040 When M8040 is set to ON the state relay ON status is not transferred even if the transfer condition is satisfied Outputs in the stopped state relay continue operation For resetting outputs in state relays refer to the FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction
294. he upper line transposes the upper line jo Bujes pue sedi SJ J WELJEd Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line transposes the lower line Special Function Block This button displays the Special Module Initial Setting dialog box for the Setting Setting selected unit number E Refer to the next page This button deletes the setting of the selected unit number This button deletes all current setting in the Special Function Block Delete All P ce Setting field Read PLC This button reads the current setting in the Special Function Block Setting suooun4 2yo N Data field from the connected PLC Built in CC Link LT OEN a Setting Setting This button displays the Built in CC Link LT Setting dialog box 1 Check in advance the check box Special Function Block Settings on the Memory Capacity tab 2 Check in advance the check box Built in CC Link LT Settings on the Memory Capacity tab This item can be set only in the FX3uc 32MT LT 2 289 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 2 On the Special Function Block Settings dialog box set the initial values of the selected special function block unit On the Special Function Block tab select the unit number and click the Setting button to display the Special Function Block Settings dialog box The Special Fu
295. hown in combinations of V and Z in the left figure Even if 20 low order side VO to V7 on the high order side is specified indexing is not executed V1 high order side Z1 low order side When index registers are specified as a 32 bit device both V high order side and Z low order side are referred to at the same time If a numeric value used for another purpose remains in V high order 3 low order side side consequently the numeric value here becomes extremely large and an operation error occurs V2 high order side Z2 low order side V3 high order side NIIN V4 high order side Z4 low order side V5 high order side Z5 low order side Example of writing data to 32 bit index registers V6 high order side Z6 low order side V7 high order side Z7 low order side Even if an index value used in a 32 bit instruction does not exceed the 16 bit numeric range use a 32 bit operation instruction such as DMOV for writing a numeric value to Z as shown above so that both V high order side and Z low order side are overwritten at the same time K300 gt V2 Z2 Indexing of devices Available devices and contents of indexing are as described below For indexing method and cautions refer to Section 3 7 Decimal devices and numeric values M S T C D R KnM KnS P and K For example when VO K5 is specified and D20V0 is executed an instruction is executed for the device number D25 D20
296. ic values used as operands in instructions Example H1234 When a number in the range from 0 to 9 is used in every digit BCD data can be specified because the status of each bit 1 or 0 is equivalent to the BCD code Example When specifying BCD data for H1234 specify each digit of the hexadecimal number using 0 to 9 he hexadecimal constant specification range is as follows When word data 16 bits is usede HO to HFFFF HO to H9999 in the case of BCD data When double word data 32 bits is used HO to HEFFFFFFF HO to H99999999 in the case of BCD data 3 2 3 Constant E real number E indicates a real number floating point data and is mainly used to specify numeric values used as operands in instructions Example E1 234 or E1 234 3 The real number setting range is from 1 0 x 2 28 to 1 0 x 27178 0 1 0 x 27128 to 1 0 x 2148 In sequence programs a real number can be specified in two methods normal expression and exponent expression Normal expression e Specify a numeric value as it is For example specify 10 2345 in the format E10 2345 Exponent expressiones s Specify a numeric value in the format Numeric value x 10 For example specify 1234 in the format E1 234 3 3 in E1 234 3 indicates 10 FX0S F X0 F XON F X1S FX1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N F X2NC PLCs do not support real numbers E In FX3G PLCs this function is support in Ver 1 10 and later 128 FXCPU S
297. icates areas used by the system 2 The accessibility is restricted depending on the keyword setting status 3 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 4 Available in Ver 3 00 or later For details refer to Chapter 5 Simple N N link setting Refer to the data communication manual for details pr a ORT ES I EE peT PeT ORT per wan oooO O e 186 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Content of register SUI NO 09q _ Index register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 Opt Vawe ot registerzt EP ee Te 2 Dai yawes TP Pe T D 8184 Value of register Z2 Ss S n 5 lt S C D18185 A T 2 a a D18186 eee SS E ees E D 8187 Value of register V3 D 8188 Value of register Z4 D 8189 Value of register V4 D 8190 Value of register Z5 D 8191 Value of register V5 D 8192 Value of register Z6 D 8193 Value of register V6 D 8194 Value of register Z7 K 5 RRRRE 5 As As EDERERERERR Bl a el ON el ll SIS RE Ue SUOD 9 d y payjioeds JH i S s SIS lt S Ja lt S k EERE beak Dar g 2 ee eea a D 8197 l y Unavailable 5 D 8198 p ati eee 5 Simple N N link Refer to the data communication
298. ication for calculaung Calculated value frequency total frequency Not required to be added Not required to be added 60kHz because C235 is handled as eas C235 is handled as hardware sha hardware counter soug QI Handled as hardware C235 1 phase esuniey PLSYIVO a eeo ez 6 Pulse output instruction Ee Ce E a oe aes Total frequency 20 kHz a2 p Sum of processing frequency 3 kHz 4 kHz 7 kHz 4 kHz 18 kHz 2 Sum of processing frequency 18 kHz lt Total frequency 20 kHz Q 5 89 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 6 In FXuU FX2c PLCs The maximum response frequency of high speed counters C235 to C255 is generally as follows when the DHSCS and DHSCR instructions are not used or not driven Sum of frequency of 1 phase counters Sum of frequency of 2 phase counters x 4 lt 20 kHz maximum However the actual maximum response frequency varies depending on used counters and DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ instructions The table below shows the maximum response frequency of each counter Do not exceed the values shown below Each value indicates the maximum response frequency of one high speed counter Combination of Numberof1 Number of 2 wii pHscs DHSCR and high speed hase counters hase counters i When one or two DHSZ p p i DHSZ instructions are not DHSCS DHSCR i driven driven f instructions are driven counters used or n
299. ide the allowable setting range en E Continues g range 2 Check the contents of D8336 interrupt signal specification for F operation the DVIT instruction g lt The pulse output number is already used in a Q Confirm that the pulse output destination is not driven by another 6764 positioning instruction or pulse instruction PLSY PEA positioning instruction PWM etc Tue number of times of using applied instructions Confirm that the number of times an applied instruction is used in the 6765 Ea a m exceeds the limit program does not exceed the limit z When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted a correctly 6770 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 6 6771 The memory cassette is not connected Confirm that the memory cassette is attached correctly VAS The write protect switch of the memory cassette was set to ON when z QS 6772 Data write error to the memory cassette data was transferred to the flash memory Set the protect switch to 32 P OFF T 2 wn Access error to the memory cassette in the RUN While data was written in the RUN mode data was transferred to mode read from or written to the memory cassette USB communication error M8487 D8487 7 Communication character error O 8703 Communication data sum check error Confirm the
300. imer interrupt 18 disable M 8059 4 Counter interrupt disable 4 Disables transfer between states Enables transfer from the initial state during automatic VY y y f operation Gives pulse output in response to start input Should be set to ON in the zero return mode end state Should be set to ON when the machine zero point is detected Remains ON while M8047 is ON and either state relay shown in the right is ON a to E to a to o to me to M8047 127 S999 S899 S999 S899 Enables M8040 to D8047 D8040 to D8047 Remains ON while M8049 is ON and either one among y y S900 to S999 is ON M8048 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Activated when the END instruction is executed State relays S128 to S999 are backed up by the capacitor in FX1N FX1NC PLCs If the backup period expires the status of these state relays is not held correctly In this case M8046 may turn ON v When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer interrupt is ON Even if an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while acceptance of the corresponding interrupt is disabled the interrupt program is not executed For example when the interrupt 100 is given while M8050 is ON to disable the interrupt I0001 the interrupt program is not executed even within the interrupt
301. in 16 bit and 32 bit operation instructions in the same way as data registers 1 16 bit type One extension register consisting of 16 bits can handle a numeric value within the range from 32768 to 32767 High order kK _ RO ERO 16 bit type t 3 Low order ps O11 0 1 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 14 0 1 TNODTNOATNODOTNS Sign SSSHarer O pak oO O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq 38 0 Positive Oo rN 3 1 Negative 998 A numeric value is usually read from and written to an extension register by an instruction a SS Or a numeric value can be read and written directly from a display unit display module or programming A 90 8 tool D 2 32 bit type Two serial extension registers can express a 32 bit numeric value within the range from 2 147 483 648 4 to 2 147 483 647 An extension register having a larger number handles high order 16 bits and an D extension register having a smaller number handles low order 16 bits 8 High order K __ R1 ER1 High order 16 bits gt k RO ERO Low order 16 bits 3 Low order g 34 LOLt101 11011 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 o o o 1 1 1 1 o olojo o TN ODMDTFTNODATNODYNOATNOATNODATANODATANS sin JI BRESSSSSLRILSSISSAIRE 5 0 Positive o ONO Y N OTR OTN NONoOOTN KS fi 1 Negative To FNEL N ALSS ALIOS 3 Mo norreaon Oo orn T e Inthe case of 32 bit data when an extension register on the low order side Ex
302. ing or up counting d CC244 OUmmers2 EN ENO CCoil CValue Operation example The counter C235 shown above operates as follows While X012 is ON C235 counts OFF gt ON of the input X000 When X011 turns ON and then the RST instruction is executed C235 is reset The counting direction of counters C235 to C245 is switched to down counting or up counting when M8235 to M8245 turns ON or OFF While X012 is ON C244 immediately starts counting when the input X006 turns ON The counting input is X000 In this example the set value is indirectly specified as the contents of data registers D1 DO The high speed counter C244 can be reset using X011 in a sequence as shown in the figure but it is immediately reset without any program when X001 is closed In this case any program including X011 is not necessary The counting direction of counters C235 to C245 is switched to down counting or up counting when M8235 to M8245 turns ON or OFF X010 Up counting Down counting Up counting X011 Reset input X012 Start input X000 Counting input 4 5 A orn an ad a Current 1 1 value Qj 0 0 ee er re ere eer ee een et aan nna 1 When output has been 3 7 473 already turned ON 5 5 5 5 7 7 RE E E 8 C235 output contact y When the counting input X000 is given C235 executes up counting or down counting as interrupt processing e When the current value of the counter increa
303. ing Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fx3s Corresponding special device RS instruction and computer link ch1 Refer to the data communication manual for details M 8121 1 RS instruction Send wait flag fe ee Wa ee ie Number and name Operation and function V V V V V M 8122 1 RS instruction Send request D8122 M 8123 RS instruction Receive complete flag D8123 M 8124 RS instruction Carrier detection flag P M 8126 Computer link ch1 Global signal ON y M 8127 Computer link ch1 On demand send being executed D8127 M 8128 Computer link ch1 On demand error flag v vV v v v D8128 E E E E a M 8129 Computer link ch1 On demand word byte changeover y 7 p y RS FNC 80 instruction Timeout check flag 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP or when the RS instruction is set to OFF High speed counter comparison and high speed table Wag PASZ instruction Table comparison compete 7 7 1133 HSZ instruction Tabie comparison competere 7 7 Wu is es oe d M18135 incite aan a a E We Pet pere to 1137 E A a Mere DHSCT insructon Instruction exeouion completes 7 7 bars per oeoc courier comparso merete songxa a speed counter comparison instruction being executed MeT
304. ing Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name PLC mode Applicable model FXOS EXON FXu FXoc Corresponding FXO special device Operation and function M 8030 Does not turn ON the battery LED on the PLC panel even if Battery LED OFF the battery voltage becomes low v v command Refer to Subsection 4 2 10 M 8031 Non latched memory all Clears the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and i dear clears the current value of T C and D to 0 Does not clear special D and file registers in the program M 8032 memory Latched memory all Refer to Subsection 4 2 11 v i clear M 8033 Holds the contents of the image memory and data memory Memory holding when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP v against STOP mode M 8034 All output disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Refer to Subsection 4 2 12 Set to OFF all external output contacts of the PLC VY P i Refer to Subsection 4 2 13 Only forced RUN When M8035 and M8036 are set to ON by M8000 and M8037 and forced is set to ON by XOO via a pushbutton the PLC mode can be STOP can be Forced RUN command Switched between RUN and STOP by two inputs RUN input executed using M 8037 Forced STOP command M 8038 RAM file register all clear M 8039 Constan
305. ink LT Settings 1 Block in the Memory capacity tab D O After writing parameter settings to the PLC settings become effective when the power is recycled o D BR 5 4 Canos Set item Contents of setting Setting range a O Select the transmission speed of the built in CC link LT among the following 2 choices Z Transmission Speed 2 5Mbps D 625kbps D 156kbps Select the point mode of the built in CC link LT between the following choices Point Mode 16 point mode 4 point mode Set the station number of the built in CC link LT Slalom No 1 to 64 can be set 5S O n Select the station type of the built in CC link LT among the following choices Remote I O Station Input Station Type Remote I O Station Output P Remote I O Station Input Output Remote device station a Os v o I O Points Select the number of points in the remote I O station or remote device station 1 to 16 32 48 64 2 ake rf ae n Delete Line This button deletes the currently selected line Read Buffer Memory This button reads out the transmission speed point mode and station information of the built in CC link LT suooun4 2yo N 1 Select the 16 point mode when using a remote device station Remote device stations cannot be set in the 4 point mode Available station numbers are 49 to 64 2 I O Points setting 32 48 and 64 are available only when Remote device station is selected as the station type
306. input counter for 4 edge counting refer to Subsection 2 7 8 70 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Input terminal assignment eer aon X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 c23 w wo a C237 sweet LO 88 SM ee i we S S O phase 239 oww Jo f S S dw y t counting 240 sw f f T S y y w O mpat fo o can ww wf R y S S O o O2 Sw J I w k _ u w mfr _ fs C245 S W U D i o e sw ujb f f 0 T O o am Y sw u D R f f ao Loe o ow eR input f o C24800P sw fJ f Svp ee o 0 sw ee Yf eR U U 2 counting e i nt caa w EEEREN EE C Ceon O Sw y ee eee l Ee d o S ital SUI INO 309g 3 09 jue SUOD 9 d y payloads a0inaq eloeds Aa B S sioug Q H W Hardware counters S W Software counters U Up counting input D Down counting input A Phase A input B Phase B input R External reset input S External start input 6 3 In FX3s PLC pes c N Classificati Input terminal assignment 33 a a S E E w fo e S e 7 z w o e SS 2 1 phase swt te toounting C24 ws ec ee z i cm Sw wR 3 n i S w EAA nout CAAOP SW OM a a poounting w EA input CIOP Sw o To OO O C O o C5 Sw O O O O O Pe d d l A O S H W
307. instruction is EAA executed such a change is invalid To make the change valid turn OFF the execution of the TKY instruction K0 gt V2 K16 gt VO K2 V1 K20 gt V2 DOV 1 XO00V0 Head device MOV2 number for data storage t Head device destination number for input data Head device number for key entry information 137 SUI INO 09q _ UU omy da q ep 2 9 309 jUue SUOD y palyioeds aoinag eads Aa sioug Q Jo Bunjes pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later This section explains types and functions of special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and special data registers indicated as special D in tables Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the PLC series even if the device number is same Do not use undefined and blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in sequence programs because they are occupied by the CPU Do not activate or write data to devices with brackets on the first character such as M 8000 and D 8001 in programs For supplementary information on special
308. ion and the NEXT instruction or between routine programs This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation 3 6702 The nesting level of CALL instruction is 6 or more Review the program or check the contents of operands used in instructions ooo 6703 The nesting level of interrupt is 3 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may 29 6704 The nesting level of FOR NEXT instructions is 6 or occur for the following reasons for example 3i D T more Example Di An unavailable device is used as an operand in an T2002 itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T200Z means a 6705 T300 which causes a device number error instruction The device number or data value of an operand in an 4 6706 ae instruction is outside the allowable range D A file register is accessed without its parameter 3 6707 ae setting This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation lt e Review the program or check the contents of operands used in instructions ome EE TO NSI eno e Confirm that the specified buffer memory exists in the counterpart Continues equipment operation e Confirm that extension cables are connected correctly 3 This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation z Review the program or check the contents of operands used in Other error absence of the IRET instruction Uraani a ee og Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may 6709
309. ion direction Built in memory or System RAM OFF BMOVP instruction memory cassette S M8024 execution Program memory direction reverse flag OFF Data memory Program Data register comment D1000 ae ata register ae Ple Wee ey A same file register number ae 7000 points A epee maximum e When X002 is set to ON while the BMOV instruction Data register execution direction reverse flag M8024 is OFF the contents of file registers in the area A in the program memory are transferred to the data register area B in the data memory as shown in the left figure Built in memory or System RAM Write memory cassette Program memory BMOVP instruction X001 Data M8024 execution direction memory reverse flag ON Program Data register comment D1000 F z i i ata register 500 points x File register g 14 blocks 7000 points A maximum Data register M8001 BMOVP instruction M8024 execution direction Always OFF reverse flag OFF during operation e When X003 is set to ON while the BMOV instruction execution direction reverse flag M8024 is ON the contents of data registers in the area B in the data memory are transferred to the file register area A in the program memory as shown in the left figure e When updating the contents of file registers using the same number register update function make sure that the file register number is equivalent between the input variable and the input
310. ion file registers ER in units of 2048 SAVER points 1 sector D lt D Use this instruction to store the contents of newly created 1 sector 2048 points to extension file registers ER i D S S 3 208 This instruction initializes extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 in units of 2048 points 1 sector INITR Use this instruction to initializes extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 before starting to log data using the LOGR instruction LOGR This instruction logs specified data and writes it to extension registers R and extension file registers ER 4 This transfer instruction writes the content of specified extension registers R to extension file registers ER and is I RWER supported in FX3UC PLCs Ver 1 30 or later 2 Use this instruction to store the contents of arbitrary extension registers R to extension file registers ER 2 lt This instruction initializes extension file registers ER in units of 2048 points 1 sector and is supported in FX3UC INITER PLCs Ver 1 30 or later Use this instruction to initialize extension file registers ER before executing the SAVER instruction 1 Extension file registers are accessible only while a memory cassette is attached e FX3G FX3GC PLCs sioug Q Instruction Description LOADR This transfer instruction reads the contents of extension file registers ER to extension registers R RWER This transfer instruc
311. ion is stored The count value in the subsequent operation can be added to the previous last count value 1 9q Ul S9149 e Every time the coil CO is driven by the counting input X011 the current value of the counter increases When a coil instruction is executed 10 times the output contact turns ON After that the current value of the counter does not change even if the counting input X011 turns ON When the reset input X010 turns ON and then the RST instruction is executed the current value of the OO OUWM counter is reset to 0 and the output contact turns OFF 2 22 A X010 RST X010 A EN ENO d co X011 10 4 8 D 7 8 Current 6 a value 5 i 4 D Alu 3 ai 2 ce set value constant 1 The set value can be 0 indirectly specified instead siouy QI e The counter set value can be set directly by a constant K as shown above or specified indirectly by a data register number For example when D10 is specified and the contents of D10 are 123 it is equivalent to K123 6 e If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by the MOV instruction etc the OUT SeS coil turns ON and the current value register becomes the set value when the next counting input is ake w received 2 a e Ina latched backed up type counter the current value output contact operation status and reset status of the counter are latched backed up by a battery EEPROM etc built in the PLC 7 For detail
312. is not provided The SRET or IRET instruction or interrupt is provided between the MC instruction and the MCR instruction The LD or LDI instruction is used continuously 9 The number of ANB or ORB instructions is more than The number of ANB or ORB instructions is less than Oo 6603 jUue SUOD 9 qd y payloads 6604 6605 aoinag eads Aa 6606 s3013 6607 This error occurs when a combination of instructions is incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of instructions is incorrect Correct the instructions in the program mode so that their mutual relationship becomes correct Stops operation pue s di jo Bujes 6608 SJ J WELJEd 6609 6610 6611 6612 suo oun4 2yo N 6613 6614 6615 MPS is used continuously 12 times or more MPS is not provided MPP is not provided A coil is not used between MPS MRD and MPP or the relationship between them is improper The following instructions should be connected to bus line STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND and END The following instructions which can be used only in the main program are used in any other place such as interrupt and subroutine STL MC and MCR The following instructions cannot be used between FOR and NEXT STL RET MC MCR I and IRET The nesting level between FOR and NEXT is too much 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 NEXT inst
313. ishes auto tuning and does not start PID The auto tuning transfer status is abnormal operation gt Data of a device which controls the transfer status is Confirm that devices occupied by the PID instruction are not overwritten abnormally overwritten in the program lt The PLC forcibly finishes auto tuning and does not start PID operation gt lt Limit cycle method gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary The result is abnormal due to excessive auto tuning Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and the measurement time lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set the input filter ton gt t ton lt 0 7 lt 0O constant a to a smaller value or set the PV threshold SHPv for auto tuning to a smaller value and then check whether the situation is improved lt The PLC finishes auto tuning KP 32767 and starts PID operation gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 for example so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning lt Limit cycle method gt The auto tuning result exceeds the proportional gain KP Outside the range from 0 to 32767 250 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC Error oper
314. jelosds 4 2 13 Memory hold stop M8033 Output holding in STOP mode When the special auxiliary relay M8033 is set to ON the output status in the RUN mode is held even if the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP soug QI 1 Program example Command input Output holding in STOP mode 6 D pa For example when a heater is driven by the PLC it is possible to stop the PLC while the heater and other 253 equipment are kept driven change the program an then restart the PLC again S23 4 2 14 All output disable command M8034 7 When M8034 is set to ON the output memory is cleared As a result contacts of all output relays are turned Q OFF and the PLC runs on the image memory D 1 Program example 8 Command input M8034 All outputs are disabled RUN mode on the image memory 231 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 15 Independent operation for RUN STOP input M8035 to M8037 When using external pushbutton switches to control the PLC s RUN STOP mode set the switches as shown below The PLC enters the RUN mode by one shot input of the RUN switch and enters the STOP mode by one shot input of the STOP switch In FXo FX0s FXON PLCs only a programming tool is available for switch between the RUN mode and the STOP mode Program example The left fi
315. k Refer to the data communication manual M 8038 Parameter setting Makes the PLC execute cyclic operations while keeping the scan time specified in D8039 D8039 Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 M 8039 Constant scan mode 1 Activated when the END instruction is executed 2 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 158 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc Corresponding special device Operation and function Step ladder and annunciator M 8040 Transfer disable M 8041 Transfer start M 8042 Start pulse M 8043 1 Zero point return complete M 80441 Zero point condition Disables reset of all outputs when the operation mode i All output reset disable switches M 8045 M 8046 2 3 STL state ON M 8047 2 STL monitoring enable M 8048 2 Annunciator ON M 8049 Annunciator enable A A ar 8 Interrupt disable M 80504 Input interrupt lOOL disable M 8051 4 Input interrupt 1100 disable M 80524 Input interrupt 1200 disable M 8053 4 Input interrupt I30L disable M 80544 Input interrupt 1400 disable M 8055 4 Input interrupt I500 disable M 8056 4 Timer interrupt I6 disable M 80574 Timer interrupt I7 disable M 8058 4 T
316. k ch2 Refer to the data communication manual for details D18439 O ey ae ae a Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details D18440 10 D18448 Unavailable ee oe D 8449 Special block error code Rae JCsZEa ea M8449 Dee Es se 2 Available in Ver 2 20 or later Positioning Refer to the positioning control manual for details D 8464 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y000 VY 3 J y VY M8464 Clear signal device specification D 8465 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y001 z 73 z Y J M8465 Clear signal device specification DSZR and ZRN instructions Y002 2 3 y ieee Clear signal device specification Pe a Mee D 8467 DSZR and ZRN instructions Y003 4 M8467 Clear signal device specification 3 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 4 Available only when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3u PLC Error detection D 8468 to D 8486 Unavailable lala fe Ts he 5 D 8487 USB error foe ee eae oe M8487 01048 M ee ee E D 8489 Error code for special parameter error M8489 T E a l 5 Available in Ver 3 10 or later 6 Available in Ver 2 00 or later 198 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 2 FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC PLCs Applicable model FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc Corresponding special device Number and name Content of register PL
317. keyword 16 digits keyword 8 digits and customer keyword is set The following operations are enabled in accordance with the selected protection level Access restriction Once the restriction is set it cannot be reset any more For resetting the restriction or for writing programs again to the PLC all clear the PLC memory Protection level Write Protection Read Write Protection All Online Operation Protection The following operations are enabled in accordance with the selected protection level Read It is not possible to cancel the keywords using the customer keyword Protection level Write Protection Read Write Protection All Online Operation Protection Protection level Write Protection Read Write Protection All Online Operation Protection Protection level Read Write Protection All operations are enabled Caution on selecting the permanent PLC lock e Once the restriction is set it cannot be reset any more For resetting the restriction or for writing programs again to the PLC all clear the PLC memory Caution on registering the keywords Read Read 8 E a a a ry a a Present value change vA v Present value change v v Present value change Present value change e The keywords are provided to restrict accesses from peripheral equipment to programs created by the user Carefully save and remember the keywords If the user forgets a registered keyword the onli
318. l 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T 3 Variable potentiometer type e Program for built in analog variable potentiometers Program values for built in analog variable potentiometers are stored in the following special data registers as numeric data within the range from 0 to 255 in accordance with the scale position Values received as numeric values can be specified as the indirectly specified value for a timer to provide variable potentiometer type analog timers Special data registers FX1S FX1N FX3S FX3G PLC e FX0S FXO PLC e FXON PLC VR1 D8030 D8013 VR1 D8013 D8030 VR2 D8031 VR2 D8031 Example of basic circuit Example of applied circuit M8000 X003 RUN monitor D8031 E DO K2 Value of D8031 VR2 x 2 0 to 25 5 sec Transferred to D1 DO Data register which stores an analog variable potentiometer value integer in range from 0 to 255 7 xo to 51 sec The set value range can be changed to 32 767 maximum by multiplying the contents of the data register by n Do not use D1 in other programs 1 FX3S 30MLIJ ELJ 2AD are not applicable to built in analog variable potentiometers e Program for analog variable potentiometers on function board Values of analog variable potentiometers which can be built in the PLC as a function board can be received as numeric data in the range from 0 to 255 in accordance with the scale position Values received as numeric values
319. l adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3uU FX3uc PLCs When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the table below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in the Operation and function column in the table below For details refer to the Analog Control Edition 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8299 e FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Operation and function Number z z x 1st analog special adapter M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 ne Output mode switching nA noted wo Not sed M 8266 Output hold mode cancel M 8267 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8268 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M8269 _ Not used disabled Sets whether or not output channel is used 2nd analog special adapter M 8270 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8271 Input mode switching Ch2 wear Output mode swing WET not sed V827 noted IZE noted M 8276 Not used disabled Ch3 Output hold mode reset Output hold mode cancel m m m Aa _ m M 8277 Not used disabled Ch4 Output hold mode reset Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8278 Not used disabled Not used disabled Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8279 Not used disabled Not used disabled Sets whether or not output channel is used 3rd analog
320. l device and index memory Cleared ae Does not change 1 value Does not change Cleared C Non latched type memory Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON 1 Some devices are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN A3 Backed up by capacitor 1 Types of program memory Comment Can be secured by A2 A2 a A2 A1 File register parameter setting A2 A2 zl A2 At 1 The battery is not used when an optional EEPROM or EPROM memory is attached 2 Types of word device memory Latched backed up type A2 A3 A2 A3 A1 Data register D a Counter current value AEG Latched backed up type A2 A3 A2 A3 A1 1 Attach a memory board having the clock function when the clock function is required in the FX2NC Series 28 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 3 Types of bit device memory T M General type o C relay M Latched backed up type A2 A3 AQIA3 AM Contact image memory ENAN Ba M ae type state i A2 A3 A2 A3 C SuI INC ed1Aeq 9q uiseoiieg N9 Latched backed up type ae relay a A2 A3 A2 A3 A1 3 QDU a E S S tt DSL Dii S Time counting coil i emee asa 4 Counter contact G ee E a E E x Counting coil Latched backed up type PAZ A2 A3 PAL A2 A3 A1 8 saat E CA ee ee a a 5 2 siouy QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N 29 FXCPU Structured Programmin
321. l floating point real number is handled by a pair of data registers having consecutive device numbers Different from binary floating point real number a data register having a smaller device number handles the mantissa part and the other data register having a larger device number handles the exponent part For example when data registers D1 and DO are used they handle decimal floating point as shown below Data can be written to DO and D1 by the MOV instruction SUI INC 09q UU omy oO q ep 2 Decimal floating point real number Mantissa D0 x 10 Exponent D1 Mantissa DO 1 000 to 9 999 or 0 Exponent D1 41 to 35 soe The most significant bit of DO and D1 specifies the positive or negative sign respectively and is handled as a two s complement respectively The mantissa DO does not allow 100 for example In the case of 100 it is handled as 1000 x 107 The decimal floating point real number handles the following range Minimum absolute value 1175 x 1041 03 aoinag eads Aa Maximum absolute value 3402 x 1 Number of significant figures The number of significant figures of decimal floating point is approximately 4 when expressed in the decimal notation Decimal floating point handles the above range sioug Q Decimal floating point real number is valid in the following instructions Conversion from binary floating point real number into decimal floating point real number
322. l frequency is calculated as follows because the DHSZ instruction is used 6 times Total frequency 80 1 5 x 6 71 kHz 2 The sum of the response frequency of used high speed counters is calculated as follows 30kHzx1 C237 20kHzx1 C241 4kHzx4 C253 OP 66kHz lt 71kHz Used instruction Used high speed counter No Maximum response frequency calculation tion x 6 times 85 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds a0inaq eloeds Aa sioug Q slo Oweled jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Counter type Overall frequency determined by condition of instructions used Response Software counter frequency When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ When DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is not used instruction is used C235 C236 C238 1 phase C239 C241 GUKPZ AEO DAA C240 C242 input j C243 C244 C245 10kHz 2 Sigs 4 1 phase C246 C248 OP 60kHz 200 kHz Number of positioned axes Number of E E Wee e 2 counting C247 C248 C249 j j 10kHz pulse width period measurement inputs x 40 kHz input 10250 2 phase C251 C253 OP 30kHz 2 counting C252 C253 C254 5kHz input C254 OP C255 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY PLSR DSZR DTBL ZRN PLSV
323. l of the comment capacity and the file register capacity is limited to 12000 steps 24 blocks The comment capacity is automatically set when the file register capacity is set 285 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 Setting devices The Device tab is available only in FXu FX2c FX2N FX2NC FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 1 Click the Device tab and set devices FX Parameter Latch Start Latch Setting End Range Sym Dig Points Start End Supplemental Relay m 10 0 0 1023 State o 4096 of 4095 500 999 oro Timer io siz of E S SC Counter 16bit fio 200 of 19 00 199 ori Counter 32bit o se 2 2s5 220 20s 00 258 Data Register io eooo ofj 7999 2o suj o su Extended Register Pio fez of aver OO Print Window Print Window Preview Default Cancel site T51 KE fief Courter 16 bis C D10190 Counter 2 bis C1 200 25 Data Register D Set the latched backed up range of data registers Initial value 200 to 511 O to 511 All extension registers are latched backed up GHOSE he ete ER This setting is fixed and cannot be changed Setting the PLC name The PLC Name tab is available only in FXON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU FX2C FX2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 1 Click the PLC Name tab and input the program title FX Parameter Memory Capacity Device P
324. lable in Ver 3 30 or later Provided for the communication adapter FX 0N 232ADP Provided for the communication adapter FX 0N 485ADP Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN K HSZ instruction Table comparison mode MEERE D8130 HSZ instruction Table comparison complete flag Le le Tae Ts HSZ and PLSY instructions Speed pattern mode Le te 4 D8131 D8132 HSZ instruction Table comparison complete flag P Se fe D8134 Available in Ver 3 07 or later XCH instruction SWAP function Pe eee DE as Cod ae lt S DN lt S High speed parallel link mode command Unavailable HKY instruction Hexadecimal data handling function SMOV instruction Hexadecimal data handling function Unavailable Available in the ASC RS ASCI HEX and CCD instructions Available in Ver 3 07 or later Available in Ver 1 20 or later 173 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM oO oO 3 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q jo Buas pue sedk SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Number and name Pulse catch M 8170 M 8171 M 8172 M 8173 M 8174 M 8175 M 8176 M 8177 M 8178 M 8179 Applicable model FXOS Operation and function Input X000 pulse catch Input X001 pulse catch Refer to M8056 Input X002 pulse catch to M8059 for the Input X003 pulse catch pulse
325. less operation mode is specified The PLC system automatically controls turning OFF of the battery LED and initializes devices in the latched area shown below Auxiliary relay M Counter C State relay S Data register D Timer T Extension register R 2 When the parameter setting for the batteryless operation mode is not available input a sequence program for the batteryless operation mode described below Conditions to enable the batteryless operation mode 1 An FLROM EEPROM or EPROM for program memory is attached so that programs will not be lost Lathed backed up type devices such as auxiliary relays and data registers are not used for control 3 The sampling trace function is not used The real time clock function is not used 228 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 Sequence program example for batteryless operation When the parameter setting for the batteryless operation mode is not available create the sequence program shown below e Program example for clearing the latched area when the initial latched areas are set This example shows a program for FX3U FX3UC PLCs iis ee M8030 Battery LED OFF RUN monitor i Latched area M500 Initial pulse erat Auxiliary relay M7679 M8000 M8030 Battery LED OFF or RUN monitor
326. lic information is stored it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed After changing the memory capacity write the symbolic information again 2 Memory cassettes except for the FX3U FLROM 1M which save symbolic information are also supported by FX3u FX3uc PLCs whose version is earlier than Ver 3 00 In that case the FX3U FX3uc PLC operates but the written symbolic information is invalid 3 For writing symbolic information and changing the set values of timers and counters using a peripheral device it is recommended to create programs with set values specified indirectly If the set values are specified directly programs cannot be restored from symbolic information after the set values are changed 7 1 2 Block password In the FX3uU FX3uUc PLC Ver 3 00 or later the setting Read protect the execution program is available for the block password For details on block password refer to the GX Works2 manual Cautions 1 Inthe PLC written by the computer using a project including a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid restoration of programs is enabled only when the PLC stores the symbolic information For editing programs using a peripheral equipment which cannot read symbolic information only supported by GX Works2 Ver 1 62Q or later do not use a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid 2 When a peripheral eq
327. lic information storage and block password MEMO 304 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Warranty Warranty 1 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and
328. limit due to the derivative gain KD beyond the limit The derivative result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 The PID operation result exceeds the limit Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 operation Check the contents of parameters 268 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting of parameters means setting of the environment where the PLC operates Almost all PLCs can be used with factory default values When it is necessary to add an optional memory set the comment capacity set the communication condition for serial ports etc however change the parameter setting using a programming tool such as personal computer 269 SUI INO 09q 12 9q ulseoiieg N Oo jUue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoinag eads Aa m 3 S o jo Bunjes pue sedi SJ J WELJEd suo oun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 1 Parameter List 6 1 Parameter List The following items can be set in the parameter setting 1 FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc PLCs Classification Item Description This parameter specifies the maximum value for the number of steps to which a sequence program can be input 1 The upper limit is determined by the capacity of the built in memory or attached optional memory 2
329. lock registered in the interrupt program task It is not necessary to program the IRET instruction Interrupt program lt The IRET instruction is automatically added during compiling Do not program it 119 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 11 Pointer P and I 2 Interrupt pointers 1 o_o Input interrupt pointers The PLC can receive input signals from specific input numbers without affected by its operation cycle By using these input signals as triggers the PLC executes interrupt routine programs Because input interrupt pointers can handle signals shorter than the operation cycle use them for high priority processing during sequence control or for control handling short pulses a FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3uc PLCs ON duration or OFF duration of Input interrupt pointer input signal Input Interrupt disabling flag Interrupt at rising Interrupt at falling FX3U FX3G FX3S edge edge FX3UC FX3GC X001 1101 1100 M8051 Ore more 50 us or X002 1201 1200 M8052 oom eee 5 us or X003 1301 1300 M8053 Me fousor 50usor X004 1401 1400 M8054 MOr er 50 us or 1 X005 1501 1500 M8055 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP b FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Input interrupt pointer ON duration or OFF duration of input signal M8050 FX1S FX1N FX1NC 1100 aoa 10 us X000 X001 or more 1200 M8052 50 us X002
330. logic reverse SIS SIS ERGE F Re Hehe ERE M 8357 2 a internet signal ogie reverse a359 A E A A A A A M 8359 OE ee e 2 Doep eulouimeninyONEUSYOR READY es a e i M 8361 2 Clear signal output function enable IDE RE M 8362 2 sacs Zero point return direction specification ee ae 0 Po a oe A ae a ee EN M 8365 2 a Near point watchdog signal logic reverse M 8366 2 Y002 Zero point signal logic reverse ac cal M 8367 2 Y002 Interrupt signal logic reverse 4 M 8368 Y002 Positioning instruction being driven M 8369 2 Y002 Pulse output stop command 1 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 3 Available in Ver 1 30 or later Ar a lt S K i le 150 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G Fx3Gc Fxas Corresponding special device Operation and function Positioning FX3U PLCs Refer to the position control manual for details M 8373 Y003 Normal rotation limit a ee ee ee SUI NO 09q _ M 8370 Y003 Pulse output monitor ON BUSY OFF READY vei f 2 M 8371 1 Y003 Clear signal output function enable v2 i 3 n a ae ee ee gt is M 8372 Y003 Zero point return direction specification
331. lt SJOUF sIo OWeled jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N 255 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 5 2 2 Error Code List and Action PLC Error operation code at error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 Head unconnected I O device number Contents of error Action Example When X020 is unconnected st fo 2 Value converted into BCD Exaile Gonkaues ui Devi Unconnected I O relay numbers are programmed pa evice number The PLC continues its operation 1020 j peranan 1 Input X 0 Output Y Modify the program if necessary e 1st to 3rd digits Device number e Ath digit I O type 1 Input X 0 Output Y Example When D8060 stores 1020 inputs X020 and later are unconnected PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 6102 Operation circuit error Confirm that extension cables are connected correctly 6103 5i I O bus error while M8069 is ON ops 6104 Panna 24V failure in function unit while M8069 is ON 6105 The sampling scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 Watchdog timer error Check the program 6110 Function extension memory failure sum check error Confirm that the function extension memory is attached correctly 256 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs Error code PLC operation Contents of error Action at
332. lt in program memory Optional memory 1 RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM EPROM Parameter rete Sequence program Sequence program File register D File register D Clock function FX2NC EEPROM16C Extension function FX2N ROM E1 The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of Clock function Extension function an optional memory 1 when the power is turned ON FX2NC ROM CE1 and isolates the built in program memory The PLC gives the priority to the optional memory 1 Optional memory cannot be connected to FX1Nc PLCs 20 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 5 FX0S FX0 F XonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Built in device memory RAM Ba amp Bit device memory Data memory Sul INO 214d 1 9q uiseoiieg INQ Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Data register D Timer current value register T Counter current value register C Timer contact time counting coil reset coil T Index register V and Z counter contact counting coil and reset coil C Oo File register D 2 soug QI oes So Built in program memory Optional memory 1 r D j RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM EPROM 4 l l a l Sequence program Sequence program i I 5 File register D 2 l 8 I I l I The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of an optional memory
333. ment flag el se fe 4 A S S A A C E E T E K Unavailable ee E a BKCMP instruction Block comparison signal EJTETTE COMRD and BINDA instructions Output character quantity A 2 selector signal Unavailable High speed ring counter operation in units of 0 1 ms 16 bits eS a Ci rr A 2 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 3 The 0 1 ms high speed ring counter D8099 operates after M8099 is set to ON Memory information Unavailable Remains ON while the function extension memory is installed lt S ON during writing in RUN mode Unavailable Checks registration of device comment Unavailable Output refresh error Unavailable BEE se 4 In FX3U FX3uCc PLCs available only when a optional memory is connected 5 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 6 Available in Ver 1 10 or later Corresponding special device D8074 to D8079 D8080 to D8085 D8086 to D8091 X004 Pulse width Pulse period measurement flag Le ete oe D8092 to D8097 X000 Pulse period measurement mode Le 2 jel 4 D8074 to D8079 X001 Pulse period measurement mode Te 4 i D8080 to D8085 D8086 to D8091 F D8099 D8104 D8105 D8107 D8109 143 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programm
334. ment n File register Special unit initial Positioning Built in CC Link LT setting range capacity setting capacity setting value setting setting Setup O A WwW N gt With regard to the comment capacity up to 50 device comments can be set in one block With regard to the file register capacity up to 500 16 bit file registers can be set in one block In the special unit initial value setting 8 blocks 4000 steps are used In the positioning setting 18 blocks 9000 steps are used In the built in CC Link LT setup 1 block 500 steps are used Cautions 1 5 After changing the memory capacity setting make sure to write both programs and parameters together to the PLC If only parameters are written to the PLC program errors such as parameter error circuit error and syntax error may occur in the PLC When the memory capacity of the FX3s PLC is 16000 steps the program capacity is fixed to 4000 steps and the total of the comment capacity and the file register capacity is limited to 12000 steps 24 blocks The comment capacity is automatically set when the file register capacity is set FX3G FX3GC PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity is 16001 steps or more or in the standard mode when the program capacity is 16000 steps or less The instruction execution time is longer in the extension mode than in the standard mode Example LD basic instruction execution time Standard
335. mon 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs J PLC lt Error operation E i The LD or LDI instruction is used continuously 9 times or more e The LD or LDI instruction is not provided A coil is not provided The relationship between LD LDI and ANB ORB is improper 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 pete The STL RET MCR El DI SRET IRET FOR NEXT FEND or END instruction P pointer or interrupt is not connected to the bus line The MPP instruction is not provided The MPS instruction is used continuously 12 times or more The relationship among MPS MRD and MPP The STL instruction is used continuously 9 times or more The MC MCR I interrupt or SRET instruction is provided inside the STL instruction The RET instruction is provided outside STL instruction The RET instruction is not provided P pointer or interrupt are not provided SRET or IRET instruction is not provided interrupt SRET or IRET instruction is provided in the main program The STL RET MC or MCR instruction is provided in a subroutine or interrupt routine The relationship between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction is improper The nesting level between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction is 6 or more The STL RET MC MCR IRET SRET FEND or END instruction is provided between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction The relationship between the MC instruction and the MCR instruction is improper MCR NO
336. n etc the counter continues counting and the contact does not change when the next counting input is received 2 6 5 Set value specification method 1 16 bit counter 1 Direct specification using a constant K X003 Se Geist decimal constant 1 to 32 767 100 counts 2 Indirect specification using a data register D Write in advance a value to the data register used for indirect specification in a program or set such a value in advance using a digital switch Note that the set value of a latched backed up type register can be indefinite when the battery voltage becomes low X001 MOV 100 counts 58 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 2 6 6 32 bit counter 1 Direct specification using a constant K X003 ome 32 EN ENO CCoil K43210 CValue a Constant decimal constant 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 43210 counts 2 Indirect specification using a data register D 1 Make sure data registers used for indirect specification are not used in other programs Cautions on use For writing the symbolic information and changing the set values of timers and counters using a peripheral equipment it is recommended to create programs with the set values specified indirectly If the set values are specified directly programs cannot be restored from the symbolic information after the set values are changed Response speed o
337. n note that each execution of the INITR or INITER instruction is counted as one time of writing Make sure that the allowable number of times of writing is not exceeded In the case of FX3G FX3GC PLCs The allowable number of times of writing is 10 000 or less in a memory cassette EEPROM and 20 000 or less in the built in memory EEPROM Every time the RWER instruction is executed each execution is counted as one time of writing Make sure that the allowable number of times of writing is not exceeded When a continuous execution type instruction is used data is written to the memory in each operation cycle of the PLC For preventing this make sure to use a pulse execution type instruction Even if the LOADR instruction is executed each execution is not counted as one time of writing 110 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 9 8 Registration of data stored in extension registers and extension file registers This subsection explains the operation procedures in GX Works2 For details on operation procedures in GX Works2 refer to the GX Works2 manual gJ D O D O D Setting the project type PLC type and programming language 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq Select Project NEW New Project Structured Project 3 Cancel G OUD o 0O PLC Series gt lt a oo ow gt
338. n Block No Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station v Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start vr Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote input Rx Remote output R Remote register RwWr Remote register RWw Ver 2 Remote input Rx Ver 2 Remote output R Ver 2 Remote register RWr Ver 2 Remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settings 8 i Station Information Initial Setting Set item Contents of setting Connection Block Select Set to set a CC Link master block Special Function Block No Specify the special block number 0 to 7 Operation Setting This button displays the Operation Setting dialog box This setting is fixed to Master Station when Set is selected for Connection Block Master Station Data Link Type This setting is fixed to PLC Parameter Auto Start when Set is selected for Connection Block Select the mode among the following choices Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Set the total number of remote I O stations remote device stations and or intelligent device To
339. n be input This item is not available in FXOS FX0 FXON PLCs 1 The upper limit is determined by the capacity of the built in memory or attached optional memory 2 The memory capacity includes the program memory file registers and comment area This parameter incorporates comments into the program memory This item is not available in FXOS FXO PLCs Comments 1 Because comments remain in the PLC the contents can be easily understood at the time of Capacity maintenance 2 Upto 50 comments can be input when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps in the memory capacity This parameter incorporates data registers into the program memory This item is not available in FXOS FXO PLCs File Register 1 A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled together Capacity which is convenient 2 Upto 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified and one block requires 500 steps in the memory capacity This parameter enables to change the latched backed up device range and non latched non backed up device range inside the PLC This item is not available in FXOS FX0 FXON PLCs This parameter sets protection to prevent erroneous reading and incorrect writing of a sequence program The 8 digit keyword can be specified in alphanumeric characters A to F and 0 to 9 Proaramiile This parameter enables to set a character string to be used as the program title g This item is no
340. n is 6605 provided inside the STL instruction The RET instruction is provided outside STL This error occurs when a combination of instructions is incorrect in instruction the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of The RET instruction is not provided instructions is incorrect Correct the instructions in the program mode so that their mutual 6604 SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di Stops operation P pointer or interrupt are not provided SRET or IRET instruction is not provided relationship becomes correct interrupt SRET or IRET instruction is provided in the main program The STL RET MC or MCR instruction is provided in a subroutine or interrupt routine 6606 suo oun4 2yo N The relationship between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction is improper The nesting level between the FOR instruction 6607 and the NEXT instruction is 6 or more The STL RET MC MCR IRET SRET FEND or END instruction is provided between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction The relationship between the MC instruction and the MCR instruction is improper MCR NO is not provided ete The SRET or IRET instruction or interrupt is provided between the MC instruction and the MCR instruction 267 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs Error code PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of err
341. n latched non Device co setting backed up device range inside the PLC Special This parameter sets the initial values of the buffer memory BFM for each special block unit Function Block number Settings It is necessary to set the memory capacity Special Function Block Built in CC Link This parameter sets the transmission speed point mode and station information LT Setting It is necessary to set the memory capacity when setting the station information This parameter sets the PLC operation mode without a battery When the batteryless mode is selected the PLC automatically stops detection of low battery voltage error and initializes the contents of latched backed up devices This parameter sets the PLC operation mode with a battery Battery mode When the battery mode is selected general purpose devices can be changed to the latched Battery Less Mode backed up type PLC System 1 y o MODEM This parameter automatically sends a specified AT command as the initialization command to a Initialized modem connected to the serial port This parameter specifies the input number of the RUN input described above in the range from X000 RUN Terminal to X017 Input X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16ML FX3UC 16ML and 14 point type FX3G PLCs X000 to X015 in 24 point type FX3G PLCs This parameter corresponds to the following settings by specifying each contents on the personal Serial port computer screen PLC Syst
342. n the label position specified by the CALL instruction and then returns to the original position by the SRET instruction Main program Subroutine program e Role of the pointer P63 for jump to the END step 118 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 11 Pointer P and I P63 is a special pointer for jumping to the END step when the CJ instruction is executed Note that a program error will occur if P63 is programmed as a label gJ D O D O D 9q Ul S9149 gt A Should not be programmed OO 99E 2 11 3 Functions and operation examples of interrupt pointers Interrupt pointes are classified into three subtypes input interrupt type timer interrupt type and counter interrupt type 3 1 Creating an interrupt program 3 Create an interrupt program as follows 1 Create a task for interrupt program and a task for main program 2 Inthe interrupt program task set an interrupt pointer in the Event column sioug Q Property Details Comment Attributes 6 TE v o 380 DV AS wn Data Mame Task_O1 Title Interrupt program 7 D TimerfGutput Control Q D Last Change 4 20 2012 9 50 55 AM 02 For interrupt pointes which can be set in the Event column refer to 2 Interrupt pointers described below 3 During compiling the IRET instruction is automatically added at the end of the program b
343. n total p 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 184 points FX1NC 16M FX1NC 32M When extended X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X177 128 FX1NC Input i f PLC 8 points 16 points 128 points points Output Y200 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y177 total p 8 points 16 points 128 points FX2NC 16M FX2NC 32M FX2NC 64M FX2NC 96M When extended X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X037 X000 to X057 X000 to X267 256 FX2NC Input i PLC 8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 184 points points Output Y200 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y057 Y000 to Y267 in total p 8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 184 points 3 FXos FX0 FXoN FXU FX2c PLCs FX0S 10M_ FX0 FX0S 14M FX0 FX0S 20M FX0 FX0S 30M PLC p p p p extension Y000 toY003 YOOO to Y005 YOOO to YOO7 YOOO to Y015 Output i i i 4 points 6 points 8 points 14 points FXON 24M FXON 40M FXON 60M_ When extended facut X000 to X015 X000 to X027 X000 to X043 X000 to X127 128 FXON PLC P 14 points 24 points 36 points 84 points points Output Y000 to Y011 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 YoOOtoY77 total p 10 points 16 points 24 points 64 points FXU 16M FXU 24M FXU 32M FXU 48M FXU 64M FXU 80M FXU 128M hon X000 to X007 X000 to X013 X000 to X017 X000 to X027 X000 to X037 X000 to X047 X000 to X077 FXU PLC P 8 points 12 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points Output Y000 to Y007 YOOO
344. nX or KnY is indexed with an index register the contents of the index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number The right figure shows an example of the indexing operation in which YOOO to YOO7 are output by the MOV instruction and inputs are switched by indexing to X007 to X000 X017 to X010 or X027 to X020 When the index value is overwritten by KO K8 and K16 the device number converted into octal is added in the way X000 0 X000 X000 8 X010 and X000 16 X020 and the input terminal working as the source is changed accordingly KO V3 K8 V3 K16 V3 V3 0 X7toX0 gt Y7 to YO V3 8 X17 to X10 gt Y7 to YO V3 16 X27 to X20 Y7 to YO 135 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 7 Indexing Display example of the timer current value A sequence to display the current value of timers TO to T9 can be programmed using index registers Digital switch inputs X003 to X000 for setting the timer M8000 X003 to X000 BCD gt Z0 BIN RUN monitor PLC TOZO BIN Y017 to Y000 BCD TTP TT EEE ELLE TOZO TO to T9 in accordance K4Y000 with ZO 0 to 9 Seven segment display unit outputs X017 to Y000 for displaying the timer current value In the case of constants The right figure shows an example of the indexing operation in which the transfer
345. name Content of register Error step number of M8418 Error step number of M8438 k D 8434 D 8435 D 8436 e eee ep i D18437 Error code in detail for CF ADP instructions A Af f o 018438 Error code for CF ADP instructions A vt D18439 Operationmode display ae TC 1 Available in Ver 2 61 or later 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Error step number of M8418 Error step number of M8438 2 196 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Numb d Content of register i at sean g Fx3u FX3uUc FX3G Fxsec Fx3s Corresponding special device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 Refer to ENET ADP Manual for details D18400 E T a a D18401 eee ee a D18402 Se ee D18403 e a A a a D18404 ee a a D 8405 Default Router IP Address ms order D18406 C A A A D18407 Cre E ee ee a D18408 PENET ADP version ee D 8409 D 8410 Emenn a e e D18411 T a ee a D 8412 to D 8414 Host MAC address Ai D 8415 Unavailable ea cA al ee papan peheee O O zie Ba a l D18419 ima uaa e FX3U ENET ADP ch2 Refer to ENET ADP Manual for details ee fPaswesstowosey eet fee te oe pe Prsmenteredey Te E E Daz Saretmenktowotey PT E Daz Sarem o a e e UlnNO 09q aS lt S e 8q HH SI S OO ui saand INQ SIS
346. nction Block tab is available only in FX3u FX3uc PLCs Special Function Block Settings Unto junti JUnit 2 JUnit 3 Unit4 JUnit S junte Unit 7 Unit Name FxSU 44D No Address Comment Value Size Type O Input mode of CH1 to CH4 0 16bit DEC 1 C2 ____2 umber of average timers forcHi C te Ca ____3 Number of average tmersforcH2 efiebiyoec a ___ Number of average timers for cH efie Ts __5 Number of average tmersforcH ______ amp 16bi 0ec A Check the Identification Code V Check the Identification Code Before Initializing Identification Code 2080 Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range Unit No tab Select the unit number of a special function block unit to be set Up to 32 half width Unit Name Set the name of a special function block unit whose initial values will be set or 16 full width characters This column indicates the order of initial value setting in the selected unit No number Numbers 1 to 98 can be set Set the buffer memory address BFM number in a decimal value whose initial Address 1 value will be set This column is displayed when device comments are registered Comment On the above screen Input mode of CH1 to CH4 is registered as the device comment for UO GO unit No 0 BFM 0 Set a value to be set as the initial value of the buffer memory address BFM Value number 2 Set the data length and type of the set value in the Size Type
347. ne 2 121 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 11 Pointer P and I 2 Timer interrupt pointers 3 points The PLC executes an interrupt routine program at every specified interrupt cycle time 10 to 99 ms Use these pointers for control which requires cyclic interrupt processing without regard to the operation cycle of the PLC F X0S F X0 FXON FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs do not support timer interrupt pointers Input No Interrupt cycle ms cara eae Jm M8056 7O An integer from 10 to 99 is put in the G0 portion of the pointer name M8057 1 Example 1610 Timer interrupt at every 10 ms BO M8058 1 Cleared in FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3Uc PLCs when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Operation Main program Interrupts are enabled Main program End of main program Interrupt program Event 1620 Interrupt at every 20 ms Interrupt routine e Timer interrupts are enabled after the El instruction It is not necessary to program the DI disable interrupt instruction when the timer interrupt disabled zone is not required e FEND indicates the end of the main program e The PLC executes an interrupt routine at every 20 ms 122 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 11 Pointer P and I 3 Counter interrupt pointers 6 points The PLC execut
348. ne operations from a programming tool to the PLC are disabled depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered keyword In an FX3uU FX3uUc PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 2 61 do not use a memory cassette where the customer keyword and permanent PLC lock are set If a memory cassette where the permanent PLC lock is set is used in an FX3U FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 2 61 the PLC does not function normally If the PLC memory is cleared or the keyword is canceled in an FX3U FX3Uc PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 2 61 for a memory cassette where the customer keyword and permanent PLC lock are set access restrictions set by the keyword may not be able to be removed normally 280 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 5 Keyword 6 5 2 Registering and changing keywords This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Worksz2 SUI NO 09q _ Registering and changing the keywords 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 1 Select Online Password Keyword New to open the New Keyword Registration dialog box 2 Set Function Selection Keyword Input and Protection Level New Keyword Registration Oo Function Selection Keyword Input i OJ e Keyword Protection Keyword S286 16digits 8 digi QOL gits Sdigits close Do gt Retype Keyword gt go 8 C Permanent PLC Lock gt WV Customer keywor
349. ng data Input data Ch1 D 8291 Ch2 Input data Ch2 Output setting data Input data Ch2 D 8292 Ch3 Input data Ch3 Output setting data Output data Number Error status Model code K50 D 8288 D 8293 Ch4 Input data Ch4 Output setting data Not used Ch1 Number of times of Number of averaging times pez averaging 1 to 4095 Not uceditdisabled for Ch1 1 to 4095 Ch2 Number of times of Number of averaging times wees averaging 1 to 4095 Nor usedidicabIgd for Ch2 1 to 4095 Ch3 Number of times of D 8296 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used Ch4 Number of times of D 8297 averaging 1 to 4095 Not used disabled Not used D 8298 Error status Error status Error status D 8299 Model code 1 Model code 2 Model code K50 1 Inthe case of FX3G PLC versions 1 20 or later are applicable 2 Can be connected only to 40 point or 60 point type FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs 241 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later Operation and function FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 1st analog special adapter D 8280 Meas
350. not run normally 278 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 5 Keyword 6 5 Keyword By registering entry codes in a PLC it is possible to restrict the PLC program change function monitor function and current value change function of programming tools display modules and display units access restriction For the operations and function restriction of display modules refer to the hardware manual of the PLC For the operations and function restriction of display units refer to the manual of the display unit 6 5 1 PLC applicability and access restriction 1 Differences in operations among keyword types The keyword change cancel deletion and reset operations vary depending on the type of registered keyword Registered keyword Entered keyword Change Cancel Reset Outline Permanent PLC Lock i a ee The protect cannot be changed canceled nor reset B a Keyword 8 digits EARAES The keyword 8 digits can be changed canceled and reset Keyword Protection 16digits Keyword 16 digits The keyword 16 digits can be changed canceled and reset Keyword Protection Keyword 16 digits J The keyword 16 digits and customer keyword can be 16digits changed canceled and reset Customer keyword Customer keyword pp The customer keyword can be reset The security offered by the permanent PLC lock keyword 8 digits keyword 16 digits and c
351. nrnsrnrnnrrrnnrrrsnrrssnrrennrnenrresnernnni 52 294 Cautions ON USE enaena aa ae a ets a a a eh 52 2 5 5 Details of timer operations and timer accuracy cee ccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesseeeeeeeaas 52 2 5 6 Program examples Off delay timer and flicker timer ccccccccccceeeeeceececeeeceseeeeeeseeeeeseeeenenes 53 2 5 7 Handling timers as numeric CEVICES ccccecccssecccsescecceeeeceseeeseusceneuseecsuseessusenseasesseneessegeeensags 54 20 COURS IG er Sache cs sac ose a E ene 55 2 03 1 NUIMDETS Ol COUNLCIS sess cee s ancatatcaee a a a a etait see erne tes doe sect een ciate 55 206 2 Features of Counters 423252 ers ee oc de caaatetseteaiy esac asa enemas de diene actrees ete 56 2 6 3 Related devices to specify counting direction 32 bit counter ccc ecceceecceceeececeeeeeeeeeeenaees 56 2 6 4 Functions and operation CxXAMPples ccccccccccsecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeessaeessaeeseeeeseeeeseeesieaeeess 57 26 5 Sl Value specification MethNOde sser an aia e E os ot eaa hd eee eel 58 200 C AUIIONIS SON IS aar a E aaseasnaeoneceeeedadiestees 59 26 7 Response speed Or Comers iaa i aa a a e gan eeatonsadace liga 59 2 6 8 Counters handled as numeric devices cccceecccceeececeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeseaceseeeeseueesseeeessaaeessaaes 59 27 High Speed Counter C karna a sic etcane cseascenei aes 62 2 7 1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters
352. nting operation of C246 to C250 is indicated by the ON OFF status of M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting While X012 is ON C249 immediately starts counting when the input X006 X003 turns ON The up counting input is X000 and the down counting input is X001 The high speed counter C244 can be reset using X011 in a sequence as shown in the figure but it is immediately reset without any program when X002 is closed In this case any program including X011 is not necessary The up down counting operation of C246 to C250 is indicated by the ON OFF status of M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting These counters are 32 bit bidirectional counters The operation of the output contact caused by the current value is equivalent to that in 1 phase type high speed counters described above Refer to 2 7 2 Input assignment for high speed counters X011 RST EN ENO d CC251 OUT C 32 EN ENO CCoil CValue CC254 OUT C 32 EN ENO CCoil CValue While X012 is ON C251 counts operations of inputs X000 phase A and X001 phase B as interrupt processing When X011 turns ON and then the RST instruction is execute C251 is reset When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than the set value Y002 turns ON When the current value becomes equivalent to or smaller than the set value Y002 turns OFF Y0O3 turns ON for down counting or OFF for up counting accor
353. nts e S i 3 go Output 200 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y047 YO00 to Y077 Y000 to Y367 iniae p 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points 2 FX3UC 16M FX3UC 32M FX3UC 64M FX3UC 96M When extended 4 FX3UC D DS DSS Input X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X037 X000 to X057 X000 to X367 256 D PLC 8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points points D Output Y000 to YO07 YOOO to Y017 YOOO to Y037 YOOO to YO57 YOOO to Y367 in total p 8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points 2 p 4 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 When extended EEA inp X000 to X017 X000 to X357 256 16 points 240 points points LT 2 PLC artes Saat Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y357 N tota P 16 points 240 points FX3G 14M FX3G 24M FX3G 40M FX3G 60M When extended siouy QI Input X000 to X007 X000 to X015 X000 to X027 X000 to X043 xX000toX177 128 6 FX3G PLC 8 points 14points 16 24 points 36 points 40 128 points points ee Y000 to Y005 Y000 to Y011 Yoo0 to Y017 Yo00 to Y027 YoootoY177 i total 22s Output 4 4 i i F 3 J 0 6 points 8 10 points 16 16 points 24 points 128 points amp E FX3GC 32MT D DSS When extended Inout X000 to X017 X000 to X177 128 FX3GC PLC p 16 points 128 points points 7 Y000 to Y017 Y000toY177__ In total Q Output D 16 points 128 points D a 2 FX3S 10M FX3S 14M FX3S 20M FX3S 30M z 2 Foi X000 t
354. nual Hardware Manual i Edition For detailed explanation refer to the re ny here aroaro Details about the hardware including 1 0 JY997D28701 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and O9R519 Hardware Edition maintenance of the FX3uc PLC main unit I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G FX3G Series Hardware Manual JY997D46001 Supplied with product Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Details about the hardware including I O ee SPES sete Mandar Hardwars Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and 09R521 Edition l maintenance of the FX3G PLC main unit I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3Gc extracted from the FX3Gc FX3GcC Series Hardware Manual JY997D45201 Supplied with product Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3GC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Boce dares Use s Nand Details about the hardware including I O ie JY997D45401 Additional Manual specifications wiring installation and 09R533 Hardware Edition maintenance of the FX3Gc PLC main unit FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Related Manuals Manual name Manual number Apo ot Lt Peel Contents were or Additional Manual name code PLC main unit I O specifications wirin
355. o FXON FX1S and FX3s PLCs 100 ms timers are changed to timers which operate based on the 10 ms base clock when the special auxiliary relay M8028 is driven in the program M8000 M8028 RUN monitor X003 1 second timer 2 Retentive type Set value constant A data register can TC250 t1 t2 t1 t2 34 5 sec X001 Rete Rene time ntive Set value Current time value Y001 X002 be specified instead be specified instead When the drive input X000 of the timer T200 turns ON the current value counter for T200 adds and counts clock pulses of 10 ms When the count value becomes equivalent to the set value K123 the output contact of the timer turns ON In other words the output contact turns ON 1 23 seconds after the coil is driven When the drive input X000 turns OFF or when the power is turned OFF the timer is reset and the output contact turns OFF When the drive input X001 of the timer T250 turns ON the current value counter for T250 adds and counts clock pulses of 100 ms When the count value becomes equivalent to the set value K345 the output contact of the timer turns ON Even if the drive input X001 turns OFF or if the power is turned OFF during counting the timer continues counting when the operation restarts The retentive operating time is 34 5 seconds When the reset input X002 turns ON the timer is reset and the output contact turns OFF 50 FXCPU Structured Programming Manua
356. o ON its ON OFF status is judged after the response delay approximately 10 ms caused by the input filter When the input filter is the digital type its value can be overwritten by a sequence program Input terminal 2 Read out rogram processing Program processing The PLC reads the ON OFF status of each device from the input image memory and other device image memories according to the contents of instructions in the program memory executes operations in sequence from the step 0 and then writes the operation result to the image memory at each time Accordingly the contents of the image memory of each device change as the program is executed The operation of a contact inside an output relay is determined by the contents of the output image memory REPERE Output processin operation 6 Output peas A Output processing When execution of all instructions is finished the ON OFF status of the image memory of outputs Y is transferred to the latch memory This is the actual output of the PLC External output contacts inside the PLC operate after the response delay time of the output devices The time required for a cyclic operation is called operation cycle scan time Output terminal The above method is called the batch I O method or refresh method 40 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 3 Auxiliary relay M 2 3 Auxiliary relay M There are many
357. o X005 X000 to X007 X000 to X013 X000 to X017 No FX3S PLC P 6 points 8 points 12 points 16 points extension Y000 to Y003 Y000 to Y005 YOOO to Y007 YOOO to Y015 Output 4 points 6 points 8 points 14 points 1 A number inside indicates the number of occupied points The difference from the number of effective points indicates unused numbers 37 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs FX1S 10M FX1S 14M FX1S 20M FX1S 30M ater X00 to X05 X00 to X07 X00 to X013 X00 to X17 No FX1S PLC R 6 points 8 points 12 points 16 points extension Output YOO to Y03 YOO to Y05 YOO to YO7 YOO to Y15 P 4 points 6 points 8 points 14 points FX1N 24M FX1N 40M FX1N 60M_ When extended aes X000 to X015 X000 to X027 X000 to X043 X000 to X177 128 FX1N PLC p 14 points 24 points 36 points 128 points points Output 200 to Y011 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 YO00 toY177 total p 10 points 16 points 24 points 128 points FX2N 16M FX2N 32M FX2N 48M FX2N 64M FX2N 80M FX2N 128M When extended for X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X027 X000 to X037 X000 to X047 X000 to X077 X000 to X267 256 FX2N PLC P 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 184 points points Output 200 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y077 Y000 to YO77 Y000 to Y267 i
358. o the BD1 connector of a FX3G PLC 40 point and 60 point type or the BD connector of a FX3G PLC 14 point and 24 point type and FX3s PLCs 4 Expansion board connected to the BD2 connector of a FX3G PLC 40 point and 60 point type 5 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected 6 Available in Ver 1 10 or later 7 This function is supported only in the FX3S 30MLIJ ELJ 2AD PLC 188 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register i gt FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fxgs Corresponding special device Display module FX3G 5DM FX3U 7DM function Refer to the hardware manual of the PLC for details D 8300 eS es D for display module r 2 i Default K 1 D 8301 Control device M for display module r 2 i Default K 1 Language display setting D 8302 Japanese KO _ UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 English Other than KO ant peat A A Kaa A A E004 fe E a a QOUWM o oO 53 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D D18305 Lee a 7 SS SSS D18308 Lee Soh SS D 8309 Le fe 2 W 1 Latch battery or EEPROM backed device 9 2 Available in Ver 1 10 or later y RND D 8310 RND instruction Data for generating random soug QI number D 8311 High order Default K1
359. ode switches from STOP to RUN Does not change Does not change 2 When the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage the device status is not held correctly For special auxiliary relays refer to Chapter 4 23 9q SuI INC ed1Aeq ulseoineg IND Oo jue SUOD 9 d y paiyioeds a0inaq eloeds Aa siouy QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 2 FX3G FX3Gc PLCs 1 Types of program memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Parameter Does not change Sequence program Does not change Comment Can be secured by Does not change parameter setting File register Does not change 2 Types of word device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP 7 Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type Does not change Data register D File type Does not change Set to initial 7 Special type Cleared value 2 Does not change Extension register R General type Does not change Extension file register ER Index register V and Z V Z Does not change Does not change Cleared For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON File type Does not change Does not change Cleared For 10 ms Cleared M a
360. of scan time Unit 0 1 ms Refer to Subsection 4 2 5 0 to 59 seconds For real time clock i i E Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 0 to 59 minutes For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 0 to 23 hours For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 T vA Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 ao 1st to 31st day For real time clock January to December For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 i i Last 2 digits of year 0 to 99 For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 O Sunday to 6 Saturday For real time clock Refer to Subsection 4 2 7 1 FX2NC PLCs require a memory board equipped with the real time clock function 200 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register Input filter Input filter value of X000 to X017 X000 to X007 in FX1N FX1NC PLCs Default 10ms D 8020 Input filter adjustment Refer to Subsection 4 2 9 D18021 iets se D18022 Cee Se D 8023 aan D 8024 Unavailable D 8025 Le D 8026 aes D 8027 ea Index register Z0 VO D 8028 Value of the register ZO Z D 8029 Value of the register VO V 1 D8182 to D8015 store values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 Variabl
361. om all of these numeric values are handled in the binary notation keyboard inside PLCs Decimal K789 0O Positive value 1 Negative vauef When these devices are monitored in peripheral equipment they are automatically converted into the decimal notation as shown in the right figure and can be converted into the hexadecimal notation e Handling of negative value A negative value is expressed in two s complement inside PLCs Automatic l l conversion For details refer to the explanation of NEG instruction in the Ce Decimal K789 osovini MANUA Monitoring in programming tool FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction 4 Octal number OCT In FX PLCs device numbers of input relays and output relays are assigned in octal Because 8 and 9 do not exist in the octal notation device numbers are carried in the way 0 to 7 10 to 17 70 to 77 100 to 107 5 Binary coded decimal BCD The BCD notation expresses each numeric value from 0 to 9 constructing each digit of a decimal number as a 4 bit binary number Because each digit can be handled easily this notation is adopted for controlling digital switches of BCD output type and seven segment display units 6 Real number floating point data PLCs have the floating point operation function to perform high accuracy operation In floating point operations binary floating point values real numbers are used and decimal floating point v
362. ome valid when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN When the communication setting is changed in the step 7 Setting the PLC system 2 turn OFF the power of the PLC once and then turn it ON again 1 The Symbolic information is supported in the FX3u FX3uc PLCs Ver 3 00 or later Cautions 1 Make sure to write both the program and parameters to the PLC after changing the memory capacity setting If only the parameters are written to the PLC program errors such as parameter error circuit error and syntax error may occur in the PLC 2 In FX3u FX3uc PLCs Ver 3 00 or later When symbolic information is stored it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed After changing the memory capacity write the symbolic information again 302 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 7 Other Functions Device amp Common 7 1 Symbolic information storage and block password 7 Other Functions 7 1 Symbolic information storage and block password 7 1 1 Storage of symbolic information The FX3u FX3uc PLC Ver 3 00 or later can store symbolic information data indicating the program configuration such as structure and labels By using this function you can read symbolic information from the PLC and edit labels function blocks etc GX Works2 Ver 1 62Q or later is required to store symbolic information For details on symbolic information refer to the GX Works2 manual Cautions 1 When symbo
363. on 2 Method not using the TWR instruction dedicated to time setting Use the following program when not using the TWR instruction dedicated to time setting X000 M8015 PLF EN ENO 1 Set item d Mo MO MOV EN ENO Example 10 20 30 on April 25 Tuesday 2000 K30 1s d D8013 Set the time 2 to 3 minutes ahead of the desired time at the beginning write the program shown on the left to the PLC set the PLC to the RUN mode and then set X000 to ON Second data K20 D8014 Set to OFF the input switch X000 when the actual Minute data time reaches the input time The input time becomes valid and the clock starts time counting MOV 7 EN ENO Correction by 30 seconds K101 S d D8015 Every time X001 is set to ON from OFF the second Hour data data is corrected MOV When the second data is 0 to 29 it is set to 0 EN ENO When the second data is 30 to 59 it is set to 0 4 and the minute data is incremented by 1 K25 S d D8016 Day data K4 D8017 Month data MOV EN ENO Ko s d D8018 Year data MOV EN ENO K2 ls d D8019 Day of the week data X001 30 second correction 3 Method using a programming tool 1 Starting the time change Forcibly set M8015 to ON 2 Set the time several minutes ahead of the desired time to each data register using the data register current value change function device monitor function of a programming tool 3 Finishing the time change Forcibly set M8015 to OFF
364. on Register R and Extension File Register ER 2 9 5 2 Initialization using GX Works2 Select Online Clear PLC memory in GX Works2 and clear Data device Note that this operation initializes the contents of timers counters data registers file registers and extension registers Functions and operation examples of extension registers Extension registers can be used in various controls handling numeric data in the same way as data registers This subsection explains representative operation examples among various applications For the full use of extension registers refer to the explanation on sequence instruction offered separately FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Extension registers in sequence instructions basic instructions e Specifying the set value of a timer or counter A counter or timer operates while regarding the contents of a specified extension register as its set value Extension registers in sequence instructions applied instructions Operation examples using the MOV instruction e Changing the current value of a counter The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the contents of R5 e Reading the current value of a counter The current value of the counter C10 is transferred to R4 e Storing a numeric value to extension registers 16 bit type 32 bit type 200 decimal value is transferred to R10 R10 8
365. on Select Contents of setting e Select the slave station type among the following choices when the mode is set to Remote Net Ver 1 Mode No Setting Remote I O Station Remote Device Station Intelligent Device Station e Select the slave station type among the following choices when the mode is set to Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode No Setting Ver 1 Remote I O Station Ver 1 Remote Device Station Ver 1 Intelligent Device Station Ver 2 Remote Device Station Ver 2 Intelligent Device Station e The expanded cyclic setting is fixed to Single when the station type is set to Remote I O Station Remote Device Station Intelligent Device Station Ver 1 Remote I O Station Ver 1 Remote Device Station or Ver 1 Intelligent Device Station Select the expanded cyclic setting among the following choices when the mode is set to Ver 2 Remote Device Station or Ver 2 Intelligent Device Station Single Double Quadruple Octuple Select the number of occupied stations among the following choices No Setting Occupied Station 1 Occupied Stations 2 Occupied Stations 3 Occupied Stations 4 When Station Type is set to Remote I O Station Remote Device Station Intelligent Device Station Ver 1 Remote I O Station Ver 1 Remote Device Station or Ver 1 Intelligent Device Station fixed to 32 in the case of Occupied Station 1 and fixed to 64 in the case of Occupied Stations 2 Wh
366. on cycle scan time monitor D8010 to D8012 4 2 6 D8010 to D8012 store the current value minimum value and maximum value of the PLC scan time respectively in units of 0 1 ms When the constant scan function is used the scan time is as follows FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N F X2NC F X3S F X3G F X3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs The scan time includes the waiting time for constant scan FX0S FX0 F XON F XU FX2c PLCs The scan time does not include the waiting time for constant scan D8010 Current value 8041 Minimur value These values can be monitored from peripheral equipment D8012 Maximum value Internal clock M8011 to M8014 The PLC has the following four types of internal clocks which are always oscillating while the PLC power is ON 10ms 100HZz FLELIL Caution M8011 Internal clocks are always oscillating even while the PLC is in 10ms k 100ms 10Hz the STOP mode Accordingly the rising edge of the RUN monitor M8000 does not synchronize with the clock start timing woz LJ LJ 219 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QUWM o o O 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 3 gea a S D jelosds sioug Q S19 J UWELJed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 4 2 7 Real time clock M8015 to M8019
367. onstant is changed to O ms Because the C R filter is provi value shown in the table below when 0 is specified RUN monitor FX3uU FX3uUc PLCs Input number X000 to X005 X006 X007 X010 to X017 2 FX3G FX3GcC PLCs Input number X000 X001 X003 X004 X002 X005 X006 X007 FX3S PLC Input number X000 X001 X002 to X007 X010 to X017 SUI NO 09q _ tal filter circuit of O to 60 ms respectively The digital filter constant is 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo QOUWM o oO 3 lt 0 HOP 3 8 3 ow r gt D eloeds ded in the hardware however the filter constant actually becomes the soug QI V z z v o lt Input filter value when 0 is set g p Bue 2o L US T a 50us 200us Q Input filter value when 0 is set e ai 10us z 50us S Input filter value when 0 is set 10us 50us 200us 1 When setting the input filter to 5 us or when receiving pulses whose response frequency is 50 to 100 kHz using a high speed counter perform the following Set the wiring length to 5m or less Connect a bleeder resistor 1 5 KQ 1 2 W to the input terminal Make sure that the load current of the open collector transistor output in the counterpart equipment added by the input current of the PLC is 20 mA or more 2 In the FX3u FX3uc PLCs function 16 point type only X000 to X007 support the input filter adjustment e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the mi
368. ontact turns OFF Eee 16 bit 32 bit register 2 6 3 Related devices to specify counting direction 32 bit counter FXos FX0 FXoN PLCs do not support 32 bit counters When an auxiliary relay for switching the counting direction is set to ON the counter executes down counting When the auxiliary relay is set to OFF the counter executes up counting Counting Counting Counting Counting Counter No area Counter No saa Counter No a Counter No Pa relay relay relay relay C200 M8200 C210 M8210 C220 M8220 C230 M8230 C201 M8201 C211 M8211 C221 M8221 C231 M8231 C202 M8202 C212 M8212 C222 M8222 C232 M8232 C203 M8203 C213 M8213 C223 M8223 C233 M8233 C204 M8204 C214 M8214 C224 M8224 C234 M8234 C205 M8205 C215 M8215 C225 M8225 C206 M8206 C216 M8216 C226 M8226 C207 M8207 C217 M8217 C227 M8227 C208 M8208 C218 M8218 C228 M8228 C209 M8209 C219 M8219 C229 M8229 56 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C 2 6 4 Functions and operation examples 1 General type and latched backed up type 16 bit counters gJ D O D O D e The valid setting rage of 16 bit binary up counter is from K1 to K32767 decimal constant KO causes the same operation as K1 and the output contact turns ON at the first counting e In general type counters the count value is cleared when the PLC is turned OFF In latched backed up type counters the count value just before power interrupt
369. or Action Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 i 2 No error 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 6706 6707 6708 6709 6730 6732 6733 6734 6735 6736 6740 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 Continues operation There is no jump destination for CJ or CALL instruction A label is provided after the END instruction An independent label is provided between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction or between routine programs This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation The nesting level of CALL instruction is 6 or more Review the program or check the contents of operands used in instructions The nesting level of interrupt is 3 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may The nesting level of FOR NEXT instructions is 6 or occur for the following reasons for example more Example An unavailable device is used as an operand in an T itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T200Z means ine r ction T300 which causes a device number error The device number or data value of an operand in an instruction is outside the allowable range A file register is accessed without its parameter setting This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation e Review the program or check the contents of operands used in instructions e Confirm that the specified buffer memory exists in the counterpart equipment e Confirm that
370. ot y registered registered registered Refer to Refer to Refer to Battery Less Mode Section 6 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 1 MODEM Initialized Serial port operation setting 1 The batteryless mode is not supported F Xos F X0 F Xo0N FXU FX2c PLCs Initial value Setting range FX0S FXO FXU FX2c FX0S FXO FXU FX2C Cannot be Program Capacity steps 2000 2000 Samal Comment Capacity blocks File register Capacity 9 9 blocks Item Refer to Refer to Section 6 3 Section 6 3 Supplement relay M 384 to 511 500 to 1023 ead 0 to 1023 aed Counter C 32 bit ers 220 to 255 polity 220 to 255 1 Comment Capacity are not supported 2 File registers are not supported 3 Latched type state relays are not supported 274 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 3 Memory Capacity Setting Range 6 3 Memory Capacity Setting Range 1 FX3u FX3uc PLCs Built in memory capacity v Can be set by change of parameter setting E OE Memory Comment File register Special unit initial Positioning Built in CC Link Steps capacity capacity setting capacity setting value setting setting LT setting 7 p setting Unit Block Unit Block Unit Block Unit Block Unit Block 2 FX3S FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Built in memory capacity v Can be set by change of parameter setting 7 Comment capacity setting nile register capacity Positioning setting Memo
371. ot driven simultaneously simultaneously Maximum response frequency of 1 phase counters Counter No when up to three 1 phase counters are C235 C237 C236 C239 C235 C237 C236 C239 C235 C237 C236 C239 driven simultaneously C238 C240 C238 C240 C238 C240 a a When only 1 phase counters When one 2 phase counter 1 kHz or less and one to four 1 phase counters are used When only 2 phase counters are used 1 The maximum response frequency of counters changes when the DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ instructions are used For example the maximum response frequency of C235 and C237 driven at the same time is 10 kHz part A but decreases to 4 kHz part B respectively when the DHSCS and DHSCR instructions are driven at the same time 2 When the DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ instructions are driven at the same time the maximum response frequency is equivalent to the maximum response frequency when the DHSZ instruction is driven 90 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 7 High Speed Counter C 7 In FX0 FXON PLCs Counter type Magnification for Maximum Total frequency Software Calculating total response kHz counter frequency frequency kHz 1 phase C235 to C238 1 counting C241 to C242 input C244 Babi C246 to C247 a Ounng o249 input 2 phase 6251 to C252 2 counting C254 input It is not allowed to use 1 ph
372. oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 4 In FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs Counter type Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used When DHSCS and DHSCR instructions are not used When DHSCS and DHSCR instructions are used Software Total Total Maximum response frequency kHz frequency Maximum response frequency kHz frequency kHz kHz counter Magnification for calculating total frequency 1 phase 1 counting C235 to C245 x1 input Trase C235 C236 C246 1 phase C235 C236 C246 1 phase 2 counting C246 to C250 x1 C251 2 phase 30 C251 2 phase 30 30 input C237 to C245 C247 to C250 1 phase 10 C237 to C245 C247 to C250 1 phase 10 C252 to 255 2 phase 5 C252 to 255 2 phase 5 2 phase 2 counting C251 to C255 x2 input 4 The maximum response frequency is 60 kHz When using two or more high speed counters or when combining a high speed counter and the SPD PLSY or PLSR instruction make sure that the sum of the processing frequency does not exceed the total frequency shown above Calculation example When the DHSCS and DHSCR instructions are not used Used high speed counter No input output Magnification for calculating Calculated value frequency total a C235 1 phase Software counter 30KHz 30kHz C237 1 phase Software counter 10kHz a 10kHz Total frequency 60 kHz Sum of processing frequ
373. owever the filter constant actually becomes the value shown in the table below when 0 is specified M8000 RUN monitor KO Input number Input filter value when 0 is set X000 to X003 50us X004 to X017 200us e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the middle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8056 to M8059 are used 226 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 6 FXos FXo PLCs Inputs X000 to X007 have a digital filter circuit of O to 15 ms respectively The digital filter constant is determined by the value in the range from 0 to 15 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF X010 to X017 function in the same way as X00 to X07 but their digital filter constant is determined by the value stored in the special data register D8021 SUI INO 09q Input terminal Filter 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM oO oO 53 lt 0 n oo TF ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter 6 When the program shown below is executed the filter constant is changed to 0 ms a oS Because the C R filter is provid
374. p the PLC and set the parameters correctly operation Comment area setting error File register area setting error SJ J WELJEd Other setting error 257 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo jue SuOD 9 qd y paiyioeds sog aoinaq eads Aa pue s di Jo Bunjes suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs PLC auo operaron Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Syntax error M8065 D8065 6501 Incorrect combination among instruction device symbol and device number OUT T or OUT C is not provided before the set value 6502 The set value is not provided after OUT T or 6503 OUT C Insufficient number of operands in an instruction A same label number is used more than once Each instruction is checked during programming A same interrupt input or high speed counter input If a syntax error occurs correct the improper instruction in the is used more than once program mode 6505 Stee The device number is beyond the allowable range operation 6504 used more than once 6512 The EXTR instruction is executed though a function extension memory is not attached 258 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 0000 es No error 6601 Device amp Com
375. partie wae d OO 1 A rotary encoder adopting the output type shown above may not operate correctly depending on the electrical compatibility Check the specifications before connecting an encoder 2 This product is the adaptor for high speed input dedicated to FX3U PLCs jue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa soug Q jo Buas pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N 63 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 5 High speed counter list 1 bal 2 Bor 4 O 6 In 1 phase 1 counting input 1 phase 2 counting input 2 phase 2 counting input FX3U FX3UCc PLCs Classification COENS 1 edge counting Data length External reset input External start input 4 edge counting terminal terminal Not provided Not provided 32 bit bidirectional counter Hardware counters C244 OP C245 OP C241 C242 Provided Not provided Software C243 counters 3 C244 C245 Hardware 2 C247 32 bit cain bidirectional Provided Not provided Software counter counters C249 r 1 edge counting C251 Not provided Not provided 32 bit bidirectional Provided t Cope Not provided Not provided They are handled as software counters depending on the operating condition When they are handled as software counters they get restrictions of both the maximum response frequency and the total frequ
376. peration gt The PLC did not execute auto tuning correctly because the set value 6752 lt Step response method gt fluctuated during auto tuning The auto tuning operation is improper Set the sampling time to a value sufficiently longer than the output change cycle or set the input filter constant to a larger value After changing the setting execute auto tuning again 6760 Check the connection to the servo and parameter setting 262 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs 5 3 F X0S F X0 F Xon FXu FX2c PLCs SUI INO 09q 5 3 1 Error detection devices 1 Error detection M8060 and later and D8060 and later When some devices among M8060 to M8067 turn ON D8004 stores the smallest device number and M8004 turns ON 1 M8063 and M8067 are cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Note that M8068 and D8068 are not cleared 2 When M8069 is set to ON the PLC executes the I O bus check If an error is detected D8061 stores the error code 6103 and M8061 turns ON 9q ulseoiieg N9 Oo 99g Only FXu FX2c PLCs support this function BSS 3 When units and blocks having programmed I O numbers are not actually connected M8060 turns ON e and D8004 stores the head device number of unconnected units blocks j Only FXu FX2c PLCs support this function Example When X020 is unconnected 4 Ww gape Value converted into BCD 8 E number 10
377. ple of latched backed up type auxiliary relays In some cases the table should be restarted in the same Left Limit switch Right Limit switch oe LS 1 X000 i LS 2 X001 direction as the direction selected just before power om om interruption lt _ gt Table in reciprocating motion Motor with brake x000 X001 Bishi X000 ON at the left limit M600 ON gt The table is 600 Nee Sek driven rightward gt The power is turned OFF The table stops in an intermediate position gt The table is restarted M600 ON gt X001 ON at the right limit M600 EAN E OFF M601 ON gt The table is driven leftward X001 X000 C601 Leftward drive command M600 M601 2 Method to use a fixed latched backed up type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay When using a fixed latched backed up type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay provide a reset circuit shown in the figure below around the head step in the program M8002 EN Initial pulse M1024 M1999 43 O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWEIE jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 4 State Relay S 2 4 State Relay S State relays S are important devices to simply program stepping type process control
378. put X000 is changed to KO K8 and K16 the input X000 gets addition of the device number converted into octal in the way X000 0 X000 X000 8 X010 and X000 16 X020 and the input number is changed accordingly In the case of word devices and constants The set value of word devices T and C 00 to 199 used in the OUT instruction can be indexed with index registers The right figure shows an example of the indexing X030 MOVP operation in which the set value DO of TO used in KO gt V2 the OUT instruction is indexed with an index Ko Is d v2 register V2 0 Transfer KO or K10 to the index register V2 in advance When X001 is set to ON and if V2 is 0 TO operates with the set value DO D 0 0 DO When X001 is set to ON and if V2 is 10 TO operates with the set value D10 D 0 10 D10 K10 V2 V2 0_ The set value of TO is the current value of DO V2 10 The set value of TO is the current value of D10 Cautions 1 When a 32 bit counter is used in the OUT instruction the set value cannot be indexed with index registers 133 SUI INC 09q og omy 2 5 4D 9 2 9 39 jUue SUOD y paiyioeds aoinag eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s d suo oun4 JeyjQ N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 7 Indexing 3 2 Indexing in instructions In
379. r Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Content of register SUI NO 09q _ Timing clock and positioning Refer to the position control manual for details D 8360 Low order order Low order Y002 Current value register l D 8361 High order Default 0 og M OD D 8362 Y002 Bias speed Default O 8 Bias speed Default 0 D S D 8363 e e ao order Low order 002 Maximum speed i D 8364 High order Default 100000 D 8365 Y002 Creep speed Default 1000 o Creep speed Default 1000 Oo D 8366 Ea p ey order Low order Y002 Zero return speed i D 8367 High order Default 50000 D 8368 sa Acceleration time Default 100 a Ti Dstt E A A A E Positioning FX3U PLCs oo to the positioning control manual for details D 8370 Low order order Low order Y003 Current value register i D 8371 High order Default 0 D 8372 Y003 Bias speed Default O Bias speed Default 0 Per wae i D 8373 Low order order Low order Y003 Maximum speed i D 8374 High order Default 100000 D 8375 Y003 Y003 Creep speed Default 1000 speed Default 1000 C D 8376 Y003 Zero return speed i D 8377 High order order Default 50000 D 8378 Honor Acceleration time Default 100 DA E A E D 8379 Y003 Deceleration time Default 100 Pa ea ee RS2 instruction ch0 FX3G FX3GC PLCs Refer to the data communication manual for details
380. r and name Content of register Advanced function Specification of low battery voltage detection flag for the FX1N BAT Default 1 D 8160 D 8161 D 8162 Unavailable D 8163 FROM and TO instructions Transfer point quantity D 8164 specification D 8165 D 8166 H om D 8168 Leal ais fe D 8169 Pee e Se ee 1 Available in Ver 2 00 or later D 8159 Simple N N link setting Refer to the data communication manual for details D 8170 are eee D18177 Unavailable Pets e D 8172 La aT e 7 pair pimens e ai prase oe Mes eS NEY ee ee ee ee oe RE 2 Available in Ver 2 00 or later SIS NS N DR 7 N k K ERE N SIS Se a SS lt S S lt S K N lt S lt S Corresponding special device M8038 207 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo jue suoD 9 39 WM O 49 oe n 4 gt a E r iq eloeds soug QI SIOJOWEIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Number and name Applicable model Content of register Index register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 Corresponding special device D 8182 i D 8183 l D 8184 D 8185 i D 8186 l D 8187 i D 8188 D 8189 l D 8190 D 8191 D 8192 D
381. r outside the range from Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC Error operation O 9q uiseoineq IN 6701 PO to P4095 due to indexing The label P63 is executed in the CALL instruction ee etaees beara teal Pose ia alae This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation 3 ee Review the program and check the contents of operands used in 6702 The nesting level of CALL instruction is 6 or more instructions ODD 6703 The nesting level of interrupt is 3 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may P S 8 i 4 The nesting level of FOR NEXT instructions is 6 or oce r tor thie following Teasons sila kane ee 6704 ae Example z T5002 itself is not an error However if Z is 100 T500Z means 6705 An unavailable device is used as an operand in an T600 which causes a device number error instruction 4 The device number or data value of an operand in an 6706 rut o instruction is outside the allowable range 8 6707 A file register is accessed without its parameter setting 2 This error occurs while the PLC is executing an operation D e Review the program and check the contents of operands used in instructions one Canines ETC TS eel RITON e Confirm that the specified buffer memory exists in the counterpart m operation equipment a e Confirm that extension cables are connected correctly T This error occurs while the PLC is ex
382. rder bits store the error step number in the instruction This function is available only in FX3u and FX3uc PLCs 243 UlnNO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo jue SuOD 9 qd y paljioeds aoinaq eads Aa s3013 SIOJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suooun4 24o N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 5 Errors 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2 Operations of special devices for error detection Special auxiliary relays for error detection and special data registers for error detection operate under the relationship shown below The error occurrence state can be checked by monitoring the contents of auxiliary relays and data registers from a programming tool or by using the PLC diagnosis function D8069 gt I O bus check D8009 gt D8060 gt D8061 gt D8062 gt D8063 gt D8438 gt D8064 gt D8065 gt D8066 gt D8067 gt M8009 M8060 M8061 M8062 M8063 M8438 M8064 M8065 M8066 M8067 M8316 M8318 24 VDC failure I O configuration error PLC hardware error D8004 gt m8004 Special M number Turns ON when an error occurs smallest number of error occurrence Serial communication error 0 Serial communication error 1 Serial communication error 2 Parameter error Svntax error Error step number ECA EE The error step number is also stored in D8069 for a program consisting of 32K step
383. re ae ee a f5 f5 RE 5 5 When the 1 phase 2 input or 2 phase 2 input counter C is in the down counting mode 5 E k the corresponding M8 is ON e ON Down counting operation e OFF Up counting operation 5 f5 5 5 FH JY JH k e s f5 f5 176 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 2 Special data registers D8000 and later 1 FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3uc PLCs SUI NO 09q _ Applicable model Number and name Content of register i 2 FX3U Fx3uc FX3G Fx36c Fx3s Corresponding special device PLC status The initial value is shown on the right Unit 1 ms Transferred from the system ROM when the PLC power is D 8000 turned ON Watchdog timer The value overwritten by a program is valid after the END or a ae ay ae WDT instruction was executed Refer to Subsection 4 2 2 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo 20 S o D peoo 2 t PLC type and system a _ D version Shown Version 1 00 on the right 2 2K steps 4 4K steps D 8002 8 8K steps Memory capacity In the case of 16K steps or more 8 is written to D8002 and 16 32 or 64 is written to D8102 Type of the built in memory type of the RAM EEPROM and EPROM memory cassettes and ON
384. re handled as software counters High speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters Under some conditions however hardware counters are handled as software counters In this case use such counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency determined for software counters gJ D O D O D Conditions under which hardware counters are handled as software counters 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq Counter No Conditions under which hardware counters are handled as software counters Because hardware counters execute counting at the hardware level of the PLC they can execute counting without regard to the total frequency However they are handled as software counters in the following conditions In this case the maximum response frequency and total frequency are restricted in the same way as other software counters OO Use M8380 to M8387 to know whether high speed counters are handled as hardware counters or software S 5 counters only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2283 e When the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT instruction is used for a hardware counter number the 20 3 corresponding hardware counter is handled as a software counter D FX2N FX2NC PLCs do not support the DHSCT instruction Example C235 4 OUT C 32 A EN ENO 8 FX3U FX3UC PLCs CCoil C235 5 C236 Q C237 C238 C239 5 C240 YOOO m C244 OP 2 re In this case C235 is handled as a software counter C248 OP
385. re root extractions of integers the portion after the decimal point is truncated 3 In PLCs floating point operations are available to achieve higher accuracy in such operations FX0S FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU FX2c PLCs do not support floating point operations 125 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Real Numbers Binary floating point real number When handling a binary floating point real number in data registers use a pair of data registers having consecutive device numbers When D11 and D10 are used for example a binary floating point is handled as shown below je D 11 b15 to bop __________3k lt D 10 b15 to b0 gt 27 26 25 21 20 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 21 9 22 9 23 S E7 E6 E5 E1 EO A22 A21 A20 A2 At AO b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b2 b1 bO kK gt kK 8 bits in exponent part gt 23 bits in mantissa part EO to E 7 Oor1 AO to A22 0 or 1 Sign for mantissa part in case 60 tob341 0 0 Positive 1 Negative Binary floating point real number 2 A22x27 A21x2 2 e09 A0x2 43 Ye Q ET x2 E6 x2 0x29 15127 Example A22 1 A21 0 A20 1 A19 to AO 0 E7 1 E6 to E1 0 E0 1 Binary floating point real number 20 1 x27 0x22 1x23 e9 0x243 x Q 1x21 40x28 40004129 15127
386. rection Provided D8019 Day of the week data sponds to Sunday to my l Saturday For the real time clock setting method refer to Subsection 4 2 8 2 Changing over the year display from the two digit year mode to the four digit year mode When displaying year in four digits add the following program D8018 is set to the four digit year mode in the second scan in the PLC RUN mode FXuU FX2c PLCs do not support the four digit year mode M8002 Initial pulse K2000 1 The PLC is usually operating in the two digit year mode When the above instruction is executed in the RUN mode and K2000 fixed value is transferred to D8018 year data for only 1 scan time D8018 switches to the four digit year mode 2 Execute this program every time the PLC becomes the RUN mode Only the year data is displayed in four digits when K2000 is transferred The current date and time are not affected at all 3 Inthe four digit year mode the set values 80 to 99 correspond to 1980 to 1999 and 00 to 79 correspond to 2000 to 2079 Examples 80 1980 99 1999 00 2000 79 2079 4 When connecting the data access unit FX 10DU FX 20DU or FX 25DU Select the two digit year mode Year is not displayed correctly in the four digit year mode in the current version of these units Note that the clock of the PLC switches to the two digit year mode when the PLC clock operating in the four digit year mode is set from the FX 10DU FX 20DU or
387. red to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment b Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices c All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the pro
388. ring Decreases a numeric value Decreases a numeric value at high speed when pressed and held for 1 second or more Increases a numeric value Increases a numeric value at high speed when pressed and held for 1 second or more Moves to the next set item OK Displays the message Current time is set when pressed while the second data is flickering 5 Press the OK or ESC key to return to the Selection screen 6 Press the ESC key to return to the Menu screen Prritdrtdtttbbtttitttteidt 7 I rrent time O O O O O O O S O O O S S A lock setting time Current A a O a E S U E O E E E a a a a a a gs s gt ZClock settings Clock 19 8 219932 riad 7 11 19 Thu setting Clock setting 31 1 2004 23 59259Sat The last two digits of year are displayed in the initial setting Current time gt p Clock settings 221 SUI NC 09q 9q ulseoiieg INQ Oo jue SuoD 9 309 WM O 49 oe n 4 gt Q r iq 90lNaq eloeds sioug Q sIa OWeJed jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 2 Method using a program 1 Method using the TWR instruction dedicated to time setting FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructi
389. rogram part B in above program e For writing the symbolic information and changing the set values of timers and counters using a peripheral equipment it is recommended to create programs with the set values specified indirectly If the set values are specified directly programs cannot be restored from the symbolic information after the set values are changed 93 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 8 Data Register and File Register D 2 8 1 Data registers store numeric values File registers are handled as initial values of data registers FXos and FXo are not applicable to file registers Each data register or file register stores 16 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign Two data registers or file registers combined can store 32 bit data whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign For the functions and operations of file registers refer to Subsection 2 8 4 Numbers of data registers and file registers The tables below show data register and file register D numbers Numbers are assigned in decimal 1 In FX3S FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc PLCs Data registers Latched batt Fixed latched File registers latched battery ate Oa rere k i backed up type General type AUS ORE battery backed up Special type p type type FX3U FX3UC DO to D199 D200 to D511 D512 to
390. rom When program is changed STOP Cneeses Checked When program is transferred STOP Ooo l 7 When PLC receives signal from counterpart station When special parameter is changed STOP Always 244 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs 5 1 2 Error Code List and Action S PLC S Error operation Contents of error Action code at error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 Head unconnected I O device number 9q uiseoineq IN Example When X020 is unconnected aola 0 Value converted into BCD Unconnected I O relay numbers are programmed Example Continues Device number The PLC continues its operation Oo a chee 1 Input X 0 Output Y Modify the program if necessary S 5S DS O e 1st to 3rd digits Device number a e Ath digit I O type 1 Input X 0 Output Y F Example When D8060 stores 1020 inputs X020 and later are unconnected Serial communication error M8438 D8438 4 0o00 gt Noeror y 3801 Parity error overrun error or framing error 8 3802 Communication character error 3803 Communication data sum check error RE ae 2 e Ethernet communication Inverter communication computer link a 3804 Data format error and programming 3805 Confirm that parameters are set correctly in accordance with the 3806 Monitoring timeout error application 3807 Modem initialization error Simple N N link
391. ructions do not agree 6622 6623 6624 6625 259 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs PLC pror operaron Contents of error Action code at error occurrence The following instructions cannot be used between obee STL and RET MC MCR I SRET and IRET 6627 The RET instruction is not provided The following instructions cannot be used in the main 6628 program This error occurs when a combination of instructions is incorrect in Stops I SRET and IRET the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of N The SRET or IRET instruction is not provided instructions is incorrect peration i i 6630 The STL RET or MC MCR instructions are provided Correct the instructions in the program mode so that their mutual in a subroutine relationship becomes correct 6631 The SRET instruction is provided in an invalid position The FEND instruction is provided in an invalid 6632 eis position 260 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 ae No error There is no jump destination for CJ or CALL instruction A label is provided after the END instruction Device amp Common 5 2 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs PLC Error operation 1 9q uiseoineq INQ om An independent label is provided between the FOR instruct
392. ructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN 1 Detailed explanation may be provided by a separate manual in some products FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Positioning of This Manual 3 When using FXo0s X0 F X0n FXu FX2c PLCs MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Additional Manual Q L F This manual explains programming methods specifications functions etc required to create structured programs Structured This manual FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Additional Manual FX This manual explains devices and parameters for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction FX Additional Manual This manual explains sequence instructions for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions FX Additional Manual This manual explains application functions for structured programs provided by GX Works2 Structured FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Additional Manual FX This manual explains details of parallel link computer link no protocol communication RS instruction and programming communication for FX PLCs Explanation of instructions and instructions used in program examples are expressed for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN Individual manuals Manu
393. ry capacity setting Unit Block setting Unit Block Number of 5 Unit Block It oc SEDE FX3G FX3G FX3G FX3G 2000 steps 0to3 to 3 0to3 to 3 Oto3 to 3 Oto3 to 3 3 FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2Nc PLCs Built in memory capacity v Can be set by change of parameter setting Can be extended by optional memory f Comment capacity setting File register capacity setting Number of memory capacity Setting Unit Block Unit Block steps FX1N FX2N FX1N FX2N FX1N FX2N cis FXINC FX2NC Ems FXinc FX2NC 2000 steps Otos Oto3 OtoS Oto 0to3 Oto 3 4 FXos FX0 FXonN FXuU FX2c PLCs Built in memory capacity v Can be set by change of parameter setting Can be extended by optional memory Comment capacity setting File register capacity setting Number of At Unit Block Unit Block steps FX0S FXU Pao n FXU EILIA PAD FX2C on Ra TAE FX2C 2000 steps Se Otos to 3 Otos to 3 0 to 3 275 UlNO 09q 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo jue SuOD 9 qd y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa 5S O n SJO OWEIed jo Buas pue sedi suooun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 3 Memory Capacity Setting Range Caution on setting the memory capacity e When one block is set in each capacity setting the memory capacity is reduced by 500 steps Each setting should satisfy the following expression Memory capacity Com
394. s D 8134 HSZ and PLSY instructions ee ee M8132 D 8135 Number of target pulses for speed pattern E ee ee N Se ia D 8136 PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated total number of pulses output to Number and name Content of register D 8138 HSCT instruction Table counter v M8138 D 8139 HSCS HSCR HSZ and HSCT instructions y 4 M8139 Number of instructions being executed D 8140 PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated y Z y 7 2 i D 8141 High order number of pulses output to YOOO D 8142 PLSY and PLSR instructions Accumulated 7 e y 7 y i D 8143 High order number of pulses output to Y001 Pe oe ee ee ee oe PEt ee ee es Pee ree i eee Pei i ee a i Die M a E D18149 Ce eae 184 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u Fx3uc FX3G Fx3Gc Fx3s COMesPonding special device Inverter communication function Refer to the data communication manual for details D 8150 Response waiting time in inverter communication ch1 pee ee Step number being processed in inverter communication D 8151 ch1 v v v3 v v M8151 Initial value 1 D 8152 2 Error code in inverter communication ch1 M8152 Latched step where error has occurred in inverter D 8153 2 communication ch1 v 43 v M8153 Initial value 1 Parameter number in whi
395. s one shot timers and flicker timers can be easily created using this instruction Off delay timer and one shot timer X000 STMR e The value specified in m is handled as EN ENO the set value of a timer specified in input T10 s d MO variable K100 jm The set value is 10 sec in this example X000 MO 40 sec 40 sec e MO is an off delay timer M 1 10 sec 10 sec e M1 is a one shot timer which operates after the input turns OFF from ON M 2 10 sec e M2 and M3 are flicker timers and connected as shown in the program example below for flicker ms T o CITI L 53 O D O D O D Ul S2913 OO jUue SUOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa soug Q jo Buas pue sadi SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 5 Timer T Flicker timer X000 M3 e When M3 is connected as shown in the left figure M2 and M1 become flicker outputs X000 e When X000 is set to OFF MO M1 and M3 turn OFF and T10 is reset after the set time M 1 e Do not use the timers used here in other general circuits again In addition the timer time can be set according to the switch input time using the teaching timer instruction TTMR 2 5 Handling timers as numeric devices In timers the output contact operating in accordance with the set value is used in some cases and the current value is us
396. s on backup methods against power interruption refer to Section 2 6 Q 2 General type and latched backed up type 32 bit bidirectional counters a The valid setting range of 32 bit binary bidirectional counters is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 3 decimal constant S The counting direction up or down is specified by special auxiliary relays M8200 to M8234 e When M8A AA is driven for the counter CA AA the counter executes down counting When M8A AA is not driven for the counter CA AA the counter executes up counting Refer to the previous page e The positive or negative set value can be specified by a constant K or the contents of data registers D When data registers are used 32 bit data composed of a pair of serial data registers is handled as the set value However when handling 32 bit data in structured programs it is not allowed to specify 16 bit data registers directly different from simple projects Because 32 bit counters have 32 bit length it is allowed to specify 32 bit data directly Use a label when handling 32 bit data For example when specifying 32 bit data using two data registers D1 and DO define DO using a global label 57 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 6 Counter C e When the coil C200 is driven by the counting input X014 the counter starts up counting or down counting When the current value of the counter increases from 6 to 5
397. s or FX2N PLC Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs FX2NC Series or FX2NC PLC Generic name of FX2Nc Series PLCs FX1N Series or FX1N PLC Generic name of FX1N Series PLCs Generic name of FX1Nc Series PLCs FXINC Series or FX1NC PLC These products can only used in Japan FX1S Series or FX1S PLC Generic name of FX1S Series PLCs FXU Series or FXU PLC Generic name of FXU FX FX2 Series PLCs FX2c Series or FX2c PLC Generic name of FX2c Series PLCs FXON Series or FXON PLC Generic name of FXON Series PLCs FXos Series or FXos PLC Generic name of FXos Series PLCs FX0 Series or FXo PLC Generic name of FXo Series PLCs Special adapters CF card special adapter Generic name of CF card special adapters CF ADP FX3U CF ADP Ethernet adapter Abbreviated name for FX3U ENET ADP Programming language ST Abbreviation of structured text language Structured ladder Abbreviation of ladder diagram language FBD Abbreviation of function block diagram language Manuals Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Abbreviation of MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals FX Structured Programming Manual Abbreviation of FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Device amp Common FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Abbreviation of FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction FX Structured Programming Manual Application Functions COMMUNICATION CONTROL E
398. s or less Circuit error Operation error 1st error step No latch M8068 Operation error latch gt D8313 D8312 the first error step number is also stored in D8068 for a program consisting of 32K steps or less Clear errors and then forcibly clear M8068 using a programming tool D8317 D8316 Error step number Unconnected I O specification error BFM initialization Error unit number failure gt p bee Error BMF number D8487 gt M8487 USB communication error D8449 gt M8449 Special block error D8489 gt M8489 Special parameter error 3 Error detection timing Error item M8060 I O configuration error M8061 PLC hardware error M8062 Serial communication error 0 CHO M8063 Serial communication error 1 CH1 M8438 Serial communication error 2 CH2 M8064 Parameter error M8065 Syntax error M8066 Circuit error M8067 Operation error M8068 Operation error latch M8109 Output refresh error M8316 Unconnected I O specification error M8318 BFM initialization failure M8449 Special block error M8487 USB communication error M8489 Special parameter error D8166 Special block error condition Error detection timing When PLC mode When power is turned ON from switches from Other timing OFF STOP to RUN Checked Checked Checked Always When PLC receives signal from counterpart station When PLC receives signal from counterpart station When PLC receives signal f
399. sable M 8058 Timer interrupt BOO disable M 8059 Counter interrupt Disables interrupts 1010 to 1060 disable M 8050 6 Input interrupt V v V v V E yp 1000 disable ad o 306 M 8051 Bo Input interrupt V v v v V o 1100 disable l ee l M 8052 When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer interrupt is ON 7 Input interrupt V V v V v E i Even if an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a I20L disable acceptance of the corresponding interrupt is disabled M 8053 the interrupt program is not executed a Input interrupt For example when the interrupt 1000 is given while v 5 i300 disable M8050 is ON to disable the interrupt I000 the interrupt a M 8054 program is not executed even within the interrupt i Input interrupt enabled program area y r 7 T 7 1400 disable 4 When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer interrupt is OFF M 8055 a When an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs it Input temp is accepted v V v Vv v 1507 disable b The interrupt program is executed immediately if M 8056 interrupts are enabled by the El instruction Timer interrupt If the DI instruction disables interrupts execution of k 4 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 141 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000
400. ses from 6 to 5 the output contact is set turned ON When the current value decreases from 5 to 6 the output contact is reset turned OFF e The current value increases or decreases without regard to the operation of the output contact When the counter executes up counting from 2 147 483 647 the count value becomes 2 147 483 648 In the same way when the counter executes down counting from 2 147 483 648 the count value becomes 2 147 483 647 This type of operation is called ring counter e When the reset input X011 turns ON and then the RST instruction is executed the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the output contact is turned OFF e In a latched type high speed counter the current value output contact operation status and reset status of the counter are latched backed up even if the power is interrupted 74 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 2 Devices in Detail 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 1 phase 2 counting input These counters are 32 bit bidirectional counters The operation of the output contact caused by the current value is equivalent to that in 1 phase 1 counting input type high speed counters described above OUT C 32 EN ENO CCoil OUTEG 32 EN ENO CCoil CValue While X012 is ON C246 executes up counting when the input X000 turns ON from OFF and executes down counting when the input X001 turns ON from OFF The up down cou
401. source in the MOV instruction is indexed with the index register V6 Transfer KO or K20 to the index register V6 in advance When X005 is set to ON and if V6 is 0 K6 X004 K 6 0 is transferred to D10 When X005 is set to ON and if V6 is 20 K26 20 K 6 20 is transferred to D10 0 fu nnn ssn sn ese ssascsacsscscsscesssssssssss X005 KO V6 K20 V6 K6V6 D10 V6 0 K6 K6 0 D10 V6 20 K26 K6 20 D10 136 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 7 Indexing 3 3 Indexing example for instructions whose number of times of use is restricted By indexing the target device number with index registers V and Z it is possible to change the target device number for each program When this method is applied to an instruction whose number of times of use is restricted it is regarded as if a same instruction is used multiple times in the program Example of indexing operation using the TKY instruction Two sets of key entries of 0 to 9 given from the ten key pad store the input data to DO and D2 The TKY instruction can be programmed only once but two sets of key entries of 0 to 9 are ee available by indexing the head device number for input data the head device number for input data storage destination and the head device number for turning ON the key entry information Gide Even if V is changed while the TKY
402. stination Number of Records 1 to 16 16 Device Range R o 255 Occupy 16 device points per record 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo lv Sek access log save destination E SFL Number of Records 1 to 32 J a 8 ao Oo D Device Range R 256 575 aoe 5 Occupy 10 device points per record Ii Set save destination For the result of time setting 4 Ww Device Range R 576 G O D Occupy 8 device poinks 2 Please set each device range so that they do not overlap a with the one for automatically assigned device or positioning device Check Cancel Set item Contents of setting Setting range Set error log save destination Error log is stored if checked Nica beRor Records Set the number of records in the error log ney One record occupies devices 16 points Head device type Select the device type of the error log save destination between D and R O S wn Device Head device number Set the head device number of the error log save destination DOS Range The last device number in the occupied range calculated from the head device 2 p Last device number ee a TOR number and number of records is displayed was T Set access log save destination Access log is stored if checked Numberoi Pecos Set the number of records in the access log 1 to 32 One record occupies 10 points Head device type Select the device type of the access log save destination between
403. t M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FXOS EXON FXu FXoc Corresponding FX0 special device Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details 118060 O con guraton eror fT Bi060 B06 Pommer Tf M 8062 PLC PP communication error communication error a ee D8062 M 8063 Parallel link error D8063 RS 232C communication error M 8064 Parameter error error Fee D8064 M 8067 Operation error ar D8069 M 8069 C re i 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Note that M8068 and D8068 are not cleared 2 Available in Ver 1 20 or later 3 When M8069 is set to ON the PLC executes the I O bus check When an error occurs D8061 stores the error code 6103 and M8061 turns ON Number and name Operation and function Parallel link M 80704 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the master station Li be i 4 M 80714 Parallel link Should be set to ON for the slave station oe eae a M 8072 Parallel link Remains ON during operation Parallel link Turns ON when M8070 or M8071 is set 4 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Sampling trace M8074 RAM file register use mode backed up against power 75 j i interruption M8075 See a aa a a a i M8076 Sampling trace preparation complete execution start i command nee A er ee ee ae a e nee Denson ice nome ee wee Doe ee eee et ee I TO E 5 Available in
404. t available in FXOS FXO PLCs Latch range setting Keyword 272 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 2 Parameter Initial Values 6 2 Parameter Initial Values 1 FX3uU FX3uc PLCs Item Initial value Setting range Program Capacity steps 16000 Comment Capacity blocks SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 File register Capacity blocks Memory Special Function Block Not used Refer to Section Capacity Settings 6 3 Positioning Instruction Notused Settings Built in CC Link LT Oo 4 i Not used ose 53 gt lt 0 Ho Pe Settings a3 1 T Supplement relay M 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 F arched State S 500 to 999 0 to 999 backed up Counter C 16 bit 100 to 199 O to 199 4 range Counter C 32 bit 220 to 255 200 to 255 i Data Register D 200 to 511 0 to 511 3 Program title Not registered Keyword Not registered lt 4 Battery Less Mode Not used Refer to Section MODEM Initialized Not provided 6 1 RUN Terminal Input Not provided 5S O n Serial port operation setting Not set 1 Available only in the FX3Uc 32MT LT 2 2 FX3G FX3Gc PLCs Item Initial value Setting range Program Capacity steps 8000 o oS Comment Capacity blocks S28 Memory Refer to Section Zo 8 6 3 T Capacity a al Capacity cannot be changed cannot be changed F Letdies cannot be changed cannot be changed 2 backed up cannot
405. t picauci Contents aeee or Additional Manual name code PLC main unit Details about the hardware including I O FX0 FXON HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D47501 Supplied with product specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FXo FXON PLC main unit Details about the hardware including I O FXos HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D55301 Supplied with product specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FXos PLC main unit Details about the hardware including I O FX FX2C HARDWARE MANUAL JY992D47401 Supplied with product specifications wiring installation and maintenance of the FXU FX2c PLC main unit Programming Details about simple N N link parallel link ee opala JY997D16901 Additional Manual computer link and no protocol communication 09R715 RS instruction and FX2N 232IF Manuals of models whose production is finished Production is finished for FXoS FX0 F XON F XU FX2C F X2N FX2NC PLCs 11 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation generic name Name PLCs FX3U Series or FX3U PLC Generic name of FX3U Series PLCs FX3UC Series or FX3uc PLC Generic name of FX3uc Series PLCs FX3G Series or FX3G PLC Generic name of FX3G Series PLCs FX3GC Series or FX3GC PLC Generic name of FX3Gc Series PLCs FX3S Series or FX3S PLC Generic name of FX3s Series PLCs FX2N Serie
406. t program is not executed S 8 S Input interrupt For example when the interrupt 100 is given while 4 4 4 4 aS I30C disable M8050 is ON to disable the interrupt 1000 the interrupt Z M 8054 program is not executed even within the interrupt enabled oo sabe when a speci fede 1400 disable When a special M for disabling input interrupt or timer interrupt is OFF A M 8055 a When an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs it is 9 Input interrupt accepted J 7 gt I50L disable b The interrupt program is executed immediately if 2 M 8056 interrupts are enabled by the El instruction D Timer interrupt If the DI instruction disables interrupts execution of the interrupt program is paused until the El instruction 5 I OQO disable enables interrupts M 8057 m Timer interrupt They are P J S i7 disable provided for the pulse catch M 8058 function as Timer interrupt described below 4 4 I8OO disable 6 M 8059 vA Counter interrupt Disables interrupts 1010 to 1060 wl V a3 disable aS p M 8056 ZS Pulse catch v v X00 M 8057 T Pulse catch v They disable the a X01 Set to ON at the rising edge of the corresponding input signal interrupt F M 8058 Set to OFF by the RST instruction processing as Pulse catch 7 v described above 5 X02 S M 8059 Pulse catch v v X03 171 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device Lis
407. t scan mode 1 T oe button and stop button XOO programming equipment 2 Clears D6000 to D79999 when set to ON while M8074 is ON Makes the PLC execute cyclic operations while keeping the scan time specified in D8039 D8039 Refer to Subsection 4 2 15 Activated when the END instruction is executed Available in Ver 3 07 or later Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP 169 UlnNO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N Oo QOUWM oO oO 53 lt 0 n oo a8 3 ow r gt D eloeds sioug Q S19 UELJed Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FXOS EXON FXu FXoc Corresponding FX0 special device Step ladder and annunciator M 8040 Disables Disables transfer between states between states Transfer disable M 8041 1 Enables pensne from the initial state during automatic Transfer start operation M 8042 Start pulse Gives ives pulse output in response to startinput output in Gives pulse output in response to startinput to start input M 8043 Zero point return Should be set to ON in the zero return mode end state complete rj M 8044 oe Should be set to ON when the machine zero point is detected v v v v Zero point condition M 8045 Disables reset of
408. t your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Memory access error Po Now Parity error overrun error or framing error Communication character error Communication data sum check error soe Ses e Ethernet communication Inverter communication computer link Data format error and programming Confirm that parameters are set correctly in accordance with the Monitoring timeout error application Modencinitialization enor e Simple N N link parallel link MODBUS communication etc Simple NN IR Confirm that the program is set correctly in accordance with the N N Network setting error e Remote maintenance Continues Parallel link character error Confirm that the modem power is ON and that AT commands are operation i Parallel link sum check error set properly B a e Confirm the wiring of communication cables Parallel link format error MODBUS communication error When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter 246 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Parameter error M8064 D8064 Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs PLC Error operation O
409. ta communication manual for details M 8120 Unavailable RE RE bE GE SI S SI S SI S SI S SI S High speed counter comparison high speed table and positioning Positioning is offered for FX1S FX1N FX1NC PLCs M 8130 HSZ instruction Table comparison mode fees D8130 M 8131 HSZ instruction Table comparison complete flag Z D8131 Vv D8132 D8134 M 8132 HSZ and PLSY instructions Speed pattern mode M 8133 HSZ instruction Table comparison complete flag M 8134 M 8135 M 8136 M8137 Unavailable M 8138 M 8139 M 8140 ZRN instruction CLR signal output function enable M 8141 M 8142 iMje143 Unavailable M 8144 M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command ne me MIST 162 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model FX1s FX1N FX2N FX1NC Fx2nc Corresponding special device Inverter communication function Refer to the data communication manual for details M 8154 Defined in each EXTR instruction ppt D8154 IM 8155 Indicates that a communication port is used in the EXTR D8155 instruction Indicates that a communication error or parameter error has M 8157 Communication error latch for EXTR instruction ot t D8157 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 Available in Ver 3 00 or later
410. tal Module Connected l l stations including reserve stations connected to the master station Retry Count Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs Automatic Reconnection Station Set the number of remote I O stations remote device stations and or intelligent device stations Count that can be returned to the system in one link scan Select the data link status when an error occurs in the programmable controller CPU on the PLC Down Select i master station Station Information Setting This button displays the CC Link Station Information dialog box Remote Device Station Initial This button displays the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station No Setting dialog Setting box 298 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 6 Types and Setting of Parameters Device amp Common 6 6 Parameter setting by GX Works2 2 Click Operation Setting in the Setting Contents column on the Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration dialog box Operation Setting SUI NO 09q _ Parameter Mame 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Data Link Disorder Station Setting Hold input data Oo Case of CPL STOP Setting See Clears compulsorily z D u D oom gt O OK Cancel 4 oO o Set item Contents of setting Setting range o Parameter Name Set the parameter name 8 half width characters 5 4 Data Link Disorder Set whether or not the input data status from
411. ters with quotation marks Character string Character string In a constant of an instruction up to 32 half width characters are available 1 When the FX3U 4HSX ADP is connected to an FX3U PLC the maximum input frequency is set as follows 1 phase 200 kHz 2 phases 100 kHz 1 edge counting 100 KHz 4 edge counting 2 For supported functions refer to Chapter 4 For handling of the latched backed up area refer to Section 1 2 36 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y 2 2 Input Output Relays X and Y Some input relay and output relay numbers are secured in the main unit and others are assigned to extension equipment according to the connection order Because input output relays are numbered in octal numeric values such as 8 and 9 do not exist gJ D O D O D 2 2 1 Numbers of input output relays 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq The tables below show input relay X and output relay Y numbers Numbers are assigned in octal 1 FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3uc PLCs OO FX3U 16M FX3U 32M FX3U 48M FX3U 64M FX3U 80M FX3U 128M When extended OUD inoui X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X027 X000 to X037 X000 to X047 X000 to X077 X000 to X367 256 S2o FX3U PLC p 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points poi
412. time the operation time becomes longer As a result a watchdog timer error may occur How to reset the watchdog timer The watchdog timer can be reset in the middle of a sequence program using the WDT instruction This reset method is recommended when the operation time of a specific sequence program is long or when many special function units blocks are connected For the WDT instruction refer to the FX Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Caution on changing the watchdog timer time The watchdog timer time can be set to 32767 ms maximum However the operation error detection timing is delayed if the watchdog timer time is long It is recommended to use the initial value 200 ms or 100 ms when no problems are expected in operations The watchdog timer time becomes 0 when a value less than 0 is set to D8000 Low battery voltage detection M8005 and M8006 These special devices detect low voltage in the lithium battery used for memory backup When the PLC detects low battery voltage the BATT BAT LED turns ON In FX3G FX3Gc PLCs the ALM LED turns ON when the PLC detects low battery voltage if an optional battery is used and the battery mode is selected by the parameter setting Use the following program to notify low battery voltage to the outside Program example M8005 0 001 Low battery voltage Low battery voltage M8006 latches low battery voltage 217 SUI NO 09q
413. tion writes the contents of specified extension registers R to extension file registers ER 6 Use this instruction to store the contents of arbitrary extension registers R to extension file registers ER ee 9 OS 2 While a memory cassette is attached extension file registers in the memory cassette are accessed 2 p While a memory cassette is not attached extension file registers in the EEPROM built in the PLC are Jae accessed 0 Q F D zA D es D 107 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 1 Relationship between extension file registers and extension registers Extension file registers and extension registers have the following positional relationship inside the PLC a FX3uU FX3uUc PLCs Extension registers R Extension file registers ER Available in built in RAM Available in attached memory cassette SAVER instruction in units of sector RWER instruction RO l in units of point ERO 2048 points 2048 points 1 sector General purpose device R2048 2048 point ER2048 2048 point sequence program General applied pointS LOADR instruction pom instruction R4096 in units of point ER4096 SSO OO Apn ER6144 m INITR instruction E 2048 points LOGR instruction initialization Sees 16 sectors N a in units of sector se EEEE DEEE y cA Z INITR instruction initialization in units of sector
414. tive operation examples among various applications For the full use of data registers refer to the explanation on applied instructions provided later 1 Specifying the set value of a timer or counter A counter or timer operates while regarding the contents of a specified data register as its set value 2 Operation examples using the MOV instruction a Changing the current value of a counter The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the contents of D5 The current value of the counter C10 is transferred to D4 16 bit type 200 decimal value is transferred to D10 D10 80000 decimal value is transferred to D10 and D11 D10 Because a numeric value larger than 32767 is 32 bit data a 32 bit operation is required When a data register on the low order side D10 is specified a data register on the high order side D11 is automatically occupied 97 O D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI jo Buas pue s di SJ J WEJEd suo oun4 2yo N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 8 Data Register and File Register D d Transferring the contents of a data register to another data register The contents of D10 are transferred to D20 3 Using unoccupied timers and counters as data registers Operation example using the MOV instruction Timers and counters not us
415. to 337 z 1 Input X 0 Output Y 2 Operations of special devices for error detection Special auxiliary relays for error detection and special data registers for error detection operate under the relationship shown below The error occurrence state can be checked by monitoring the contents of auxiliary relays and data registers from a programming tool or by using the PLC diagnosis function SJOUF D8009 M8009 24 VDC failure D8060 M8060 I O configuration error 6 o Os M8069 gt D8061 gt M8061 PLC hardware error D8004 W gt M8004 S o 320 j T D8062 gt M8062 PLC PP communication Special M number Turns ON when To 2 chec error smallest number an error occurs d gt D8063 gt M8063 Parallel link error Or EMOR OCCUNTENGE M8073 Parallel link mode 7 M8063 RS 232C o communication error 4 D8064 gt M8064 Parameter error a D8065 s M8065 Syntax error D8069 Error step number S l D8066 gt M8066 Circuit error Clear errors and then forcibly clear Monitor the M8068 using a programming tool contents of D8067 gt M8067 Operation error D to check E M8068 Operation error latch gt D8068 1st error step the error code p D8068 epee 263 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 3 FXOS FX0 FXON FXU FX2C PLCs 3 Error detection timing Error detection timing When power is When PLC mode turned ON from switches from Other timin
416. to X005 or more 1300 M8053 FX2N FX2NC 20 us X000 X001 or more 1400 VESA 50 us X002 to X005 or more 1500 M8055 Interrupt disabling flag Input Interrupt at rising edge X000 1001 X001 1101 X002 1201 X003 1301 X004 1401 X005 1501 Interrupt at falling edge c FXos FXo FXoN PLCs Input interrupt pointer ON duration or OFF duration of input signal Interrupt disabling flag Input Interrupt at rising edge X000 1001 X001 1101 X002 1201 X003 1301 Interrupt at falling edge M8050 1100 M8051 100 us or more 1200 M8052 1300 M8053 d FXu FX2c PLCs Input interrupt pointer ON duration or OFF duration of input signal Interrupt disabling flag Input Interrupt at rising edge X000 1001 X001 1101 X002 1201 X003 1301 X004 1401 X005 1501 Interrupt at falling edge M8050 1100 M8051 1200 M8052 200 us or more 1300 M8053 1400 M8054 1500 M8055 120 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 11 Pointer P and I Prohibition on redundant use of input terminals Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD DSZR DVIT ZRN instructions and general purpose inputs Make sure to use each input terminal only once gJ D O D O D Delay function of input interrupt pointers Input interrupt pointers have the function to delay the execution of interrupt routine in units of 1 ms FXos F
417. to the latched backed up area by parameter 4 setting W 2 This area is latched backed up It can be changed to the non latched non backed up area by 8 parameter setting O 3 This area is fixed to the latched backed up type The contents can be cleared by the RST and ZRST S instructions 4 This area is fixed to the non latched non backed up type The characteristics of latch backup cannot be changed soug QI SIJOWeIe jo Bunjes pue s di suo oun4 2yo N 45 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 4 State Relay S 2 4 2 Functions and operation examples 1 General type In the stepping type process control shown in the left figure when the start signal X000 turns ON the state relay S20 is set turned ON and the solenoid valve YOOO for moving down is M8002 S2 STL activated EN ENO When the lower limit switch X001 turns ON the S2 s state relay S21 is set turned ON and the sa S2 process solenoid valve Y001 for clamping is activated X000 SEM When the clamp confirmation limit switch X002 EN ENO turns ON the state relay S22 is set turned ON d S20 When the operation proceeds to the next step sa ec ekg anaes the state relay in the preceding step is STL automatically reset turned OFF EN ENO S20 When the PLC is turned OFF all of general type Moving down state relays are turned OFF Yo00 S20 process When the ON
418. tput holding in STOP mMode ccecccceessseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 4 2 14 All output disable command M8034 ccc eccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeesaeeesaees 231 4 2 15 Independent operation for RUN STOP input M8035 to M8037 cc eeccceecececeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 232 4 2 16 Constant scan mode M8039 and D8039 Fixed scan time cceecceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 233 4 2 17 State control in program by STL instruction M8040 ec ccecceceececeeeeeseeeeeeseeeessaeeeeeaees 233 4 2 18 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 ce cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 4 2 19 Analog special adapters M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299 EX3S FXSG EX3GG FASUIFEXSUG PLCS koosne a a e a e i a EnO 236 5 Errors 243 5 1 EX3S EX3G FX3GC EXSU EXSUC PLC S es aaia Ea 243 91 Eror doteCion dEV COS ctes chs eles ot e a a eaa ea a a 243 Bled Eror code Listand ACU ON siansa a r a AE ES 245 5 2 FX1S PXAN PXAING FX2N FPXRANCG PLCS oocec gececsn lech deceetec lace hevec co adedceves becedentedieeiedel eden 254 92 1 ElOr Cele CiOm CE VICCS naona tat soe cee sie cdoue a com dcmealaed ate ceuceuataiecnd O 254 5 2 2 Error COde LiSt amd Actions srera a eed cea hte E E 256 5 3 EXOS EXO PXON FXUIEXZC PLC S siina AEE Aa 263 9 31 Eror CElISCIOMCEVICCS celia a a ea hea at Douek ee 263 532 EVrOr COCGHISE GIG ACU OM assess a aaah oe aca a iat a ee or Ae deh 26
419. tructured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 3 Character Strings 3 3 Character Strings Character strings are classified into character string constants which directly specify character strings as operands in instructions and character string data F X0S FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC F XU F X2C F X2N F X2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support character strings Character string constant ABC A device character string directly specifies a character string in a Sequence program Put half width characters inside quotation marks Example ABCD1234 in specification JIS8 codes are available Up to 32 characters can be specified as a character string Character string data With regard to character string data the range from a specified device to the NUL code 00H is handled as one character string in units of byte When expressing recognizing character string data using bit devices with digit specification however 16 bits are required also for data including NUL code 00H which specifies the end of the character string because the instruction length is 16 bits Refer to Example 2 in the step 2 below In the following cases an operation error occurs in the instruction Error cord K6706 e When 00H is not set in the corresponding device range after the device number specified as the source in an instruction e When there are insufficient devices for
420. ts lt Example 1 gt 16 bits Ty LDA M115 to M100 2nd character 1st character M115 to M100 2nd character 1st character M131 to M116 4th character 3rd character M147 to M132 6th character 5th character M147 to M132 6th character 5th character l 2 l l 2 l 2 M211 to M196 13th character M7679 to M7664 n th character M131 to M116 4th character 3rd character m OOH which indicates OOH which indicates the end of the character the end of the character string cannot be detected in the range from string can be detected the specified device to the last device number lt Example 2 gt 16 bits a M7623 to M7608 2nd character 1st character M7639 to M7624 4th character 3rd character M7655 to M7640 6th character 5th character M7671 to M7656 8th character 7th character M7679 to M7672 Because the data including OOH which indicates the end of the character string does not reach 16 bits the end of the character string data cannot be recognized 130 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 3 How to Specify Devices and Constants in Instructions Device amp Common 3 4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices Kna 3 4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices KnO Handling of bit devices Devices which handle only the ON OFF information such as X Y M and S are called bit devices On the other hand devices which handle numeric values such as T C D and R are
421. ts variable mode FROM ant 7S ratoions Taner piss a D8164 M 8165 2 SORT2 instruction Sorting in descending order pf fff M 8166 Unavailable eloeds sioug Q TEA io a atten 6 oe ee eS gga Uliak Daae a S e e EE 3 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP B23 4 Available in the ASC RS ASCI HEX CCD and CRC instructions 5 Available in Ver 2 20 or later 7 6 The CRC instruction is available only in FX3u FX3uc PLCs a 145 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Fx3u FX3uc FX3G FxX3Gc FxX3s Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function Pulse catch Met ee miei 72 Metis M 8174 M 8175 Input X005 pulse catch s M 8176 Input X006 pulse catch 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN FX3uU FX3uCc PLCs The El instruction is necessary FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs The El instruction is not necessary S S Communication port channel setting Refer to the data communication manual for details Parallel link Channel changeover OFF ch1 ON ch2 Simple N N ink Channel changeover P 2 The channel is specified by the setting whether or not M8179 is used in the setting program For the setting program refer to the data communication man
422. ttery refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC For the latched type device clear method refer to Subsection 1 2 5 3 Types of bit device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change Input relay X Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared Output relay Y Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary TE Does not change Cleared relay M l Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type Contact image memory auxiliary relay M X Y M S 7 Set to initial Special auxiliary relay M Cleared eae Does not change l General type state relay PRN Does not change Cleared S Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched backed up type state relay S Does not change Cleared Annunciator S Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Does not change Cleared For 100 ms Cleared l l Does not change while M8033 is ON Timer contact Does not change Cleared Time counting coil For 10 ms Cleared Reset coil T Does not change while M8033 is ON Retentive type for 100 ms Does not change Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change k 7 m F Does not change Cleared eneral type eared Counter contact E Does not change while M8033 is ON Counting coil Reset coil C Latched backed up type Does not change High speed type Does not change 1 Some devices are cleared when the PLC m
423. ual e ch1 Specified when M8179 is not used in the program e ch2 Specified when M8179 is used in the program Simple N N link Refer to the data communication manual for details M 8180 M 8181 Unavailable M 8182 M 8183 Data transmission sequence error master station M 8184 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 1 M 8185 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 2 M 8186 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 3 M 8187 Data transmission sequence error D8201 to D8218 slave station No 4 M 8188 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 5 M 8189 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 6 M 8190 Data transmission sequence error slave station No 7 M 8191 Data transmission sequence being executed M 8192 M 8193 M 8194 iM 8195 Unavailable M 8196 M 8197 High speed counter edge counting specification Refer to Subsection 2 7 8 for details M 8198 4 1 edge 4 edge counting selector for C251 C252 and C254 1 edge 4 edge counting selector for C253 C255 and C253 OP 3 OFF 1 edge counting ON 4 edge counting 4 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP CEES LE AE HHI EEA SEESEEESELE AE At vA vA M 8199 9 4 v v 146 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later 4 1 Special
424. ual of the PLC main unit FX3uU FX3uCc PLCs X000 to X005 5uS X006 X007 50uS FX3G FX3Gc PLCs X000 X001 X003 X004 10uS X002 X005 to X007 50uS FX3S PLC X000 X001 10uS X002 to X007 50uS FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2NC PLCs X000 X001 20uS X002 to X005 50uS F X0S F X0 F XON F XU F X2c PLCs X000 to X003 X005 50uS e Prohibition on redundant use of input terminals Inputs X000 to X007 X003 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD DSZR DVIT ZRN instructions and general purpose inputs Make sure to use each input terminal only once 69 gJ D O D O D 1 9q Ul S8OIAEq OO jue SUOD 9 d y paijioeds aoineg eads Aa soug QI SIOJOWeIe jo Buas pue s di suo oun4 2u0 N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 1 In FX3u FX3uc PLCs When FX3U 4HSX ADP units are connected to an FX3U PLC input terminals inside heavy line frames in the table below are assigned to the first FX3U 4HSX ADP unit and other input terminals are assigned to the second FX3U 4HSX ADP unit Same input numbers are assigned to input terminals of the FX3U 4HSX ADP and input terminals of the FX3U PLC main unit Use only either input terminal If both input terminals are used intended operations are not achieved because inputs of the FX3U 4HSXADP and inputs of the FX3U PLC operate under the OR relationship
425. uction can be used only once A DHSCT FXOS FX0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU FX2C F X2N FX2NC FX3S FX3G F X3GC PLCs do not support the DHSCT T instruction 2 D 1 When a comparison instruction for high speed counter is used the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters may be restricted For the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters refer to Subsection 2 7 10 1T FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 7 High Speed Counter C 2 5 Related devices 1 Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1 phase 1 counting input counters C235 M8235 1 phase 1 counting input OFF ON 2 Devices used to monitor the counting direction of 1 phase 1 counting input counters and 2 phase 2 counting input counters Up counting Down counting 3 Devices used to switch the high speed counter function FX0S F X0 F XON FX1S FX1N FX1NC FXU F X2C F X2N FX2NC PLCs do not support this function M8388 Oman fob Switening a Switches the function of high speed counter of high speed counter Switches the logic of the external reset input M8389 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 6 FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this device M8390 Switches the function of C244 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 7 FX3S FX3G FX3GC PLCs do not support this device M8391 Switches the function of C245 For details refer to Subsection 2 7 7
426. uipment tries to read an execution program from the PLC that has been written to by a computer using a project including a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid a communication error occurs and reading is disabled 3 For writing a program using a peripheral equipment other than GX Works2 Ver 1 62Q or later to a PLC that as been written to by a computer using a project including a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid execute Clear PLC memory to clear programs before writing If a program is written without executing Clear PLC memory in advance the written program cannot be read 4 It is not possible to write programs including the block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid to any PLC other than the FX3u FX3uc PLC whose version is 3 00 or later 5 If a memory cassette which saves programs including a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid is used for any PLC other than the FX3uU FX3uUc PLC Ver 3 00 or later the PLC using such a memory cassette does not run normally 303 SUI INO 09q 9q ulseoiieg N9 Oo jue SuOD 9 d y payloads aoineg eads Aa sioug Q S19 UELJed jo Bunjes pue sadi Q pme 5 D D2 TI 5 Q En O 5 D FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 7 Other Functions Device amp Common 7 1 Symbo
427. unters are classified into the hardware type and the software type according to the counting method Some high speed counters can be used together with an external reset input terminal and external start input terminal for counting start 2 Classification of high speed counters according to the counting method e Hardware counters These types of counters execute counting using hardware but are switched to software counters depending on the operation condition For the condition handled as software counters refer to Subsection 2 7 9 e Software counters These types of counters execute counting through CPU interrupt processing It is necessary to use each software counter within restrictions of both the maximum response frequency and the total frequency For restriction of the response frequency depending on the total frequency refer to Subsection 2 7 10 3 Types of high speed counters and input signal forms The table below shows the types 1 phase 1 counting 1 phase 2 counting and 2 phase 2 counting and input signals waveforms of high speed counters Input signal form Counting direction The ON OFF status of M8235 to M8245 PO specifies down counting or up counting 1 phase 1 counting input UP DOWN T i i N ON Down ounting OFF Up counting A counter executes up counting or down counting as shown on the left The counting direction can be checked in M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting
428. ured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 1 Special Device List M8000 and later D8000 and later Applicable model Number and name Content of register i z FX3U Fx3uc Fx3G Fx3Gc Fxgs Corresponding special device Step ladder and annunciator D 8040 P P z P P ON state relay number 1 D 8041 1 P P P J P ON state relay number 2 D 8042 1 ON state relay number 3 4 D8040 stores the smallest number of iy state relays D 8043 f 4 Z 7 7 T stores the second smallest number of aaie state relays M8047 D 8044 In this way D8040 to D8047 sequentially store up to 8 active V vV v A y ON state relay number 5 state relays D 8045 1 P P z P P ON state relay number 6 D 8046 P p F Z P ON state relay number 7 D 8047 ON state relay number 8 D 8048 Unavailable Le f Fee D 8049 Smallest active state among 900 to 999 when M8049 is ON relay number eoe o ee haere eee 1 Activated when the END instruction is executed 2 1000 to S4095 are available only in the FX3G FX3Gc FX3u or FX3uc PLCs Stores the smallest number of active annunciator relays M8049 Error detection Refer to Chapter 5 for details Unconnected head I O number in I O configuration error When programmed input output numbers are unconnected D8060 stores the head unconnected device number Example When X020 is unconnected aloz
429. ured temperature Ch1 D 8281 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8282 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8283 Measured temperature Ch4 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 2nd analog special adapter D 8290 Measured temperature Ch1 D 8291 Measured temperature Ch2 D 8292 Measured temperature Ch3 D 8293 Measured temperature Ch4 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch1 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch2 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch3 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 Can be connected only to 40 point or 60 point type FX3G and FX3Gc PLCs 2 The model code is 20 for the PT ADP and 21 for the PTW ADP Number 242 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 5 Errors Device amp Common 5 1 FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs 5 Errors This chapter explains error codes stored in special data registers when program errors occur in the PLC and actions to be taken against errors Support of error detection devices depends on the PLCs For details refer to Section 4 1 5 1 F X3S FX3G FX3GC FX3uU FX3uc PLCs 5 1 1 Error detection devices 1 Error detection M8060 and later and D8060 and later When some devices among M8060 M8
430. ustomer keyword is limited and is not complete 2 PLC applicability Number of PLC applicability characters Characters available in registered as FX3U FX3UC FX3S FX3G FX1S FX1N FX2N FXO FX0OS FXON keyword FX3GC FX1NC FX2NC FXU FX2C Supported Permanent PLC Lock fr Ver 2 61 or later Supported Not supported Not supported Keyword Protection 8digits 0to9 AtoF 8 characters Supported Supported Supported Supported Keyword Protection Supported 16digits Oto9 AtoF 16 characters Ver 2 20 or later Supported Not supported Not supported Supported Customer keyword 0to9 AtoF 16 characters Ver 2 61 or later Supported Not supported Not supported The security offered by the permanent PLC lock keyword 8 digits keyword 16 digits and customer keyword is limited and is not complete keyword 279 SUI NO 09q _ 1 9q uiseoiieg N9 Oo jUue SUOD 9 qd y paiyioeds aoineg eads Aa 5 O S n SJO OWEIe jo Buas pue sedi suoyoun4 JeyjQ N FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common 6 Types and Setting of Parameters 6 5 Keyword 3 Keyword setting and access restriction Setting status When the permanent PLC Lock is selected When the keyword protection 16digits customer keyword is set When the keyword protection 8digits is set When only the keyword protection 8digits is set When none of the permanent PLC lock
431. value setting and positioning setting will be used 33 Capacity or not TLZ wn Special Function Block Check this item to make valid the initial value setting function for the special f Settings function blocks units rositoning msmaghon Check this item to make valid the positioning setting function Settings Built in CC Link LT Check this item to make valid the station information setting function for the CC Settings Link LT 1 This value is the case of FX3uU FX3uc PLC Available initial value vary depending on the PLC 2 This item is supported only in FX3U FX3uc PLCs 3 This item is supported only in FX3G FX3GC FX3uU FX3uUc PLCs 4 This item is supported only in FX3Uc 32MT LT 2 suooun4 2yo N Cautions 1 FX3G FX3GC PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity is 16 001 steps or more and operate in the standard mode when the program capacity is 16 000 steps or less The instruction execution time is longer in the extension mode than in the standard mode Example Time required to execute the basic instruction LD Standard mode 0 21 us Extension mode 0 42 us 2 In FX3uU FX3uUc PLCs Ver 3 00 or later When symbolic information is stored it is deleted if the memory capacity set by parameters is changed After changing the memory capacity write the symbolic information again 3 When the memory capacity of the FX3s PLC is 16000 steps the program capacity is fixed to 4000 steps and the tota
432. vice 2 9q Ul SOOIAEq Device Display Mode Register C BIN C HEX 16 bit Range C All Address o to 100 DEC CString 64 bit C OCT C FLOAT t 32 bit f Stringi ASCII only OO Device Value See a tC l When the device value is set the set device value pa D a 8 Will be set to all the devices to be entered at once oO 3 a 5 D 3 Set the data gs Device Memory MAINI W D O v O D O D soug Q SJ J WLJEd Jo Bunjes pue sadi suo oun4 2u0 N 113 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 2 Devices in Detail Device amp Common 2 9 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER Writing transferring the data to the PLC 1 Select Online Write to PLC to open the Online Data Operation dialog box 2 Check the Device Memory to write transfer the data Online Data Operation Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection RS 232C System Image amp Write C Verify fE Execution Target Dataf Mo Yes Title ef Edit Dat Parameter Program Select All Cancel All Selections Option E it Data g V Display Size Module Name Data Name Title Target Detail Last Change Target Memory Symbolic Information BA Symbolic Information I PLC Data gt Parameter PLC Parameter 2011 07 16 09 26 08 5 Global Device Comment a COMMENT Detail 2011 07 16 09 26 09 Device Memory A j main 2011 07 16
433. wer is turned OFF while the PLC is operating all of output relays and general type auxiliary relays turn OFF Even when the power is restored after that all of output relays and general type auxiliary relays remain OFF except those whose input condition is ON In some output relays and auxiliary relays however the ON OFF status just before power interruption should be stored and then replicated when the power is restored depending on control targets In such a case use latched backed up type auxiliary relays Latched backed up type devices are backed up by a battery EEPROM etc built in the PLC For details on the backup method against power interruption refer to Section 1 2 X000 X001 The left figure shows an operation example of M600 M600 latched type device in a self holding circuit When X000 turns ON and M600 turns ON in this circuit n M600 holds its operation by itself even if X000 turns OFF Because M600 is a latched backed up type device it PLC remains activated even when the operation is restarted Backup against power interruption after X000 has turned OFF due to power interruption If a self holding circuit normally closed contact of X001 is opened when the operation is restarted however M600 is deactivated x000 SET The left figure shows a circuit using the SET and RST EN ENO instructions d M600 X001 RST EN ENO d M600 PLC Backup against power interruption set reset circuit 1 Application exam
434. when the power is turned ON 6 and isolates the built in program memory ee The PLC gives the priority to the optional memory a3 3a O ied 1 Optional memory cannot be connected to FXos FXo PLCs T a 2 FX0S FX0 PLCs do not support file registers Q of T 3 D 21 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 1 Device Outline Device amp Common 1 2 Program Memory and Devices 1 2 2 Memory operations and backup against power interruption power ON OFF and RUN STOP 1 FX3uU FX3uc PLCs 1 2 male a2 O A 9 Types of program memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Parameter Does not change Sequence program Does not change 2 Comment Does not change Can be secured by File register Does not change parameter setting Special setting Does not change 2 Symbolic information Does not change 2 Types of word device memory Item Power OFF Power OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN RUN STOP Does not change Cleared General type Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON l Latched backed up type Does not change Data register D File type Does not change 2 Set to initial yi Special type Cleared ee Does not change Extension register R Latched backed up type Does not change Extension file register ER Does not change Cleared For 100 ms Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON anemone alte Pee Gin
435. xX3Gc FX3s_ Corresponding special device Number and name Operation and function Timing clock and positioning Refer to the position control manual for details M 8330 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 1 ee see ae eae D8330 M 8331 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 2 EAE SESE D8331 M 8332 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 3 eee ee fae Te D8332 S M 8333 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 4 Le aet ee e D8333 M 8334 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 5 pf ft D8334 M 8335 Unavailable M 8336 2 DVIT instruction Interrupt input specification function enable a D8336 M 8337 Unavailable EAR Ea a ee M 8338 PLSV instruction Acceleration deceleration operation M 8339 Unavailable M 8340 YOOO Pulse output monitor TY000 Pulse output monitor ON BUSY OFF READY BUSY OFF READY M 83412 Y000 Clear signal output function enable M 8342 2 Y000 Zero point return direction specification M 8343 Y000 Normal rotation limit moema S MBAS e EARS i M 8349 vo00 Pulse output stop command MT YM TY rr T TY001 Pulse output monitor ON BUSYIOFF READY 7 7 7 7 7 i M 83517 Oe eee AA a a M 8352 2 Y001 Zero point return direction specification REaARATAEAreS 3 M 8353 Y001 Normal rotation limit S S cE NERDE ERED M 8354 Y001 Reverse rotation limit ARTEA M 8355 2 Y001 Near point watchdog signal logic reverse v M 8356 2 Y001 Zero point signal
436. y the value in the range from 0 to 15 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF Input terminal Filter 224 FXCPU Structured Programming Manual 4 Operations of Special Devices M8000 and later D8000 and later Device amp Common 4 2 Supplement of Special Devices M8000 and later and D8000 and later 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter When the program shown below is executed the filter constant is changed to O ms Because the C R filter is provided in the hardware however the filter constant actually becomes the value shown in the table below when 0 is specified M8000 RUN monitor KO Input number Input filter value when 0 is set X000 to X001 10us X002 to X017 50us e The input filter value can be changed as many times as needed in the middle of a program e The input filter adjustment described here is not necessary when high speed counters input interrupts or pulse catch relays M8170 to M8175 are used 4 FX2N FX2Nc PLCs Inputs X000 to X017 have a digital filter circuit of O to 60 ms respectively The digital filter constant is determined by the value in the range from 0 to 60 stored in the special data register D8020 D8020 is automatically set to 10 ms when the PLC is powered ON from OFF Input terminal Filter 1 Program example for adjusting the input filter When the program shown below is executed th
437. zed 3 3 Annunciator type E Annunciator type state relays can be also used as outputs for external fault diagnosis Z o For example when an external fault diagnosis circuit shown in the figure below is created and the contents of the special data register D8049 are monitored the smallest number out of the active state relays S900 to 4 S999 is displayed If two or more faults have occurred the smallest state relay number having a fault is displayed at first When a the displayed fault is cleared the next smallest state relay number having a fault is stored in D8049 and D displayed 5 M8000 8 M8049 When the special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven monitoring RUN monitor becomes valid Yo00 X000 sioug Q If the forward end detection input X000 is not activated within 1 second after the forward output YOOO is driven S900 is activated X001 X002 If both the upper limit detection input X001 and the lower limit 6 detection input X002 are deactivated at the same time for 2 Seer seconds or more S901 is activated s25 3g oe X003 X004 In a machine whose takt time is less than 10 seconds if the switch X004 which is designed to be activated during one cycle operation of the machine is not activated while the continuous 7 operation mode input X003 is ON S902 is activated Q When any of annunciator type state relays S900 to S999 turns ON the special auxiliary relay M8048 is activated and the fault D display output Y010

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

ineo+ 6500  小型、軽量化 した New モデル誕生！！ 完全ストレートな流路構造をもつ  Original operating instructions CNC-portal  AT&T Blackberry Curve User's Manual  Contrôleur BPC 5000 Manuel de l`utilisateur    USB-485 RJ45-DS9P 取扱説明書  offerte  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file